Skip to main content

Full text of "The story of music and musicians for young readers"

See other formats


7 


THE    STORY 

OF 

MUSIC  AND  MUSICIANS 


FOR 


YOUNG    READERS 


BY 


LUCY  C.  LILLIE 


AUTHOR  OP 

"  THE  STORY  OF  ENGLISH  LITERATURE  FROM  CHAUCER  TO  COWPER " 
"PRUDENCE"  "MILDRED'S  BARGAIN"  "NAN"  ETC. 


fillustratrti 


NEW    YORK 
HARPER    &    BROTHERS,    FRANKLIN    SQUARE 


HARPER'S  YOUNG  PEOPLE  SERIES. 

Illustrated.    Post  Svo.  Cloth,  Ornamental,  $1  25  per  vol. 

L4.-KEST  ISSUES: 

RAFTM  ATES.    A  Story  of  the  Gre»t  River.     By  KIEK  MUNHOB. 
CANOEMATES.    A  Story  of  the  Florida  Reofs  and  Everglade*.     By  KIRK  MUNROE. 
CAMPMATES.    A  Story  of  the  Plains.     By  KIEK  MT-CKOK. 
DORYMATES.    A  Tale  of  the  Fishing  Banks.     By  KIEK  MUNROB. 
THE  MYSTERV  OF   ABEL  FOREFINGER.     By  WILLI.M  DCYSDALI. 
THE   MATE  OF  THE  "MARY   ANN."     By  SOPHIE  SWETT. 
FLYING  HILL  FARM.     By  SOPHIE  Sw«rr. 
YOUNG   LUCRETIA,  und  Other  Stories.     By  MARY  E.  WitKixs. 
THE  MIDNIGHT  WARNING,  and  Other  Stories.     By  EDWARD  H.  HOUSE. 
THE  MOON    PIUNCE.  and  Other  Nabobs.     By  RICHARD  KENDALL  ML-NKITTBICK. 
DIEGO  PINZON.     By  JOHN  RCSRELL  CORYELL. 

PHIL  AND  THE   BABY,  AND  FALSE   WITNESS.    Two  Storle*.     By  LCCY  C.  LILLIE. 
A  BOY'S  TOWN.    Described  for  HIKPER'S  YOU.XG  PEOPLE.    By  W.  D.  HOWBLLS. 


PDULISIIKD  BT  HARPER  &  BROTHERS,  NKW  YORK. 

The  abm«  amrkt  are  for  mlt  hv  all  bcnktetltrt.  or  mil  be  tent  by  the  pvbHJieri,  pntlage 
prepaid,  to  any  part  of  the  Uniteii  Statet,  Canada,  or  Mtxieo,  on  reeeij*  of  the  priet. 


Copyright,  1880,  by  HARPER  &  BROTHERS. 


JANET  EDMONDSON  WALKER 

JREMEMBRANCE  OF  MANY  MUSICAL  ASSOCIATIONS 
Ai  HOME  AND  ABROAD 


2091425 


PREFACE. 


THE  only  necessity  for  a  preface  to  this  little  book  is  to 
explain  that  the  work  is  not  designed  to  take  the  place  of 
text- books,  works  on  harmony  or  thorough-bass,  or  those 
interesting  lives  of  the  great  musicians  which  competent 
writers  have  given  to  us.  Its  object  is  only  to  interest 
young  students  in  music  in  the  technique  of  their  art, 
and  in  the  associations  amid  which  great  masters  have 
worked.  Only  such  rules  of  harmony  are  given  as  have  a 
direct  bearing  upon  the  subject  or  composition  under  dis- 
cussion, and  these  I  have  presented,  after  comparing  them 
with  standard  authorities,  in  as  simple  a  fashion  as  possi- 
ble, relying  upon  any  reader  who  is  a  thoughtful  student 
progressing  to  technical  study  under  a  scientific  instructor. 
Meanwhile  some  impetus  and  enthusiasm  may  be  added, 
from  reading  this  simple  story  of  an  art  which  all  nations 
are  in  some  fashion  developing  to-day,  and  which  had  its 
origin  in  an  age  that  gave  a  significance  to  the  victor  crown 
of  bay-leaves  and  laurel. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

The  Piano-forte. — Its  History. — Clavichord,  Virginal,  and  Spinet. — Anec- 
dote of  Queen  Elizabeth. — An  Old  Harpsichord. — Piano-forte  playing 
in  the  Time  of  Bach,  Mozart,  and  Beethoven Page  13 

CHAPTER  II. 

Musical  Standards  Yesterday  and  To-day. — How  to  Enjoy  the  Story  of 
any  Art.  —  A  Harmony  Class.  —  A  Fascinating  Story.  — Early  Nota- 
tion.— A  Musical  Note-book 30 

CHAPTER  III. 

How  to  Feel  about  Study.— First  Steps.— The  Key-board.— The  Family 
of  Notes. — Staff. — Degrees. — Intervals. — How  to  Understand  the  First 
Rules  of  Harmony. — Suggestions  for  Note-book 46 

CHAPTER  IV. 

John  Sebastian  Bach. — His  Early  Childhood. — The  Gavotte. — Its  Origin. 
— A  Court  Dance. — The  Fugue. — Explanation  of  this  Form  of  Com- 
position.— Passion  Music. — Anecdote  of  the  Basques. — How  Mendels- 
sohn revived  Bach's  Passion  Music 53 

CHAPTER  V. 

Rhythm  and  Time. — Bach's  Developments. — A  Simple  Explanation. — 
Keys  and  their  Families. — A  Bach  Fugue. — Minor  Scales. — Modula- 


viii  Contents. 

tions. — Accidentals. — A  few  Words  about  Signatures. — "Why  Han- 
del and  his  Contemporaries  discarded  the  lowest  Note  of  the  Signa- 
ture  Page  69 

CHAPTER  VI. 

George  Frederick  Handel.  —  An  English  Country-house. — A  Young 
Lady's  Impressions  of  the  great  Composer  in  1711. — "Tweedledum 
andTweedledee." — "Rinaldo"  and  other  Operas. — A  Friendly  Cote- 
rie.— "The  Harmonious  Blacksmith." — "Mr.  Handel"  in  Dublin. — 
Mr.  Dubourg. — The  First  Performance  of  the  "Messiah." — Last  Days. 
— Definition  and  History  of  the  Oratorio 79 

CHAPTER  VII. 

The  Story  of  the  Opera. — Count  Vernio  and  his  Friends. — A  Musical 
Centre  in  Florence. — The  First  Opera. — Instruments  used. — Allesan- 
dro  Scarlatti. — Stradella. — The  Size  of  the  Opera  in  England. — Henry 
Purcell  and  the  Westminster  Boys. —  An  Old  Picture. — Gluck  and 
Marie  Antoinette. — Gluck's  Boyhood. — Fashion  and  Art. — Gluck  de- 
termined to  Reform  the  Spirit  of  the  Opera. — Classical  Music,  and 
how  to  Define  it 94 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

"Papa  Haydn." — What  came  of  a  Frolic. — The  Wig-maker's  House- 
hold.— The  Wandering  Minstrels. — "Whose  Music  is  that?" — Sym- 
phonies.— What  they  are. — Haydn's  Last  Hours 114 

CHAPTER  IX. 

The  Story  of  the  Sonata. — Suites  and  Madrigals. — Corelli's  Work. — Anec- 
dote of  Handel  in  Rome. — "C  Major." — The  Movements  of  the  So- 
nata Explained  and  Defined. — Old  Dances  and  Dance  Tunes. — What 
the  Minstrels  and  Soldiers  of  the  Sixteenth  Century  Introduced. — Min- 
uets. —  Scherzos 124 

CHAPTER  X. 

Wolfgang  Amadeus  Mozart.— "  Master  and  Miss  Mozart,  Prodigies  of 
Nature."— A  Concert  in  the  London  of  1765.— "Nannerl."— The  Chil- 


Contents.  ix 

dren's  Presents. — Home  Discipline. — The  House  in  Chelsea. — Playing 
and  Composing. — The  First  Symphony. — An  Old  Letter. — Duets  a 
Novelty. — In  Italy. — The  First  Opera. — An  Important  Visit. — The 
Weber  Family. — A  Heartless  Coquette. — Constanza. — "The  Magic 
Flute."— Last  Days Page  134 

CHAPTER  XL 

Ecclesiastical  Music. — Early  Writers. — Palestrina  and  the  Council  of 
Trent. — An  Important  Decision.— The  Reform. — Mass  Music  of  Va- 
rious Composers 150 

CHAPTER  XII. 

Ludwig  von  Beethoven. — Boyhood  and  First  Studies. — At  the  Princess 
Lichnowsky's. — Cold  Water  and  Compositions. — An  Amusing  Anec- 
dote.—Sad  Years. — "Adelaide." — Blind! — Last  Days 164 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Beethoven  and  the  Concerto. — Explanation  of  this  Form  of  Composition. 
— Viadana. — Difference  between  Composers'  Methods. — Cadenzas,  and 
what  they  mean 173 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

Carl  Maria  von  Weber. — Story  of  his  Life. — A  Baby  Prodigy. — Anec- 
dote of  his  Life  at  the  Court  of  Wurtemberg. — "  Der  Freischiltz." — In 
London  with  Moscheles. — A  Last  Visit. — Asleep. — Overtures  and 
their  Origin. — Structure. — Weber's  Work. — Mendelssohn's  Use  of  the 
Term. — Overtures  of  English  Composers 177 

CHAPTER  XV. 

The  Orchestra  of  Yesterday  and  To-day. — Its  Origin. — Distinction  be- 
tween Orchestras  and  Bands. — A  Wedding  Celebration  in  the  Six- 
teenth Century. — Due  de  Joyeuse. — Lutes  and  Viols. — First  Orches- 
tra on  Record. — Italian  Developments. — Scarlatti's  Obligato. — One 
Hundred  Years  of  Progress. — List  of  Instruments. — Chamber  Music. 
— A  Conductor's  Responsibility. — First  Use  of  the  Baton. — Mendels- 
sohn's Facility  in  remembering  Work. — An  old  Sketch-book 188 


Contents. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

Felix  Mendelssohn-Bartholdy. — Work  and  Play. — The  Juvenile  Orchestra. 
— A  Pretty  Picture. — Fanny  Mendelssohn. — A  Famous  Journey. — A 
Letter  from  Goethe's  House. — Moscheles  in  Berlin. — A  Memorable 
Evening. — The  E-flat  Concerto. — Work  and  Recreation. — Fanny's 
Marriage. — In  London  and  at  Birmingham. — With  the  Moscheleses. — 
A  Happy  Marriage. — Founding  the  Conservatory  of  Leipsic. — Fanny's 
Sudden  Death. — The  "Elijah." — "And  behold,  the  Lord  passed  by." 
— Last  Days Page  197 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

A  Trio  :  Chopin,  Schubert,  and  Schumann. —  Chopin  in  Paris. — Anec- 
dote of  a  Memorable  Visit. — Flowers  and  Nocturnes. — A  Brief  Story. 
— Schubert's  Life. — Teaching  School  and  Composing. — One  Stormy 
Afternoon. — "The  Erl  King." — Beethoven's  Friendship. — Last  Days. 
— Robert  Schumann. — A  Brilliant  Genius. — Little  Clara  Wieck. — A 
Happy  Marriage. — Sad  Years. — His  Last  Hours 209 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

Musical  Culture.— A  Young  Girl's  Diary. — Stepping-stones. — An  Over- 
romantic  Student 223 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

The  Purpose  of  the  Book. — Technique. — Standard  Authorities. — Pro- 
fessional Pianists. — Books  on  Music. — Conservatories  at  Home  and 
Abroad. — The  Expense  of  Foreign  Study. — Shining  Lights.— Au- 
thorities used. — How  to  study  Music  profitably 231 

INDEX  . .  .  .237 


ILLUSTKATIONS. 


PAGB 

SONGS  OF  PKAISE Frontispiece. 

ITALIAN  SPINET,  ORNAMENTED  WITH  PRECIOUS  STONES 14 

VIRGINAL 15 

PIANO  OP  ABOUT  1777 17 

HANDEL'S  HARPSICHORD 19 

LUDWIG  TON  BEETHOVEN 23 

YOUNG  BACH  COPYING  Musrc  BY  MOONLIGHT. 54 

JOHN  SEBASTIAN  BACH .   .   66 

GEORGE  FREDERICK  HANDEL 81 

THE  BOY  LULLI 98 

IN  THE  CHOIR-SCHOOL  AT  WESTMINSTER  ABBEY 101 

PAPA  HAYDN 107 

YOUNG  HAYDN  SINGING  BEFORE  THE  TWO  GREAT  MUSICIANS. 115 

CHRISTOPH  HITTER  VON  GLUCK 126 

WOLFGANG  AMADEUS  MOZART 185 

CARL  MARIA  VON  WEBER 179 

EICHARD  WAGNER 186 

FELIX  MENDELSSOHN-BARTHOLDY 199 

IGNATZ  MOSCHELES 208 

SCHUBERT  SEARCHING  FOR  THE  ARTICLES  HIS  FELLOW  -  STUDENTS 

HAVE  HIDDEN 215 

MADAME  CLARA  SCHUMANN  . .  .  222 


THE  STORY  OF  MUSIC  AND  MUSICIANS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

The  Piano-forte.— Its  History. — Clavichord, Virginal,  and  Spinet. — Anec- 
dote of  Queen  Elizabeth. — An  Old  Harpsichord. — Piano-forte  playing 
in  the  Time  of  Bach,  Mozart,  and  Beethoven. 

I  WONDER  how  many  young  people  who  sit  down  to 
practise  or  take  a  lesson  at  the  piano-forte  know  the  story 
of  the  instrument  now  familiar  in  every  household  of  the 
civilized  world.  Look  at  it  as  we  have  it  to-day,  almost 
perfect  in  size  and  quality  and  tone.  It  is  capable  of  pro- 
ducing the  fullest  and  the  softest  sounds,  just  as  its  name 
indicates,  for  piano  means  soft,  and  forte  means  loud.  Can 
you  realize  that  little  more  than  a  hundred  years  ago  pianos 
were  a  rarity  ?  Only  one  or  two  makers  produced  any  in- 
struments worthy  of  the  name,  and  few  households  possessed 
one.  "  But,"  I  can  hear  my  young  readers  exclaim,  "  the 
music  we  play  on  our  pianos — Bach  and  Hadyn,  as  well  as 
old  English  airs — were  certainly  played  on  some  horizontal 
instrument."  Of  course  they  were,  but  not  on  our  kind  of 


The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

piano-fortes ;  and  the  story  I  am 
going  to  tell  will  take  you  back  far 
into  the  sixteenth  century,  when 
ladies  of  rank,  and  monks  and  nuns, 
and  some  troubadours,  had  the  in- 
struments from  which  our  piano  is 
descended.  Such  were  known  as 
the  clavichord  and  virginal. 

The  clavichord  was  perfected 
about  1500,  and  the  name  was  de- 
rived from  clam  (a  key)  and  chorda 
(a  string);  so  you  see  at  once  that 
it  contained  the  two  principal  ele- 
ments of  our  piano-forte.  Although 
it  went  out  of  use  in  Bach's  day, 
yet  that  dear  old  master,  whose  ga- 
vottes all  our  young  people  are 
playing  now,  loved  to  use  it.  The 
piano-forte  had  been  invented,  but 
Bach  loved  his  old  clavichord.  As 
he  sat  thrumming  it,  I  think  he 
liked  to  fancy  himself  away  in  the 
early  sixteenth-century  days,  when 
Henry  the  Seventh's  court  enjoy- 
ed madrigals  and  queer  little  bits 


The  Virginal.  15 

of  music  on  the  same  sort  of  an  instrument.  Following 
the  clavichord,  we  have  that  graceful,  romantic  instrument 
called  the  virginal.  This  was  an  improvement  on  the  clavi- 
chord ;  and  towards  the  close  of  the  sixteenth  centnr}r  we 
find  its  name  in  poetry, 
romance,  biography  — 
indeed  in  history. 

The  virginal  produced 
a  low,  tinkling  sort  of 
sound  not  unlike  that 
of  the  German  zither. 
Only  ladies  of  quality, 
musicians,  or  nuns  or 
monks  in  convents,  per- 
formed upon  the  virgin- 
al ;  and  so  I  think  we 
associate  it  with  all  the 
grace  and  beauty  and  the 
slow  stateliness  of  that 
romantic  epoch.  When 

I  think  of  a  virginal  it  seems  to  me  to  bring  many  sugges- 
tions of  rich  colors,  softly  fading  lights,  the  flash  of  jewels 
or  the  movement  of  white  hands,  of  oak  wainscoting  and 
tapestried  walls  —  perhaps  some  very  sad  and  sorrowing 
heart,  perhaps  some  young  and  hopeful  one,  but  always 


VIRGINAL. 


1 6  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

something  that  is  picturesque  and  dreamy.  Perhaps  we 
would  not  think  it  so  sweet  an  instrument  to-day,  but  as- 
suredly in  the  sixteenth  century  it  moved  people  to  very 
tender,  elevated  thoughts.  Shakespeare  wrote  of  it  with 
deep  feeling,  and  there  are  some  quaint  lines  of  Spenser's 
about  it — 

"My  love  doth  sit ...  playing  alone,  careless,  on  her  heavenly  virginals." 

In  1583  Sir  James  Melvil  was  sent  by  Mary  Stuart  to 
England  as  ambassador,  and  in  his  memoirs  he  relates  how 
lie  heard  Queen  Elizabeth  play.  He  says  that  Lord  Huns- 
den  took  him  up  into  a  "quiet  gallery,"  where,  unknown  to 
the  queen,  he  might  hear  her  play.  The  two  gentlemen 
stood  outside  a  tapestried  door -way,  from  within  which 
came  the  soft  tinkle,  tinkle  of  the  virginal.  I  wish  he  had 
told  us  what  the  Queen  was  playing.  Presently,  it  appears, 
his  curiosity  to  see  her  Majesty  overcame  his  prudence,  and 
he  softly  raised  the  curtain  and  \vent  into  the  room.  The 
queen  played  on  "a  melody  which  ravished  him,"  he  says, 
but  for  some  moments  did  not  see  any  one  was  listening. 
Is  it  not  a  pretty  picture? 

At  that  time  the  Queen  had  not  lost  the  charm  of  youth, 
and  in  her  splendid  dress,  with  her  head  down -bent,  her 
figure  at  the  quaint  virginal  against  the  rich  and  sombre 
colors  of  the  room,  must  have  looked  charming  to  the  silent 


Queen  Elisabeth  and  the  Ambassador.  17 

Scotch  gentleman  just  inside  the  door-way  listening  in  rapt 
attention.  It  is  so  poetic  a  picture  of  the  time  we  can  al- 
most hear  her  music ;  and  if  we  read  on  a  little  farther,  we 
see  that  the  Queen,  suddenly  seeing  Sir  James,  came  for- 
ward, remonstrating  with  him  for  having  come  in,  for,  she 


PIANO  OP  ABOUT   177T. 

said,  she  was  not  used  to  play  before  people,  but  only  to 
"  shun  melancholy."  Then  she  sat  down  upon  a  low  cush- 
ion, and  honest  Sir  James,  according  to  the  custom  of  the 
time,  fell  upon  his  knees  before  her.  The  Queen,  with  a 
truly  feminine  spirit,  inquired  whether  he  thought  she  or 

2 


1 8  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

Mary  Queen  of  Scots  played  the  best.  Sir  James  said  that 
his  sovereign  played  "  reasonably  for  a  queen."  This  an- 
swer would  not  serve  to-day,  as  the  Queen  of  England  is 
one  of  the  most  perfect  of  amateur  musicians. 

The  virginal  and  spinet  belong  to  the  same  period.  From 
them,  as  need  of  a  more  elaborate  performance  grew,  we 
have  the  harpsichord.  A  very  fine  harpsichord  looked  some- 
thing like  a  grand  piano,  but  it  had  two  rows  of  keys,  one 
upper  and  one  lower.  I  shall  not  here  go  into  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  harpsichord.  It  is  only  needful  to  say  that  it 
was  the  outgrowth  of  clavichord  and  virginal  and  spinet, 
and  had  some  of  the  defects  as  well  as  the  good  points  of 
all  three. 

Our  grandmothers  played  upon  harpsichords.  They  were 
tinkling  little  affairs,  yet  I  fancy  that  Mozart's  and  Haydn's 
music  must  have  sounded  very  quaint  and  pleasing  upon 
them.  Where  have  they  all  vanished  to,  I  wonder?  Along 
with  the  flowery  brocaded  gowns,  the  slender  fans,  the  pow- 
der and  patches  and  paint,  of  that  dear  old  time? 

In  an  old  house  I  once  visited,  a  harpsichord  of  seventeen 
hundred  and  something  used  to  stand  neglected  and  disused 
in  an  upper  hall.  Sometimes  we  children  thrummed  waltz- 
es upon  it;  sometimes  I  remember  our  getting  out  a  faded 
old  music-book  with  the  picture  of  a  shepherdess  on  it,  and 
picking  out  the  funny  little  songs  that  were  printed  there  a 


The  Harpsichord.  19 

hundred  years  ago.     On  the  fly-leaf  of  the  book  was  writ- 
ten, in  a  very  flourishy  hand,  "To  Isabel,  from  J ." 

Who  was  Isabel,  and  who  was  J ,  we  used  to  wonder. 

I  can   fancy  that  the   music   she  played  to  please  her 


HANDEL  8  HARPSICHORD. 


mamma  and  papa,  and  perhaps  her  uncles  and  aunts,  was 
of  a  very  primitive  order,  for  when  harpsichords  were  used 
young  ladies  were  not  at  all  proficient.  Music  was  then 
considered  a  "genteel"  sort  of  accomplishment,  and  good 
masters  were  very  rare,  and  never  tried  to  make  their  pu- 


2O  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

pils  do  more  than  strike  the  notes  correctly  and  in  good 
"dum-dum"  sort  of  time.  Consider  our  advantages  now; 
and  yet  I  fancy  those  young  people  of  Isabel's  day  valued 
their  musical  instruction  much  more  than  we  do  ours. 

Well,  then,  from  this  pretty,  picturesque  harp'sichord  pe- 
riod we  find  ourselves  by  slow  degrees  in  that  of  the  piano, 
and  I  suppose  the  first  thing  you  will  wish  to  know  is  how 
a  piano-forte  differs  from  these  other  instruments  of  which 
I  have  been  writing.  The  principal  difference  is  that  the 
strings  are  struck  with  a  hammer.  About  the  beginning 
of  the  eighteenth  century  this  idea  had  originated  with  three 
men  at  once  —  an  Italian  named  Cristofari,  a  Frenchman 
named  Marius,  and  a  German  named  Schroter ;  but  all  in- 
vestigators seem  convinced  that  Cristofari  was  the  real  origi- 
nator. His  ideas  were  the  best.  So,  later  in  the  century, 
when  harpsichords  began  to  be  thought  incomplete,  differ- 
ent makers  tried  to  produce  something  better,  and  the  re- 
sult was  the  primitive  piano-forte. 

At  this  time  the  composer  Sebastian  Bach  was  in  Berlin. 
Frederick  the  Great  was  eager  to  hear  him  play ;  and  as 
that  famous  sovereign  possessed  several  of  the  new  piano- 
fortes (or  forte-pianos,  as  they  then  were  called),  Bach  came 
one  evening  to  the  palace,  where  a  crowd  of  gay  ladies  and 
gentlemen  were  assembled. 

The  composer  had  to  go  from  room  to  room,  trying  first 


Improving  the  Piano-forte.  21 

one  of  the  new  pianos,  then  another.  These  instruments 
were  manufactured  in  Germany;  but,  later,  English  and 
French  pianos  took  the  palm,  and  about  the  beginning  of 
this  century  American  ladies  were  growing  proficient  in  the 
art  of  piano-playing — proficient  at  least  for  that  day.  Have 
you  not  all  seen  your  grandmammas'  music-books,  in  which 
"The  Battle  of  Prague"  is  an  honored  "piece?"  True, 
there  were  hundreds  of  nobler  works,  but  only  public  per- 
formers seem  to  have  attempted  them. 

Let  us  see  to  what  degree  piano-forte  playing  had  pro- 
gressed when  Mozart  died,  in  1792,  and  when  the  great 
master,  Ludwig  von  Beethoven,  was  a  young  man  just  en- 
tering on  his  career  of  work. 

To  begin  with,  let  us  look  at  the  pianos  of  that  day.  Al- 
though the  harpsichord  had  been  greatly  improved  upon, 
the  keys  and  strings  yet  needed  something  to  aid  elasticity 
of  touch.  In  Bach's  day  it  had  been  the  custom  to  strike 
the  key,  drawing  the  fingers  inward  slightly,  and  a  supple- 
ness of  wrist,  which  masters  think  so  much  of  at  present, 
was  not  considered  valuable.  But  with  Haydn  and  Mozart 
came  a  need  of  something  finer  in  the  piano-forte  itself,  and 
musicians  felt  strongly  the  necessity  of  an  improvement  in 
the  instrument  whereby  they  could  make  more  gradual 
effects.  Many  efforts  to  alter  the  strings  and  hammers  for 
this  purpose  proved  unsuccessful ;  but  at  last  the  main  dif- 


22  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

ficulties  were  overcome,  and  before  Beethoven's  death,  in 
1827,  pianos  of  various  degrees  of  excellence  were  in  use, 
with  all  the  desired  improvements.  To  this  more  than  to 
anything  else  we  owe  the  improvement  in  piano -forte 
playing. 

At  concerts  during  this  period  the  piano  was  largely 
used,  and  also  in  private  houses ;  but  lessons  from  the  best 
masters  were  rare,  and,  unless  the  pupil  designed  to  pursue 
a  musical  career,  few  except  the  leading  people  of  society 
studied  piano-forte  music.  In  general,  the  interest  in  it 
was  not  great.  Poor  Beethoven  used  often  to  writhe  under 
what  he  considered  personal  slights.  A  story  is  told  of  his 
once  being  at  the  house  of  Prince with  Hies,  the  fa- 
mous musician.  They  were  invited  to  play  together,  and 
while  in  the  midst  of  their  performance  a  yonng  nobleman 
at  the  lower  end  of  the  salon  talked  quite  loudly  with  his 
companion.  Beethoven  glared  at  him  once  or  twice  in  vain, 
and  finally  lifting  Bies's  hands  from  the  piano,  he  called 
out,  "  Stop  !  I  will  not  play  for  such  dogs !"  and  away  he 
went,  in  spite  of  every  attempt  to  an  apology. 

Such  interruptions  to  music  in  a  drawing-room  occur 
often  enough  now ;  but  in  the  beginning  of  this  century,  as 
I  said,  piano-forte  performances  were  confined  to  a  much 
smaller  number,  and  naturally  appreciation  was  not  general. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  a  child  showed  any  ability,  it  was 


I.VDWIG   VON   BEETHOVEN. 


Patronage,  25 

kept  very  closely  to  study.  Mozart  had  pupils  who  thought 
nothing  of  five  hours'  practice  a  day;  and  Beethoven,  when 
a  boy,  was  kept  to  the  piano  for  hours  by  means  of  a  good 
beating  every  time  he  left  it. 

The  misery  of  a  musical  career  at  that  time  was  certainly 
lack  of  general  understanding  of  the  art.  Musicians  had  to 
procure  for  themselves  noble  patrons — rich  ladies  or  gentle- 
men who  would  help  them  on  in  their  divine  art,  patronize 
their  concerts,  get  pensions  for  them,  or  in  some  cases  offer 
them  homes  where  they  might  work  unmolested  by  debt 
and  other  domestic  trouble.  In  this  way  Beethoven  lived  a 
great  part  of  the  time  at  the  house  of  Princess  Lichnowsky, 
in  Vienna.  Mozart  was  also  indebted  to  some  friends  for 
hospitality  and  influence,  and  indeed,  where  the  public  were 
so  often  unappreciative,  private  patronage  had  to  be  sought 
for,  in  order  that  the  world  might  have  many  of  the  noble 
harmonies  we  possess  to-day. 

In  those  days  the  famous  composers  or  musicians  were 
the  only  teachers,  so  that  any  young  student  who  cared  for 
his  work  had  admirable  opportunity  to  improve.  Mozart 
gave  lessons  of  great  length,  and  seems  to  have  enjoyed 
them  heartily.  Haydn  had  many  pupils,  one  of  whom  was 
Beethoven ;  and  we  read  that  he  paid  Haydn  eighteen  cents 
a  lesson ! 

During  that  period  which  includes  the  last  years  of  Mo- 


26  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

zart's  life  and  the  first  of  Beethoven's,  between  1780  and 
1792,  the  way  was  being  laid  for  Beethoven's  grandest  work, 
and  yet  we  can  hardly  call  it  a  transition  state ;  that  is  to 
say,  a  period  of  time  when  any  art  is  undergoing  a  change 
which  shall  effect  its  whole  purpose.  But  with  Beethoven 
came  the  perfection  of  the  sonata  and  the  symphony,  and 
all  performers,  whether  in  public  or  private,  who  attempted 
his  works  were  compelled  to  understand  technique  and  the 
use  of  their  lingers  on  the  key-board ;  so  that  we  may  say, 
justly  enough,  that  with  Beethoven  we  seern  almost  to  begin 
a  new  era  in  piano-forte  music. 

I  have  told  you  the  step  upward  old  Bach  made ;  then 
Haydn  went  still  farther,  preparing  the  way  for  Beethoven's 
perfect  work.  Mozart's  brilliancy  and  delicacy,  both  as  a 
performer  and  a  composer,  helped  the  movement  on  in 
every  way,  and  during  the  first  quarter  of  this  century  a 
number  of  men  came  into  fame  as  masters  in  execution  and 
composition  as  well.  Indeed,  with  the  beginning  of  this 
century  piano  -  playing  had  reached  a  period  of  excellence 
which  allowed  a  master  to  indulge  all  his  feelings  and  ideas 
in  composing  for  this  instrument. 

In  1787  Beethoven,  then  a  lad  of  about  seventeen,  visited 
Mozart  in  Yienna.  It  was  about  the  time  that  "  Don  Gio- 
vanni" was  being  produced,  and  Mozart's  mind  was  full  of 
its  importance,  so  that  the  visit  seemed  of  much  less  con- 


Great  Performers.  27 

sequence  to  him  than  to  Beethoven.  The  latter  seated  him- 
self at  the  piano,  Mozart  standing  by  waiting,  good-humor- 
edly,  for  one  of  the  usual  performances  of  "  prodigies " 
whose  parents  destine  them  for  the  public.  But  the  lad 
played  so  brilliantly  that  Mozart  could  not  but  believe  that 
he  was  executing  a  well  -  prepared  piece.  Beethoven  felt 
this,  and  eagerly  begged  Mozart  to  give  him  a  theme  and 
let  him  vary  upon  it. 

To  this  Mozart  consented,  and  presently  the  room  seemed 
to  vibrate  with  the  rush  of  harmony  beneath  Beethoven's 
touch.  Mozart  listened  in  silent  admiration,  and  going 
softly  upon  tiptoe  into  the  next  room,  said  to  some  friends 
assembled  there, 

"Pay  attention  to  him.  He  will  make  a  noise  in  the 
world  some  day  or  other  " — a  prophecy  soon  fulfilled. 

Beethoven's  touch  was  strong  and  masterly,  but  rather 
heavy,  and  as  his  deafness  increased,  his  performances  on  the 
piano  were  almost  painful  to  listen  to.  His  left  hand  often 
remained  unconsciously  on  the  wrong  chord.  Mozart  never 
lost  the  brilliancy  of  his  playing.  Haydn,  it  is  said,  made 
the  piano  "  sing ;"  but  to  the  musicians  who  followed  Bee- 
thoven we  owe  the  perfection  of  piano-forte  playing  and 
instruction.  Moscheles,  Mendelssohn,  Chopin,  and  others 
realized  the  highest  art  in  execution.  Not  very  long  ago 
a  lady  was  recounting  to  me  scenes  in  which,  according  to 


28  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

her  description,  Mendelssohn  and  Moscheles  performed  act- 
ual marvels  at  the  piano,  the  delicacy  and  lightness  of  both 
their  styles  reminding  her  "of  a  forest  full  of  delicious 
birds." 

In  the  period  of  which  I  speak  now — that  is,  the  begin- 
ning of  this  century — you  will  remember  how  little  public 
appreciation  of  art  existed,  and  how  hard  the  greatest  men 
toiled  for  all  they  obtained.  But  love  of  art  is  powerful. 
It  will  carry  any  one  of  you  over  the  roughest  places ;  and, 
in  looking  at  your  well-arranged  exercises,  try  to  remember 
those  patient,  eager  students  of  eighty  years  ago,  to  whom 
every  bit  of  help  came  so  slowly  that  we  of  to-day  ought  to 
think  our  pathway  cleared  of  every  thorn. 

As  time  went  on,  and  the  interest  in  the  instrument 
grew,  the  mechanism  of  the  piano-forte  was  improved,  and 
at  this  date  (1881)  it  is  considered  perfect.  Here  and  there 
as  you  play,  as  you  listen  to  the  sounds  of  the  little  hammer 
falling  on  the  strings,  let  your  thoughts  wander  back  to 
Mary  Queen  of  Scots  and  Elizabeth  of  England,  with  their 
virginals  and  spinets — indeed,  farther  into  the  realm  of  po- 
etic, dreamy  sound,  for  beyond  these  were  clavicytheriums, 
citoles  and  citherns,  dulcimers  and  psalteries,  and  in  the 
East,  among  the  people  whom  we  see  now  in  sculpture,  a 
whole  line  of  lyres  and  harps  and  lutes. 

It  may  not  seem  that  so  far  away  as  early  Egyptian  days 


Ancient  Musical  Engravings.  29 

was  the  first  idea  of  our  piano,  yet  certainly  such  is  the 
case.  In  some  far  Eastern  country  you  might  see,  graven 
in  stone  of  centuries  gone  by,  a  figure  holding  an  instru- 
ment dimly  shadowing  that  on  which  you  now  may  play 
all  written  music. 


3O  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 


CHAPTER  H. 

Musical  Standards  Yesterday  and  To-day. — How  to  Enjoy  the  Story  of 
any  Art.  —  A  Harmony  Class.  —  A  Fascinating  Story.  —  Early  Nota- 
tion.—A  Musical  Note-book. 

"  WHAT  I  want  to  hear  from  you,"  said  Yon  Bulow  to  a 
young  lady  who  applied  to  him  for  instruction,  "  is  a  scale 
and  an  arpeggio." 

The  young  lady  played  the  scale  of  E  minor,  which  is  the 
one  used,  as  a  rule,  in  foreign  conservatories  as  a  test  for  a 
student's  or  beginner's  capacity.  Next  the  chord  of  A  flat 
in  arpeggio.  Again  and  again  she  had  to  repeat  them,  each 
time  following  some  especial  instruction  from  the  master, 
and  at  the  end  of  half  an  hour  she  found  herself  doing  them 
in  a  manner  altogether  new  to  herself,  and  certainly  very 
much  better  than  she  had  ever  done  them  before.  That 
half-hour's  experience,  it  seems  to  me,  was  invaluable,  for  it 
taught  her  that  even  when  a  thing  seems  to  be  well  done 
it  can  always  be  improved  upon,  and  that  a  scale  which  had 
seemed  to  her  so  simple  a  performance  really  meant  far 
more  than  she  or  most  young  students  appreciate. 


Musical  Standards  Yesterday  and  To-day.          31 

I  have  heard  elderly  ladies  say  that  when  they  were  tauglit 
music  in  the  first  decades  of  this  century,  the  principal 
thing  was  the  amount  of  time  they  spent  practising  and  the 
number  of  pieces  which  they  learned.  To  perform  "The 
Battle  of  Prague"  or  "  The  Dewdrop"  waltz  was  all  that  could 
be  expected  from  amateurs ;  but  in  those  days  only  profes- 
sional musicians  really  studied.  I  do  not  want  to  say  any- 
thing against  our  grandmothers'  sincerity,  but  girls  at  school 
or  under  a  governess  in  those  days  "  took  "  music  as  they  all 
took  drawing-lessons.  Is  there  any  household,  I  wonder, 
where  souvenirs  of  the  past  are  cherished,  in  which  there 
are  to  be  found  no  pictures  of  large,  flat-looking  flowers  on 
pasteboard,  or  music-books  full  of  painfully  unclassical  mu- 
sic ?  Unfortunately,  young  people  to-day  "  take  "  music  very 
often  with  the  same  inartistic  spirit,  but  happily  such  rare- 
ly perform  except  for  their  own  families  after  they  leave 
school.  The  student  whose  music  nowadays  is  considered 
worth  anything  is  the  student  who  thinks  and  feels  and  is 
patient. 

Of  course  every  school  or  conservatory  has  its  own  ideas, 
and  I  am  sure  my  young  readers  can  tell  me  of  fifty  differ- 
ent and  perhaps  equally  excellent  methods  of  teaching  used 
by  their  different  teachers ;  but  the  main  points,  if  success- 
ful, must  be  the  same,  and  in  this  little  work  my  object  is 
not  so  directly  to  teach,  rather  is  it  to  help  the  student  and 


32  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

the  teacher  by  a  little  outside  impetus — something  to  make 
study  seem  more  entertaining  and  worth  while. 

Directly  we  begin  to  think  of  study  as  a  science  and  a 
system  the  impression  is  apt  to  be  gained  that  of  necessity 
the  work  must  be  dull  and  uninteresting;  but  in  point  of 
fact,  as  I  hope  to  show  you,  the  very  science  and  system  of 
music  constitutes  its  first  charm ;  we  will  find  the  history 
of  the  science  little  by  little  unfolds  what  makes  it  most  ro- 
mantic and  picturesque,  and  at  last  the  dullest  of  five-finger 
exercises  and  most  tiresome  of  scales  will  become  invested 
with  a  sort  of  glamour  or  poetry  which  will  be  welcomed 
by  the  student  who  is  really  zealous  as  part  of  what  one  day 
will  be  the  real  glory  of  a  great  achievement. 

Now  there  is  nothing  gained  by  going  too  rapidly  in  any 
study.  Harmony,  thorough-bass,  counter-point,  all  of  which 
mean  about  the  same  thing,  and  which  constitute  the  sci- 
ence of  music,  are  studies  which  the  greatest  masters  have 
considered  work  for  a  lifetime;  but  instead  of  discouraging 
the  young  student,  this  should  rather  make  him  see  how 
necessary  it  is  to  begin  from  the  very  beginning,  to  under- 
stand each  day's  work  at  the  piano  with  some  of  its  scien- 
tific meaning.  All  that  I  hope  to  do  in  these  pages  is  to 
tell  you  the  story  of  music,  as  it  were,  to  offer  some  simple 
suggestions  for  piano  practice  and  study,  to  give  the  mere 
rudiments  of  what  is  called  theory,  and  to  tell  you  some- 


Conscientious  Study.  33 

thing  of  the  lives  of  the  great  composers,  the  musical  influ- 
ences of  their  times,  and  to  introduce  you  to  certain  of  their 
works. 

The  world  to-day  is  full  of  melody ;  of  music  such  as  one 
hundred  years  ago  could  not  have  been  produced.  At  con- 
certs all  over  this  country,  as  well  as  in  Europe,  the  very 
best  music  is  to  be  heard ;  therefore  even  young  people  in 
the  audience  should  bring  with  them  a  certain  amount  of 
technical  knowledge.  They  should  learn  enough  of  theory 
to  understand  what  is  being  produced  by  the  great  artists 
of  the  day.  It  is  all  very  well  to  enjoy  a  fine  orchestra,  an 
opera,  or  an  oratorio  without  troubling  one's  self  about 
anything  scientific  connected  with  it,  but  really  the  history 
of  all  three  is  as  charming  as  any  fairy  tale,  and  the  very 
science  in  it,  as  I  hope  to  show  you,  has  its  picturesque  side; 
so  that  you  need  never  feel  it  dull  work,  this  following  the 
study  of  music  with  a  conscientious  regard  for  its  higher 
meanings  and  its  original  starting  points. 

Although  study  with  a  view  to  making  music  a  "career" 
is  different  in  one  sense  from  study  simply  for  love  of  it  as 
an  art  and  a  personal  resource,  yet  the  guiding  rules  must 
be  the  same ;  and  the  young  student  who  says  to  herself, 
"  Oh,  but  I  never  should  want  to  play  in  public!"  ought  to 
work  with  the  same  spirit  as  the  one  who  looks  forward  to 
a  public  life,  the  only  difference  being  in  the  time  bestowed 


34  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

on  it.  For  a  professional  future  six  and  eight  hours  a 
day  are  required,  besides  a  complete  musical  life ;  but  two 
hours  a  day  well  employed  can  work  wonders  with  the  am- 
ateur student,  and  with  what  a  feeling  of  joyful  possession 
does  not  such  a  one  reach  a  day  when  she  can  really  in- 
terpret the  master's  meaning !  It  ought  never  to  be  consid- 
ered in  the  light  of  an  accomplishment,  only  as  an  art  to  be 
acquired  for  itself,  and  for  the  joy  there  is  in  acquiring  and 
possessing  it.  If  you  do  not  feel  that  your  music  will  make 
you  yourself  happy,  even  though  you  were  alone  and  never 
to  be  heard,  then  do  not  try  to  pursue  it.  Be  very  certain 
that  no  one  will  care  for  what  you  can  do  in  it. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  are  many  people  who  for  some 
reason — usually  a  defective  touch  or  lack  of  proper  feeling 
for  music — can  never  become  executants;  yet  such  a  one 
can  nearly  always  derive  the  greatest  profit  and  enjoyment 
from  the  theoretical  study  of  music.  I  often  wonder  why 
this  is  not  considered  a  necessary  study,  independent  of  mu- 
sical performance,  just  as  other  sciences  are  taught,  for  by 
this  means  you  can  open  up  a  whole  field  of  thought  and 
enjoyment. 

Listening  to  music  becomes  another  and  newer  delight, 
and  besides  you  can  be  in  possession  at  least  of  the  science 
of  one  of  the  noblest  arts.  The  best  composers  have  by  no 
means  been  the  best  performers — indeed,  the  very  reverse 


A  Harmony  Class.  35 

has  often  been  the  case,  and  some  of  the  very  best  teachers 
abroad  play  but  indifferently  well;  that  is,  the  best  teachers 
of  technique;  for  when  people  speak  of  taking  lessons  from 
Liszt,  or  liubenstein,  or  Bulow,  etc.,  it  usually  means  only 
playing  pieces  the  notes  of  which  they  have  learned  for 
these  great  masters,  who  correct  their  style  and  offer  sug- 
gestions. 

Music  as  a  theory  no  doubt  entails  years  of  study  before 
the  whole,  or  even  the  suggestion  of  the  whole,  is  attained, 
but  a  great  deal  that  is  very  satisfactory  may  be  learned  in 
a  much  shorter  time ;  and  to  the  young  student  who  feels 
no  "instinct"  for  performance  let  me  suggest  fifteen  or 
twenty  minutes  a  day  of  "theory;"  perhaps  it  may  develop 
the  lacking  instinct;  at  all  events,  if  persevered  in,  it  must 
lead  to  much  satisfaction  in  hearing  and  understanding  the 
music  on  all  sides  of  us  to-day. 

I  well  remember  the  first  morning  I  ever  spent  in  a  for- 
eign conservatory  of  music.  I  arrived  just  as  the  harmony 
class  had  assembled.  Beside  me  sat  a  slim  little  girl  with 
a  very  pretty,  pale  face,  and  a  tired,  anxious  look.  When 
we  had  all  opened  our  books,  she  whispered  to  me,  "  May  I 
look  over  you?" 

The  expression  in  her  eyes  was  so  piteous  that  it  went  to 
my  heart  to  answer,  "You  may  if  you  like,  dear;  only  it 
won't  help  you.  I  don't  know  much  of  anything  myself." 

3 


36  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

I  never  shall  forget  her  look  as  she  burst  into  a  silent  fit 
of  crying,  which  for  ten  minutes  stopped  the  lesson. 

Often  since  I  have  thought  of  my  little  worried  compan- 
ion, who  struggled  on  through  the  winter,  always  declaring 
she  could  not  learn  because  she  could  not  like  it,  and  I  have 
wondered  if  there  were  not  a  great  many  young  students 
who  feel  in  the  same  way. 

It  is  so  stupid  to  hear  of  semibreves  and  crotchets  and 
quavers  and  minims  and  scales  and  clefs  and  scores,  and  all 
sorts  of  terms  like  "allegro"  and  "andante"  and  "con 
moto"  and  "adagio,"  and  indeed  whole  Italian  sentences, 
that  used  to  look  to  me,  when  I  was  a  child,  like  imperti- 
nent intrusions  into  English  music. 

But  have  you  ever  thought  whether  this  system  of  music 
which  we  have  to-day  may  not  have  had  a  story — a  far-off 
story  almost  as  entrancing  as  a  fairy  tale  ?  I  think,  had  some 
one  told  my  little  friend  the  story  of  the  system  she  was 
toiling  to  understand,  it  would  all  have  looked  very  differ- 
ent, and  the  study  would  have  been  tinged  with  a  real  delight. 

Now,  what  I  propose  to  tell  you  is  the  history  of  the  notes 
we  use.  This  is  really  an  introduction  to  the  study  of 
thorough-bass.,  or  harmony ;  and  if  you  make  yourself  com- 
plete master  of  the  first  simple  rules  or  ideas,  you  will  find 
later  that  many  seemingly  difficult  things  come  almost  in- 
stinctively. 


The  First  Ideas  of  Harmony.  37 

You  know  that  music  to-day  is  written  according  to  a 
system,  but,  as  you  can  readily  understand,  it  was  not  per- 
fected without  a  long  test  of  various  methods  and  centuries 
in  which  no  ideas  were  sufficiently  systematized  to  create  a 
standard — centuries  of  crude  music  and  mere  experiment, 
from  the  days  of  Saint  Gregory,  in  590,  to  the  time  of 
John  Sebastian  Bach,  in  the  middle  of  the  18th  century, 
when  at  last  even  the  question  of  time  was  perfected.  In 
our  own  day,  however,  the  study  of  harmony  has  become 
generally  appreciated,  and  masters  in  the  science  have  quite 
lately  decided  upon  the  best  terms  to  use  in  expressing  cer- 
tain points  which  must  be  impressed  upon  every  student's 
mind,  in  such  manner  as  shall  make  their  study  not  only 
simpler,  but,  at  the  same  time,  what  is  called  more  technical 
in  character.  So,  for  instance,  the  old-fashioned  use  of  the 
terras  crotchets  and  quavers  is  entirely  abandoned ;  whole 
notes,  half  notes,  quarter  notes,  etc.,  take  their  place,  and 
instead  of  tones  we  have  steps  and  half  steps,  which,  as  you 
will  see  in  a  later  chapter,  express  better  the  actual  sound 
of  each  note  in  the  scale. 

The  very  first  ideas  of  harmony  came  from  the  Greeks. 
In  Oriental  times  there  was  music  at  every  season  of  festivi- 
ty, triumph,  mourning,  or  family  rejoicing ;  but  there  was 
no  special  system  for  its  government,  and  we  suppose  that 
the  music  of  those  early  days  was  of  a  rude  character,  ren- 


38  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

dered  impressive  and  effective,  however,  by  the  martial 
spirit  or  the  bravely  swelling  chorus  which  inspired  and 
performed  it.  With  the  early  days  of  Christianity  came  a 
desire  for  music  of  a  more  delicate,  although  solemn,  kind. 
To  express  the  tenderness  of  the  new  law — the  law  of  Christ 
and  his  wonderful  messages  of  love — music  of  a  different  or- 
der seemed  needful,  and  the  hearts  of  men,  especially  among 
those  early  saints,  longed  for  some  expression  which  was 
poetic  and  demonstrative  of  the  joyous  faith  that  was  within 
them.  Of  course  their  resources  were  still  of  the  very  scan- 
tiest. No  system  of  notation  had  been  established,  although 
the  letters  of  the  alphabet  were  used  to  suggest  certain 
notes;  but  in  the  days  of  St.  Gregory  we  read  that  mu- 
sical schools  were  established  in  Rome,  and  we  know  that 
he  gave  his  name  to  a  special  kind  of  chant.  Church  musio 
reached  a  point  in  his  day  whence  it  could  be  carried  on. 

Now  we  have  in  old  manuscripts  some  illustrations  which 
show  how  music  was  written.  The  system  of  using  letters 
of  the  alphabet,  however,  came  to  an  end,  and  was  replaced 
by  the  use  of  a  series  of  characters.  These  are  called  new- 
mce,  and  each  character  had  a  different  name.  The  first 
was  known  as  the  virga,  and  it  was  a  long  single  note;  the 
bivirga  represented  two  notes,  and  the  trivirga  three ;  the 
punctus  was  a  short  note,  etc. 

In  old  volumes  are  various  illustrations  which  show 


The  Beginning  of  Written  Music. 


39 


;  v  ») 

z  • 

•    ••.*•. 

.4 
*S  \JT* 

0/7/3 

*•       e 

y 

f 
Is 

9 

10 

music  was  written  in  that  day,  and  the  study  of  them  is  cu- 
rious, since  they  represent  the  method  which  originally  pre- 
ceded the  very  beginning  of 
our  present  and  perfect  sys- 
tem. 

Fig.  1  shows  the  neumse. 
Tli ere  are  ten  here,  but  au- 
thorities differ  as  to  the  num- 
ber that  were  really  in  use.  Fig  1  _THE 
These  neumse  were  placed  over 
the  words,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2.  We  are  not  quite  certain  what 

melody  they  here  represent,  but 

, 
the  solution  given  underneath  is 

Fig.  2.  the  probable  one. 

The  first  idea  of  making  lines 

occurred  in  the  year  900.     But  for  a  long  time  only  one 
red  line  was  used,  and  on  this  the  F  note  was  written;  the 

PROBABLE  SOLUTION  OP  FIG.  2. 


Coe  -  li     coe  -  lo  -  rum,     lau  -  da  -  te. . .     De  -  um. 

grave  sounds  were  placed  below  this  line,  the  acute  ones 
above  it.  How  this  music  looked  when  written  you  will 
see  in  Fig.  3  on  the  following  page. 


4O  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

Early  in  the  tenth  century  a  monk  in  Flanders,  named 
Hucbaldus,  introduced  a  stave,  as  we  call  it,  consisting  of 
a  great  number  of  lines.     At  first  these  lines  were  not  oc- 
cupied by  notes,  but  by  the 
syllables  to  be  sung,  as  shown 
_       in  Fig.  4  on  page  41.     In 
order  to  show  whether  the 

'  I      '  .  voice  was  to  proceed  by  a 

*  p.    3  tone  or  a  semitone  the  let- 

ters T  and  S  were  intro- 
duced. One  advantage  attending  this  system  was  that  it 
could  be  applied  to  a  scale  of  any  extent,  and  even  used  for 
a  number  of  voices  singing  at  the  same  time. 

PROBABLE  SOLUTION  OF  Fio.  3. 

S  j-;  J^  g?  ,»_J  g?      £?  ^  . 

rj    rj^^JL^  ^^  — - 

Po  -  pu    -      -      -     le     me us.. 

In  the  Bodleian  library  at  Oxford,  England,  is  a  very 
precious  book  once  used  in  the  Cathedral  at  Winchester.  It 
is  MS.,  of  course,  and  is  believed  to  have  been  written  dur- 
ing the  reign  of  King  Ethelred  II.,  who  died  in  1016.  In 
it  we  find  music  written  in  two  different  fashions,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  5  on  page  42. 

This,  then,  was  the  period  of  change.     We  have  the  sim- 


The  Score. 


pie  neumse  above  the  words,  and  we  have  actually  a  four- 
line  stave  with  notes  instead  of  words. 

But  up  to  this  time  all  the  notes  were  the  same;  no  dif- 
ference in  length 
was  indicated,  and 
no  one  who  had  not 
heard  the  melody 
could  sing  it  from 
them.  Presently  the 
breve,  semibreve, 
and  dot,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  6  on  page  42, 

began  to  appear,  and  F*    4 

thus,  little  by  little, 

our  own  system  of  notation  was  approached.     In  1600,  an 
Italian  named  Franco  de  Colonia  established  a  system  of 

SOLUTION  OP  PIG.  4. 


T 

Do  \ 

T 

/        mini  \ 

T 

Sit\ 

ria/ 

in  \ 

cida 

S 

glo/ 

Do  \             sae  / 

T 

/      mini  \ 

T 

Sit\ 

ria/ 

in  \ 

cula 

S 

glo/ 

sae/ 

T 

Do\ 

T 

/        mini  \ 

T 

8lt\ 

rial 

in\ 

cula 

S 

glo/ 

Do\             sae/ 

T 

/        mini  \ 

T 

Sit  \ 

ria/ 

in\ 

cula 

S 

glo/ 

sae  / 

time,  and  in  or  about  1600  the  first  idea  of  a  score  origi- 
nated. 


42  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

Do  you  know  what  a  score  is  ?    I  was  at  a  concert  re- 
hearsal in  Paris  one  day,  when   a  very  knowing  -looking 


'       '       /    J  +  (     J  «     '    ' 

w»  mndecnofcnmme  &4 


«*' 


Fig.  5. 


young  person  of  about  fourteen,  with  a  great  deal  of  fur 
and  velvet  on,  and  a  large  roll  of  music,  came  in  with  her 
governess  and  sat  down  near  me.  The  orchestra  were  going 


l,\    *   A      1 

«j  ^"^     -*-j 

1 

l»l         o      &    A 

*»           ' 

Q             -T 

Fig.  6. 

to  give  part  of  "  Faust "  with  some  singing,  and  this  pert 
young  lady  turned  to  her  governess,  saying, 

"Don't  you  want  the  score,  Miss  -    —  ?"  and  forthwith 
she  handed  her  the  programme. 


Time.  43 

Now  I  think  it  would  have  been  much  wiser  for  this 
small  person  to  have  first  been  sure  what  a  score  was  be- 
fore she  talked  of  it.  The  origin  of  the  score  was  in  1600. 
A  composer  named  Peri  published  his  "Eurydice,"  and  he 
put  the  instrumental  accompaniment  below  the  vocal  part. 
Then  he  scored  the  bars  through  the  stave,  connecting  the 
words  and  music.  Hence  we  call  the  music  and  words 
together  the  score  of  the  work. 

As  music  began  to  progress  —  as  oratorios,  masses,  and 
operas  were  written — it  became  necessary  to  establish  a  defi- 
nite system  of  time.  It  was  done  gradually;  but  at  last, 
in  Bach's  day,  it  was  a  carefully  arranged  science — so  many 
beats  to  the  bar,  so  much  value  to  each  note. 

A  grand  science  has  come  from  those  first  queer  httle 
attempts  at  written  music  which  we  find  it  so  hard  to  un- 
derstand to-day,  and  yet  how  grateful  we  ought  to  be  to 
the  patient  people  of  the  seventh  and  tenth  centuries  who 
tried  to  record  some  of  their  musical  feelings ! 

When  you  sit  down  to  your  first  harmony  lesson,  try  to 
remember  what  a  wonderful  story  those  little  black  notes 
could  tell.  It  is  not  dull  or  colorless  work ;  indeed,  if  you 
consider  it  in  the  right  way,  it  is  like  a  charming  tale  in 
which  many  characters  which  make  the  pages  of  history 
vivid  and  fascinating  appear,  giving  to  our  work  that  sense 
of  personality  and  of  tradition — the  peculiar  interest  which 


44  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

comes  of  any  study  handed  down  from  one  generation  to 
another.  All  the  gradual  progression,  the  slow  steps  up- 
ward, are  marked  by  melody,  harmony,  chant,  or  song,  so 
that  music  as  we  possess  it  now  may  be  reckoned  as  the 
result  of  a  beautiful  and  suggestive  past.  Not  a  note  that 
you  play,  not  a  phrase  uttered  in  your  music,  not  a  period 
rounded  and  completed  but  may  be  made  suggestive  if  you 
only  learn  to  think  of  it  in  this  inspiring  way. 

In  this  first  chapter  I  want  to  suggest  to  you  a  musical 
note -book  which  from  day  to  day  may  be  kept  up  with 
profit  and  much  pleasurable  interest.  Do  not  attempt  to 
make  it  too  elaborate.  From  simple  beginnings  corne  the 
best  results,  and  in  the  study  of  music,  more  perhaps  than 
in  any  other  science,  everything  should  be  taken  slowly  and 
deliberately.  No  matter  how  often  you  go  over  and  over 
the  same  things,  keep  to  them  until  their  meanings  are 
fully  mastered.  Then  there  will  be  no  confusion  in  your 
progress,  no  necessity  for  going  back. 

Begin  your  note-book  with  a  summary  of  what  you  have 
gathered  from  this  chapter.  Put  down  a  list  of  the  early 
musical  terms ;  add  to  it  such  dates  as  create  landmarks 
in  the  history  of  notation.  For  example,  that  of  St.  Greg- 
ory, of  Hucbaldus,  and  John  Sebastian  Bach.  Any  com- 
ments which  occur  to  your  own  mind  it  is  well  to  insert ; 
and  if  you  make  your  book  with  each  alternate  leaf  of 


A  Musical  Note-book.  45 

music-lined  paper  you  can  gradually  add  certain  fragments 
of  music,  so  that  at  the  end  of  a  year  quite  a  valuable  little 
book  will  be  in  your  own  possession,  and  will  be  an  admi- 
rable companion  to  the  musical  diary  of  which  I  will  speak 
later. 


46  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 


CHAPTER  IK. 

How  to  Feel  about  Study.— First  Steps. — The  Key -board. — The  Family 
of  Notes. — Staff. — Degrees. — Intervals. — How  to  Understand  the  First 
Rules  of  Harmony.— Suggestions  for  Note-book. 

WHEN  you  seat  yourself  before  your  piano  with  a  simple 
piece  of  music  on  the  stand  in  front  of  you,  look  at  the 
notes  on  the  key -board  and  those  written  above  on  the 
music,  and  try  to  think  of  them  as  so  many  characters,  each 
one  with  a  part  of  its  own  to  be  performed,  demonstrating 
its  own  individuality  by  means  of  your  interpretation  of  it ; 
not  to  be  badly  treated  or  misunderstood  by  those  ten  fin- 
gers of  yours,  which  with  the  help  of  the  heart  and  mind, 
and,  let  us  hope,  some  soul  too,  are  to  produce  all  the  har- 
monies of  which  they  are  capable. 

It  is  not  enough  for  you  to  know  that  the  key-board  of 
the  piano  before  you  represents  merely  so  many  notes 
whose  names,  alphabetically  arranged,  seem  so  easy  to  re- 
member. Much  more  than  this  must  you  think  of  from 
the  very  beginning.  A  grand  science  belongs  to  them,  and 
although  the  study  of  harmony  or  thorough-bass  cannot  be 


The  Importance  of  Careful  Study,  47 

accomplished  in  all  its  details  without  years  of  study,  you 
can  make  a  point  of  applying  to  every  musical  practice,  to 
every  lesson,  to  every  line  of  music  you  read  and  play,  a 
certain  amount  of  technical  knowledge  which  you  will  find 
of  the  utmost  assistance  when  you  come  to  the  deeper  and 
closer  study  of  the  science  itself.  Moreover,  you  will  ac- 
quire a  new  sort  of  interest  in  your  work,  by  feeling  that 
you  bring  to  each  day's  progress  something  which  unfolds 
to  you  the  higher  meanings  in  the  art ;  and  it  is  well  in  the 
very  outset  to  impress  upon  yourself  the  fact  that  the  first 
and  simplest  rules  of  music  are  those  which  must  be  fixed 
permanently  upon  the  mind.  Try  so  completely  to  under- 
stand what  you  are  learning  that  there  need  be  no  going 
back  over  the  same  ground  except  by  way  of  refreshing 
the  memory,  or  making  more  complete  the  harmony  of 
your  work.  Just  as  in  the  study  of  a  language  it  is  neces- 
sary to  learn  the  alphabet  thoroughly,  the  meaning  of  each 
word  in  a  sentence  before  that  sentence  can  be  spoken 
intelligently,  or  satisfactorily  understood,  so  in  rnnsic  the 
very  first  principles  must  be  mastered  before  you  can  hope 
for  any  elaborations;  and  indeed  to  read  and  play  a  simple 
scale  in  the  best  way  is  to  thoroughly  understand  not  only 
the  names  of  its  notes  but  the  reasons  for  their  arrange- 
ment and  their  relationship  to  each  other. 

What  I  wish  to  tell  you  about  in  this  chapter  is  how  we 


48  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

calculate  and  name  that  family  of  black  and  white  notes 
before  you,  according  to  the  system  of  notation  used  to-day. 

To  begin  with,  you  know  that  music  is  written  on  five 
parallel  lines.  This  is  called  the  staff ;  and  on  that  and  on 
what  are  called  repeated,  added,  or  leger  lines  are  placed 
the  notes  which  you  strike  with  your  fingers.  Now,  then, 
the  lines  and  spaces  which  you  see  on  the  staff  are  called 
degrees,  which,  as  you  can  see,  signifies  that  from  one  to  an- 
other you  progress  a,  degree  each  time,  for  which  reason  the 
rule  in  harmony  is  that  you  must  count  your  degrees  up- 
ward from  the  very  lowest  line. 

Parker  tells  us  that  the  distance  between  two  degrees  of 
the  scale  is  called  an  interval,  and  starting  with  the  note 
which  you  know  as  middle  C,  and  calling  that  one,  D  is  its 
second,  E  its  third,  F  its  fourth,  G  it&ffth,  A  its  sixth,  and 
B  its  seventh.  Add  to  this  the  eighth,  and  yon  have  the 
octave,  made  up  of  seven  distinct  sounds,  which,  according 
to  the  latest  and  best  phraseology  in  music,  are  known  as 
seven  steps,  the  whole  forming  a  major  scale.  This  is  only 
the  beginning,  however,  of  what  you  must  learn  about  in- 
tervals. There  are  six  kinds  of  intervals — the  perfect,  the 
imperfect,  the  major  and  the  minor,  the  augmented  and 
the  diminished.  These  terms  have  been  given  after  much 
thought  and  deliberation,  and  have  each  a  distinct  mean- 
ing, which  it  is  well  for  you  to  understand  and  remember 


Perfect  and  Imperfect  Intervals.  49 

from  the  very  beginning  of  your  musical  practice.  For 
example,  let  us  see  what  does  perfect  signify? 

Every  note  when  struck  produces  a  certain  number  of 
vibrations.  Now,  then,  every  note  has  its  octave ;  for  in- 
stance, middle  C  has  its  octave  C  in  the  third  space.  Strike 
the  first  C,  and  the  number  of  vibrations  produced  are  reck- 
oned as  one  ;  strike  the  octave,  and  the  number  is  doubled  ; 
therefore,  in  reckoning  the  ratio  of  sound,  the  octave  is 
known  as  number  two.  This  interval  is  called  perfect,  as 
the  vibrations  are  coincident.  There  are  three  other  perfect 
intervals,  so  called  because  the  vibrations  produced  are  so 
nearly  the  same  that  it  would  be  unwise  to  confuse  things 
by  giving  them  any  other  name.  These  are  the  fourth,  the 
fifth,  and  the  octave,  making  in  our  scale  four  perfect  in- 
tervals. Now,  then,  go  over  this,  and  striking  your  first 
note  in  any  scale,  and  which  is  always  called  the  prime,  or 
unison,  add  to  it  the  fourth  or  the  fifth  and  the  octave,  and 
you  have  at  once  your  perfect  intervals. 

To  make  an  imperfect  interval,  lower  the  upper  note  of 
the  perfect  interval  one  half  a  step.  For  example,  a  per- 
fect fifth  consists  of  seven  half  steps;  an  imperfect  fifth 
consists  of  six  half  steps. 

In  the  same  scale  the  second,  the  third,  the  sixth,  and  the 
seventh  from  C,  otherwise  D,  E,  A,  and  B,  are  known  as 
major  intervals.  Major  signifies  greater ;  therefore,  when 


50  T/if  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

applied  in  this  way,  it  is  understood  to  mean  a  greater  in« 
terval.  For  example,  the  interval  from  C  to  D  is  called  a 
major  or  greater  second.  It  consists  of  two  half  steps,  which 
constitute  a  whole  step  in  sound,  or,  as  we  have  said,  a  major 
second.  The  interval  from  C  to  E  is  a  major  third,  from 
C  to  A  a  major  sixth,  and  from  C  to  B  a  major  seventh. 

Minor  signifies  lesser,  and  the  minor  intervals  consist  of 
half  steps.  For  example,  from  C  to  D  flat  io  a  minor  or 
lesser  second  or  interval — it  has  one  half  step  of  sound  in 
it ;  from  C  to  E  flat  is  a  minor  or  lesser  third  of  three  half 
steps ;  from  C  to  A  flat  a  minor  sixth ;  from  C  to  B  flat  a 
minor  seventh.  Now,  then,  you  have  the  major  and  minor 
intervals ;  but  in  your  scale  you  will  remember  that  the 
fourth  and  fifth,  and  octave,  or  eighth,  are  the  perfect  inter, 
vals ;  that  is,  they  can  never  be  called  major  or  minor. 

To  thoroughly  understand  this  let  me  suggest  your  test- 
ing it  on  the  piano.  Strike  middle  C;  then  strike  its  sec- 
ond, which  is  D.  Say  aloud,  "  C  to  D  is  a  major  second." 
Then  inquire  of  yourself  what  is  a  major  second,  ho\v  many 
steps  in  it,  and  with  the  notes  before  your  eyes  count  them 
up.  You  will  find  that  they  contain  two  half  steps,  each 
with  a  sound  of  its  own,  and  which  make  a  whole  step,  or 
major  second.  What  sound  lies  between  C  and  D  nat- 
ural? The  minor  second.  Strike  C  again;  next  to  it  is  D 
flat,  the  minor  or  lesser  second.  Say  to  yourself, "How 


Major  and  Minor  Seconds.  51 

many  half  steps  in  that  ?"  Only  one.  So  on  through  the 
intervals  of  which  we  have  been  speaking.  Then  take  up 
the  scale  as  in  the  illustration  below;  there  you  will  see 
written  in  the  musical  notation  the  notes  which  form  the 
examples  which  I  have  given  you.  Now,  then,  what  is  the 
fixed  musical  rule  for  forming  a  minor  interval?  It  can 
only  be  formed  from  a  major  interval ;  that  is,  the  upper 
note  belonging  to  the  major  second.  Let  us  say  D  is  low- 
ered half  a  step,  which  makes  it  D  flat ;  take  your  major 
third,  and  in  the  same  way,  to  make  a  minor  third  of  it, 
lower  to  E  flat,  and  so  on. 

But,  you  will  ask,  are  these  all  the  intervals  which  we 
have  to  consider?  They  are  the  first  and  most  important 
ones  in  beginning  musical  study,  and  a  very  clear  knowl- 
edge of  them  is  necessary — indeed  you  cannot  too  strongly 
Rx  them  upon  your  mind ;  but  there  are  other  intervals 
made  from  these,  and  which  are  known  by  two  names — the 
augmented  and  the  diminished  intervals. 

Augmented  means  increased  ;  therefore,  when  applied  to 
music,  it  must  mean  that  the  interval  is  increased.  Take 
your  middle  C.  What  is  its  major  second  ?  D.  Now,  then, 
how  would  you  make  an  augmented  second  of  this?  All 
changes  of  this  kind  are  made  out  of  half  steps,  a  point  worth 
remembering  at  the  start.  To  augment  this  major  second, 
then,  raise  the  upper  note  half  a  step  to  D  sharp.  There- 

4 


52  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

fore  an  augmented  second  consists  of  three  half  steps  of 
sound — a  full  step  with  half  a  step  added.  The  diminished 
interval  is  formed  from  the  minor  interval.  The  lower  note 
instead  of  the  upper  is  raised  half  a  step.  Thus,  from  C  to 
B  flat  is,  as  you  know,  a  minor  seventh.  Therefore,  from  C 
sharp  (which  is  the  lower  note  of  th'is  raised  half  a  step)  to 
B  flat  would  be  a  diminished  seventh,  the  interval  being 
diminished  thus  by  half  a  step.  If  you  try  this  on  your 
piano  in  the  same  way  as  suggested  for  the  major  and  minor 
and  perfect  intervals  you  will  readily  see  precisely  what  is 
meant. 

I  would  advise  any  young  student  interested  in  these  sug- 
gestions to  write  out  his  or  her  own  ideas  on  the  subject, 
and  then  to  carefully  examine  with  the  aid  of  the  piano  the 
illustrations  given,  and  perhaps  make  out  a  little  table,  as  it 
were,  of  the  perfect  interval,  the  major,  the  minor,  the  aug- 
mented or  diminished.  In  the  chapter  on  notation  you  had 
an  idea  given  for  a  manuscript  musical  note-book.  Sup- 
posing you  fill  one  page  of  this  with  careful  examples  of 
the  intervals  as  you  understand  them ;  and  in  your  mar- 
ginal space  it  would  be  well  to  say  that  the  terms  half  steps 
and  steps  are  now  used  in  place  of  tones,  the  best  judges 
having  decided  that  they  signify  the  sounds  produced  more 
clearly. 


John  Sebastian  Bach.  53 


CHAPTER  IV. 

John  Sebastian  Bach. — His  Early  Childhood. — The  Gavotte.—  Its  Origin. 
— A  Court  Dance. — The  Fugue. — Explanation  of  this  Form  of  Com- 
position.— Passion  Music. — Anecdote  of  the  Basques. — How  Mendels- 
sohn revived  Bach's  Passion  Music. 

ON  the  21st  of  March,  1685,  was  born  to  Ambrosius 
Bach  a  son,  whom  he  christened  John  Sebastian,  and  who, 
coming  of  a  family  famous  for  their  musical  ability,  was 
destined  to  become  known  throughout  the  civilized  world, 
not  only  as  a  great  composer  and  musician,  but  as  a  reform- 
er and  developer  of  the  study  of  technique.  His  father 
lived  in  the  quaint  town  of  Eisenach ;  but  before  the  child 
had  done  more  than  master  the  rudiments  of  music  and 
learn  to  play  a  little  on  the  violin,  his  parents  died,  and  his 
elder  brother,  Johann  Christoph,  who  was  the  organist  at 
Ohrdruff,  adopted  the  little  boy.  He  began  to  study  at  the 
Ohrdruff  Lyceum,  and  went  ahead  in  his  music  with  such 
steadiness  that  the  elder  brother,  who  seems  to  have  been  a 
stern  and  morose  man,  forbade  the  child  to  do  more  than 
his  allotted  tasks,  or  to  purchase  any  music  for  himself,  or 
indeed  to  indulge  any  of  his  impulses  in  composition. 


54  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

In  the  old  house  at  Ohrdruff  there  was  a  cupboard  which 
John  Sebastian  passed  many  times  a  day  with  longing  in 
his  heart.  Well  he  knew  that  on  an  upper  shelf  was  a  rare 
old  book  of  manuscript  music,  and  it  used  to  seem  to  him 
that  if  he  could  possess  himself  of  it  long  enough  to  copy 
even  a  part  of  its  treasures  he  would  feel  himself  happy  as 
a  king.  He  dared  not  ask  permission  lest  it  be  refused,  but 
finally  it  occurred  to  him  that  through  the  latticed- work 
panel  in  the  upper  part  of  the  door  he  might  squeeze  one 
of  his  little  hands,  and  pull  the  book,  which  was  bound  in 
soft  parchment,  safely  through.  German  children  at  that 
time  as  now  were  kept  so  strictly  that  little  John  Sebastian 
rarely  escaped  some  one's  watchful  eye,  but  his  heart  was 
so  strongly  filled  with  this  desire  that  he  found  an  oppor- 
tunity at  last,  and  climbing  up  to  the  latticed  part  of  the 
panel,  contrived  to  squeeze  the  precious  book  through, 
greatly  to  his  delight.  But  even  then  it  was  hard  to  know 
how  to  copy  the  music,  since  candles  or  light  were  refused 
him.  So  he  waited  for  moonlight  nights,  and  on  every  one 
worked  hard  in  his  window,  finally  succeeding  in  copying 
the  entire  book. 

I  have  often  thought  of  the  picture  of  the  dear  little 
German  boy  working  away  in  his  old-fashioned  room,  the 
moonlight  tenderly  bathing  his  head  and  eager  fingers,  and 
illuminating  the  manuscript  page  on  which  he  worked. 


YOUXG  BACH  COPYING  MUSIC   BY   MOONLIGHT. 


Back's  Perseverance.  55 

How  little  he  knew,  or  indeed  cared,  that  nearly  two  hun- 
dred years  later  all  music-loving  nations  would  reverence 
his  name.  The  work  finished,  little  Bach  proceeded  to 
make  practical  use  of  it ;  but  judge  of  his  disappointment 
when  his  brother,  scolding  him  violently  for  what  he  had 
done,  took  away  the  copy  he  so  patiently  and  lovingly 
made,  and,  it  is  said,  burned  it  before  the  lad's  eyes. 

Genius,  however,  is  not  daunted  by  disappointment  or 
even  failure.  Bach  struggled  on,  learning  all  that  he  was 
taught  and  much  more — in  fact  drinking  in  on  all  gides  such 
music  and  information  as  that  day  afforded  J  and  at  the  age 
of  fifteen,  in  the  first  year  of  the  eighteenth  century,  we 
hear  of  him  surprising  all  the  townspeople  of  Luneburg 
by  his  enchanting  voice  in  church. 

In  return  for  his  leading  the  boy  choir  he  had  his  school- 
ing given  him,  and  when  holidays  came  he  would  walk  to 
Hamburg,  a  distance  of  many  miles,  in  order  to  hear  and 
talk  to  the  famous  organist  Reinken.  This  Dutch  com- 
poser and  musician  took  a  great  interest  in  the  boy,  and 
gave  him  freely  all  the  knowledge  that  he  himself  pos- 
sessed, and  which  Bach  absorbed  greedily.  Meanwhile,  in 
the  ducal  chapel  at  Sella,  a  band  of  French  musicians  were 
engaged,  and  from  them  the  young  student  learned  cham- 
ber and  concert  music,  French  in  character  and  perform- 
ance, and  which  no  doubt  strongly  influenced  him  later  in 


56  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

the  composition   of  his   world -renowned  gavottes,  passa- 
cailles,  and  sarabandes. 

Now,  then,  let  us  consider  the  style  of  the  piano-forte 
composition  and  playing  at  that  date.  The  condition  of 
the  instrument  was  such  that  music  had  to  be  written  with 
a  view  to  its  limitations  ;  and  as  the  system  of  harmony  was 
by  no  means  perfected,  the  general  idea  was  of  a  sort  of 
dance  music,  or  the  solemn  performances  of  church  music 
not  requiring  any  great  breadth  of  treatment.  The  organ 
was  the  instrument  most  considered  after  the  violin ;  but 
Scarlatti  had  begun  to  write  music  in  a  newer  or  more  orig- 
inal style,  and  no  doubt  his  work  was  very  suggestive  to 
Bach.  The  actual  piano-forte  was  invented  in  his  day,  but 
Bach  always  clung  to  the  clavichord,  on  which  he  said  he 
could  express  himself  as  he  desired ;  and  his  manner  of 
playing  was  remarkable  for  its  entire  correctness,  and  at  the 
same  time  brilliancy,  so  that  we  may  infer  that  many  per- 
formers of  that  day  drew  their  inspiration  from  him,  since, 
both  in  composition  and  execution,  he  was  undoubtedly 
original.  Determined  to  compose  piano -forte  music  of  a 
higher  order  than  anything  which  had  been  written,  he  set 
himself  to  the  development  of  a  firmer  basis  of  theory,  and 
what  is  known  as  counterpoint,  and  to  him  we  owe  much 
of  our  present  knowledge  of  time  in  music.  He  also  com- 
posed with  direct  reference  to  and  following  of  all  the  rules 


The  Gavotte.  57 

of  harmony  then  known,  and  those  which  he  himself  work- 
ed out  and  developed,  so  that  at  the  present  day  no  studies 
are  better  for  the  beginner,  or  even  advanced  student,  than 
those  of  John  Sebastian  Bach.  With  the  gavotte,  and  other 
pieces  of  similar  character,  Bach's  name  is  indelibly  asso- 
ciated. He  made  them  not  only  fascinating,  but  wrote 
them  in  so  scientific  and  masterly  a  manner  that  they  offer 
endless  instruction  and  suggestion  to  musicians  to-day. 
Some  of  the  gavottes  were  in  single  pieces,  some  in  what 
are  called  suites,  or  sets  of  short  pieces  of  music;  and  the 
other  day  an  old  friend  of  mine  showed  me  a  fragment  of 
a  manuscript  music-book  which  was  part  of  a  gavotte  writ- 
ten for  some  festive  occasion,  I  believe,  in  his  native  town. 
In  a  French  gallery  there  is  a  picture  of  splendidly-dressed 
ladies  and  gentlemen  dancing  the  gavotte.  They  wear  the 
costume  of  the  latter  part  of  the  seventeenth  century  ;  they 
have  smiling  faces  ;  they  flourish  large  fans,  and  wear  high- 
heeled  slippers  which  they  lift  gracefully — for  the  gavotte 
was  a  very  brilliant  dance  in  its  movement. 

The  name  came  from  a  people  in  Dauphine  known  as 
Gavots.  They  danced  it  more  wildly  than  the  stately  peo- 
ple of  Louis's  court,  but  the  music  of  every  gavotte  seems 
to  me  to  be  best  suited  to  them.  One  can  fancy  them  on 
their  village  green  clattering  away  to  the  quaint,  gay  music, 
flinging  their  arms  about,  or  beating  time  with  their  hands. 


58  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

But  when  the  gavotte  was  introduced  into  the  upper  classes, 
a ud  with  it  various  other  dances  of  the  people,  it  became 
more  refined,  dignified,  even  more  serious. 

It  is  always  well,  even  for  beginners,  to  understand  the 
principle  on  which  any  kind  of  music  is  written.  You  will 
find  your  practising  much  more  interesting  if  you  look 
deeper  than  the  mere  sounds.  Suppose  we  take  some  sim- 
ple gavotte  and  examine  into  the  way  it  is  written.  Here, 
for  instance,  is  the  first  strain  in  one  of  Bach's  most  popu- 
lar gavottes : 


THE  GAVOTTE. 


Now  let  us  see  what  the  few  rules  created  for  its  compo- 
sition are.  They  are  these : 

It  must  be  in  common  time,  which  really  means  equal 
time — two  or  four  beats  to  the  bar — although  the  term  is 
generally  applied  to  that  of  four  quarter  notes  to  the  bar, 
marked  by  the  Italian  0. 

The  movement  is  rather  quick,  and  it  is  generally  in  two 
parts.  These  parts  are,  in  accordance  with  a  custom  pe- 
culiar to  old  dances,  repeated. 


The  Passacaille  and  Sarabande.  59 

Originally  the  gavotte  consisted  of  four  bars  in  the  first 
part  and  eight  bars  in  the  second ;  but  if  the  gavotte  is  only 
one  of  various  parts  of  a  suite,  no  fixed  number  of  bars  is 
given.  Now,  as  a  general  rule,  the  gavotte  begins  on  the 
third  beat  of  the  bar,  so  that  you  will  see,  if  you  calculate, 
that  each  part  must  finish  with  a  half -bar  containing  a 
quarter  note. 

I  know  that  to  many  of  my  young  readers  this  may  sound 
very  dull  and  useless,  but  if  you  will  only  give  a  little 
careful  study  to  a  few  rules  which  apply  to  your  first 
"  pieces,"  lessons  in  real  harmony  and  thorough-bass  will 
seem  much  more  interesting  to  you  later  on.  The  cha- 
conne  and  the  passacaille,  the  passaglia  and  the  sarabande, 
are  all  dances  of  about  the  same  period  as  the  gavotte,  and 
have  certain  governing  principles.  The  chaconne  is  slow, 
and  is  usually  written  in  the  major  key. 

The  passacaille  is  written  in  the  minor  key.  What  is 
called  the  theme  in  the  chaconne  is  invariably  in  the  bass ; 
in  a  passacaille  it  may  be  in  any  part.  The  passacaille  has 
a  very  curious  kind  of  interest,  since  in  the  last  century 
composers  made  use  of  it  to  show  their  skill — what  is  known 
as  contrapuntal  skill.  It  must  consist  of  a  short  theme  of 
two,  four,  or  eight  bars.  Bach,  Frescobaldi,  and  Handel 
all  wrote  famous  passacailles. 

The  sarabande  is  more  stately  in  its  movement.     It  was 


60  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

a  popular  dance  in  the  sixteenth  century,  and  some  say  it 
was  introduced  then  by  a  famous  dancer  called  Yaratanda. 
I  think  that  it  might  often  have  formed  part  of  very  pictu- 
resque scenes  in  the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries, 
when  people  were  full  of  a  certain  kind  of  poetry,  and  en- 
joyed whatever  was  splendid  and  stately.  Sometimes 
dancers  were  hired  to  perform  it ;  sometimes  ladies  and 
gentlemen  of  quality  danced  it  for  their  sovereign. 

Old  songs  are  full  of  references  to  sarabandes  as  being 
danced  at  times  when  sadness,  or  even  deep  regret,  filled 
the  minds  of  the  performers;  so  that  we  may  picture  it  as 
a  slow,  pathetic  movement,  with  melancholy  and  sweetness 
in  its  train. 

In  1723  Bach  was  appointed  cantor  of  the  Thomas-Schule, 
in  Leipsic,  and  organist  and  director  of  music  in  the  princi- 
pal churches.  There  he  remained  until  his  death,  in  1T50, 
and  the  organ  played  by  him  in  the  old  Thomas-Kirche  is 
still  in  use  there,  and  seems  to  breathe  forth  suggestions  of 
the  dear  master  who,  even  when  afflicted  by  blindness,  loved 
to  spend  hours  before  it,  improvising  or  producing  all  sorts 
of  the  harmonic  changes  in  which  he  delighted,  and  en- 
trancing his  hearers  by  some  of  his  grand  fugues. 

A  fugue  is  a  piece  of  music  in  which  one  part  after  an- 
other seems  to  chase  the  subject  or  motive;  it  is  derived 
from  the  Latin  fugare,  to  put  to  flight,  and  it  is  written 


Composition  of  the  Fugue.  61 

according  to  a  fixed  plan,  and  involves  all  sorts  of  harmonic 
forms,  which  you  will  the  better  appreciate  with  a  further 
study  of  thorough-bass.  What  are  known  as  canon,  imita- 
tion, and  double  counterpoint  are  included  in  it.  There  is 
first  a  subject  started  ;  then  what  is  called  the  answer ;  then 
the  counter-subject ;  then  the  stretto,  which  is  an  imitation 
of  the  subject,  but  in  closer  time,  and  is  supposed  to  give  a 
sort  of  sweep  to  the  climax.  After  this  may  be  added  what 
is  called  a  codetta, which  is  a  little  "tail-piece,"  as  it  were, 
and  gives  a  greater  idea  of  finish  or  completeness — an  epi- 
sode and  a  code,  which  is  a  larger  kind  of  codetta. 

There  are  fixed  rules  to  be  observed  in  the  composition 
of  the  fugue,  but  their  details  would  not  come  within  the 
limits  of  our  present  purpose ;  some  you  may  remember 
when  you  begin  the  real  study  of  harmony,  and  may  as  well 
be  given  now. 

When  the  subject  has  the  tonic,  the  answer  should  have 
the  dominant ;  when  the  subject  has  the  third  of  the  tonic, 
then  the  answer  must  have  the  third  of  the  dominant,  and 
vice  versa,  and  so  on.  When  the  fugue  is  in  the  minor,  and 
the  subject  has  the  interval  of  the  diminished  seventh,  that 
interval  must  come  in  unchanged  in  the  answer.  In  either 
major  or  minor,  if  the  subject  goes  from  the  dominant  to 
the  sub-dominant  in  the  upper  octave,  the  answer  must  con- 
stitute the  interval  of  an  octave.  Now,  would  it  not  be  a 


62  The  Story  of  Music 

profitable  employment  to  make  a  little  of  this  out  on  jonr 
piano,  and  make  notes  of  the  same  in  your  mauu script- book 
with  a  line  or  two  from  some  characteristic  gavotte  and 
fugue — just  enough  to  clearly  indicate  in,  musical  writing 
the  main  rules  to  be  employed.. 

Still  another  form  of  famous  music  is  specially  associated 
with  the  name  of  John  Sebastian  Bach.  This  is  what  we 
know  as  the  Passion  music. 

I  was  staying  once  in,  a  little  sea-bound  village  just  on 
the  borders  of  Spain,  and  there  I  became  very  much  inter- 
ested in  talking  with  two  of  the  country  people :  one  was  a 
pretty  young  peasant  woman  of  the  Basque  race;;  the  other 
a  lad,  also  a  Basque,  who  spent  mosfe  of  his  time  fishing.. 
From  them  I  heard  a  great  deal  about  the  curious  allegori- 
cal and  religious  performances  which  from  time  to  time- 
they  had  taken  part  in.  These  were  plays  given  in  the? 
public  squares  at  certain  seasons.  The  characters  were  usu> 
ally  chosen  from  the  Bible,  and  the  plot  of  the  play,  or 
rather  its  chief  idea,  would  be  some  biblical  scene. 

From  time  immemorial  these  plays  had  been  given,  and 
the  ideas  of  the  people  were  too  simple  to  make  them  wish, 
the  custom  altered.  No  form  of  dramatic  or  musical  rep* 
resentation  is  older,  and  so  we  ought  to  have  great  respect 
for  them,  knowing  they  have  come  down  from  very  pious, 
early  times. 


Passion  Music.  63 

In  some  ways  the  Passion  music,  which  I  hope  we  will 
how  hear  every  year  in  America,  has  its  origin  in  the  same 
feeling  which  influenced  the  writers  of  those  early  Christian 
plays ;  and  although  its  form  varies  now  very  much,  it  still 
keeps  the  original  idea  —  that  of  describing  in  music  the 
story  of  the  Passion  of  our  Lord. 

We  use  music  for  so  many  lighter  purposes  that  some- 
times people  shrink  from  the  idea  of  associating  it  with 
anything  BO  sacred.  Yet>  after  all,  what  art  is  more  fitting 
to  speak  to  us  of  what  ought  to  be  dearest  to  our  hearts  ? 
The  grand  and  simple  story  of  His  life  is  not  any  less  beau- 
tiful because  we  listen  to  it  sung  by  pure  voices  with  the 
accompaniment  of  harmonious  sounds. 

Passion  music  seems  to  have  had  its  origin  in  the  fourth 
century,  when  S.  Gregory  Nazianzen  first  prepared  it  in 
real  form.  None  of  this  music  is  preserved,  but  we  know 
that  it  was  very  widely  sung  in  the  early  Church. 

A  great  many  different  ideas  followed  these  first  ones 
down  to  the  time  of  the  Reformation.  Finally  the  idea  of 
a  more  perfect  form  of  Passion  music  worked  its  way  on  to 
about  1728,  when  Sebastian  Bach  conceived  the  idea  of 
writing  a  complete  Passion  oratorio.  His  plan  was  to  give 
the  exact  words  of  the  Gospel  as  far  as  possible,  with  good 
choruses,  some  recitatives,  and  four-part  chorales. 

The  great  musician   succeeded  almost  beyond  his   own 


64  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

expectations.  It  is  impossible  to  describe  the  tremendous 
and  sublime  effect  of  this  great  work.  It  is  written  for  two 
orchestras  and  two  choirs ;  it  seems  to  contain  every  variety 
of  musical  expression,  and  the  whole  thing  breathes  such  a 
purely  devotional  spirit  that  it  is  like  the  prayer  of  some 
strong  Christian  heart. 

Bach  was  at  the  time  organist  of  the  old  church  of  St. 
Thomas,  in  Leipsic,  as  well  as  cantor  of  the  school,  and  so 
he  had  every  opportunity  of  bringing  out  his  work  in  per- 
fection. It  was  produced  for  the  first  time  on  Good-Friday, 
1729.  Between  the  two  parts  a  sermon  was  preached,  and 
it  is  recorded  that  the  entire  service  produced  a  wonderful 
effect  upon  all  present. 

But  later  the  interest  in  his  marvellous  music  seemed  to 
flag.  For  a  century  it  lay  untouched ;  and  as  it  will  un- 
doubtedly continue  to  be  given  in  America,  I  think  the  story 
of  how  it  was  unearthed  will  prove  interesting  to  the  young 
musicians  whom  I  am  addressing. 

During  the  winter  of  1827  Felix  Mendelssohn,  then  about 
eighteen  years  of  age,  was  living  in  Berlin,  in  his  father's 
household.  It  was  a  charming  one,  the  brothers  and  sisters 
being  united  by  affection  and  many  sympathies.  They 
seem  to  have  been  equally  fond  of  music,  painting,  and  lit- 
erature. Naturally  such  a  delightful  young  circle  drew  into 
it  many  agreeable  friends.  Felix's  chosen  companion  waa 


Edward  Devrient.  65 

Edward  Devrient,  an  artist  whose  voice  was  exquisite,  and 
whose  knowledge  of  music  was  quite  equal  to  that  of  Felix's. 
Every  Saturday  Devrient  and  other  friends  used  to  meet 
at  Felix's  home  to  practise  vocal  music;  and  as  Felix  had 
a  great  enthusiasm  for  "  old  Bach,"  he  one  day  suggested 
their  trying  the  Passion  music,  which  was  unknown,  except 
in  name,  even  to  these  ardent  students.  So  they  began 
upon  it,  and  their  enthusiasm  grew  as  they  learned,  page 
after  page,  the  various  parts,  as  Devrient  says,  filling  them 
with  new  reverence  for  the  Bible  story. 

It  occurred  to  Devrient  to  produce  the  music  in  public. 
The  little  circle  was  startled  by  such  a  venturesome  idea. 
Mendelssohn  declared  it  would  be  a  failure.  Old  Zelter, 
his  teacher,  was  the  most  influential  musician  in  Berlin,  and 
Felix  well  knew  how  much  opposition  he  would  have  to 
expect  from  him. 

But  Devrient  persisted.  He  knew  that  if  Felix  once  un- 
dertook it  all  would  go  well.  At  last  the  two  friends  de- 
cided to  go  to  Zelter  and  see  what  he  would  say  to  their 
plan.  Devrient  has  left  a  very  entertaining  description  of 
this  interview. 

Zelter  lived  in  the  Musical  Academy ;  they  found  him  at 
home,  but  sitting  with  his  long  pipe  in  a  cloud  of  smoke. 
Out  of  this  he  looked  at  the  two  young  men,  exclaiming, 


66  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

"  Why,  how  is  this  ?  What  do  two  such  fine  young  fellows 
want  with  me  at  this  early  hour?" 

"  Now,"  writes  Devrient,  "  I  began  my  well-studied  speech 
about  our  admiration  of  Bach,  whom  we  had  first  learned  to 
prize  under  his  guidance. . . .  He  enlarged  upon  the  difficul- 
ties of  the  work,  which  required  resources  such  as  existed 
in  the  Thomas-Schule  when  Bach  himself  was  cantor  there — 
the  necessity  for  a  double  orchestra  and  double  chorus.  .  .  . 
He  became  excited,  rose,  put  aside  his  pipe,  and  began  walk- 
ing about  the  room.  We,  too,  rose.  Felix  pulled  me  by 
the  sleeve;  he  thought  nothing  more  could  be  done." 

But  Devrient  persisted,  and  finally  Zelter  agreed  "to 
speak  a  good  word  for  them."  When  they  left  the  room 
Felix  laughingly  called  his  friend  an  arch-rascal.  "Any- 
thing you  like,  for  the  honor  of  Sebastian  Bach,"  exclaimed 
Devrient,  as  they  went  into  the  street. 

They  began  the  rehearsals,  the  arrangement  of  the  score, 
all  the  fascinating,  though  severe,  labors  which  belong  to 
the  preparation  of  any  such  work.  When  they  went  to  en- 
gage the  solo  singers,  "  Felix,"  says  Devrient,  "  was  child 
enough  to  insist  on  our  being  dressed  exactly  alike." 

They  wore  "  blue  coats,  white  waistcoats,  black  neckties, 
black  trousers,  and  yellow  gloves,"  the  fashionable  attire  of 
the  time ;  but  an.  idea  may  be  had  of  how  economically  a 
young  German  lad  of  that  period  was  brought  up  by  Devri- 


JOHN   SEBASTIAN   BACH. 


Revival  of  the  Passion  Music.  67 

ent's  story  that,  Felix's  pocket-money  having  run  out,  lie 
loaned  him  a  thaler  (about  one  dollar)  to  buy  his  gloves, 
upon  which  Madame  Mendelssohn  was  quite  displeased, 
saying,  "Young  people  should  not  be  assisted  to  extrava- 
gance." 

It  was  just  one  hundred  years  since  Bach's  music  had  last 
been  heard,  and  this  idea  filled  the  two  young  men  with  en- 
thusiasm. They  could  think  and  talk  of  nothing  else.  One 
day,  as  they  crossed  the  Opern  Platz,  Felix  stood  still,  sud- 
denly exclaiming,  "  To  think  that  it  should  be  an  actor 
[Devrient]  and  a  Jew  that  give  back  to  the  people  the 
greatest  of  Christian  works !" 

The  performance  was  in  every  way  successful.  Zelter's 
prejudices  vanished,  and  all  Berlin  went  wild  over  this  re- 
vival of  an  interest  in  Bach.  A  second  concert  was  called 
for,  and  in  other  towns  the  music  began  to  be  studied  and 
produced.  What  seems  to  me  best  worth  recording  of  this 
is  the  fact  that  by  perseverance  in  the  right  direction  these 
two  young  men  did  a  lasting  favor  to  all  the  world. 

Devrient  sang  the  part  of  Christ.  He  says  of  it :  "  Deep- 
ly affected  by  the  work  as  it  proceeded,  I  sang  with  my 
whole  soul  and  voice,  and  believed  that  the  thrills  of  devo- 
tion that  ran  through  my  veins  were  also  felt  by  the  rapt 
hearers." 

Truly,  as  Devrient  says,  we  owe  thanks  to  that  year  1829, 

5 


68  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

in  which  the  "light  of  Bach's  greatest  music"  was  given 
to  us. 

At  Felix  Mendelssohn's  funeral,  in  1847,  Devrient  must 
have  had  sad  and  sweet  memories  of  this  time  of  their  youth. 
Among  the  various  selections  of  sacred  music  sung  on  that 
occasion  the  final  chorus  of  the  Passion  music,  "  We  sat 
down  in  tears,"  was  given  with  most  solemn  effect. 


Growth  of  Counterpoint.  69 


CHAPTER  V. 

Rhythm  and  Time.— Bach's  Developments. — A  Simple  Explanation. — 
Keys  and  their  Families. — A  Bach  Fugue. — Minor  Scales. — Modula- 
tions.— Accidentals. — A  few  Words  about  Signatures. — Why  Handel 
and  his  Contemporaries  discarded  the  lowest  Note  of  the  Signature. 

THE  growth  of  counterpoint  was  not  a  very  rapid  one, 
and  various  composers  strove  to  perfect  it,  working  out  by 
means  of  their  own  genius  and  technical  ability  certain  mat- 
ters connected  with  it  which,  in  the  beginning,  were  very 
often  too  confused  to  be  of  much  service  to  the  student. 
John  Sebastian  Bach  devoted  his  attention  earnestly,  as  you 
have  seen,  to  certain  points  in  harmony.  To  the  question 
of  time  he  gave  much  attention ;  and  as  with  this  came  a 
necessity  for  rhythm,  and  as  he  united  to  his  studies  in  this 
direction  that  of  a  careful  regard  for  the  keys  in  which  his 
works  were  written,  his  compositions  afford  the  young  stu- 
dent admirable  opportunity  for  thoughtful  and  interesting 
work. 

In  ancient  music  time  or  rhythm  was  determined  with- 
out any  bars  being  marked  or  drawn  across  the  stave.  The 
value  of  the  notes  determined  the  rhythm,  but,  as  can  readi- 


70  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

ly  be  imagined,  this  gave  rise  to  much  confusion,  and  in  the 
sixteenth  century  Henry  Lawes  was  the  first  English  musi- 
cian who  regularly  made  use  of  bars  in  his  composition.  It 
was  only  after  this  period  that  rhythm  in  music  began  to 
be  regularly  understood,  and  it  is  well  for  us,  in  the  very 
beginning  of  musical  practice  or  study,  to  thoroughly  un- 
derstand the  meaning  of  all  such  terms — a  just  comprehen- 
sion of  them  being  most  useful  to  any  pianist;  my  own 
belief  being  that  the  very  knowledge  of  the  origin  and 
meaning  even  of  a  bar  line,  or  of  the  length  of  a  single 
note,  may  influence  the  student's  performance;  for  directly 
the  spirit  of  harmony  and  of  melody  together  is  infused  into 
the  work,  new  lights  seem  to  come  upon  it,  and  we  can  no 
longer  be  simply  imitators  or  perform  mechanically  with  a 
view  to  making  a  fine  effect  only,  for  the  higher  and  at  the 
same  time  more  technical  meanings  of  the  page  before  us 
are  understood.  Rhythm  has  been  defined  in  various  ways, 
but  it  may  be  said  to  be  the  metre  of  music.  The  intervals 
of  steps  and  half  steps  have  been  given  a  specified  value  in 
order  to  produce  the  sounds  with  regard  to  harmony  and 
melody,  and  to  create  what  is  known  as  time.  Time  in 
music  is  an  expression  of  rhythm,  and  rhythm  is  the  "  sys- 
tematic grouping  of  notes  with  regard  to  duration."  To 
rhythm  time  and  accent  stand  in  the  same  relation,  so  an 
admirable  authority  tells  us,  that  metre  bears  to  quantity  in 


Rhythm.  71 

poetry.  When  we  speak  of  the  fine  rhythm  of  any  compo- 
sition, we  mean  that  the  composer  has  arranged  his  musical 
ideas  in  a  graceful  manner.  The  spirit  of  the  work  depends 
largely  upon  the  swing  or  rhythm  which  the  composer  sug- 
gests, and  which  it  is  the  part  of  the  player  to  appreciate 
and  express.  This  being  addressed  to  young  pianists,  I 
dwell  more  upon  the  sentiment  in  the  meaning  of  the  word 
than  its  more  purely  technical  definition.  To  give  this 
swinging  rhythmical  utterance  in  your  music,  and  at  the 
same  time  to  preserve  directly  the  time  in  which  the  work 
is  written,  should  be  a  never-failing  effort  on  the  part  of 
all  real  students,  however  moderate  their  ambition  or  per- 
formance. When  you  use  a  term,  however,  in  its  strictly 
critical  sense,  be  careful  to  thoroughly  understand  its  mean- 
ing. There  is  no  trace  of  rhythm  in  barbarous  music.  The 
different  masses  of  notes,  so  to  speak,  which  are  arranged  or 
divided  by  time  into  groups  of  equal  duration,  did  not  exist 
in  any  fashion  sufficiently  orderly  in  ancient  days  to  have  a 
rhythmical  meaning.  No  one  verse,  so  to  speak,  in  music 
was  begun  and  ended  completely  enough,  or  with  sufficient 
system,  to  make  this  possible.  Accent  and  time  were  nec- 
essary before  rhythm  could  be  in  use.  When  the  upper 
figure  which  marks  the  time  in  which  a  piece  is  to  be  played 
is  an  even  number  it  is  in  direct  rhythm,  and  the  leading 
accent  always  comes  on  the  first  beat  of  each  measure.  The 


72  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

secondary  accent  occurs  when  the  movement  in  which  a 
piece  is  played  is  moderately  quick,  and  falls  on  the  middle 
of  the  bar.  When  the  movement  is  very  slow,  you  may 
often  subdivide  these  accents.  If  it  be  very  quick,  a  pri- 
mary accent  may  only  fall  upon  every  other  bar  ;  but  much 
of  this  must  be  determined  by  the  musical  taste  and  feeling 
of  the  player.  When,  however,  a  piece  begins  with  a  frac- 
tion of  a  bar,  the  utmost  care  must  be  taken  in  regard  to 
the  accents  employed.  Every  dot  or  rest  is  of  consequence 
in  reading  or  playing,  and  belongs  to  the  study  of  rhythm  ; 
to  read  or  play  "  following  the  marks"  strictly  is  considered 
an  evidence  of  what  may  be  called  good  breeding  in  music, 
and  should  be  taken  into  consideration  by  every  student 
from  the  first  note  of  the  first  piece  learned.  The  gavotte, 
as  I  have  told  you,  begins  almost  always  on  the  third  beat 
of  the  bar,  ending  with  a  half  bar  containing  a  quarter  note. 
Study  even  a  few  lines  of  one  of  Bach's  gavottes  with  dis- 
tinct reference  to  time  and  rhythm,  taking  it  as  you  would 
so  much  poetry,  and  you  will  have  the  best  example  needed 
for  our  subject.  And  for  the  study  of  key-notes,  with  the 
tonic,  the  dominant,  and,  at  the  same  time,  the  interval  of 
the  diminished  seventh,  nothing  could  be  better  than  one 
of  Bach's  simplest  fugues. 

When  we  speak  of  the  key  in  which  any  piece  of  music  is 
written,  we  mean  a  "family  of  tunes,"  as  it  were,  which  are 


,  Importance  of  the  Tonic.  73 

all  in  a  fixed  state  of  relationship  to  one  leading  tone,  which 
is  called  the  key-note,  or,  better  still,  the  key-tone.  For  ex- 
ample, if  a  piece  of  music  is  said  to  be  in  the  "  key  of  C," 
it  means  that  C  is  the  key-tone  from  which  the  piece  is  built 
up ;  and  as  each  key  has  its  own  progressions — family  laws 
and  rights  and  meanings  —  so  each  must  have  its  family 
name.  In  writing  music,  of  course  all  sorts  of  rules  must 
be  observed  in  regard  to  these  different  families.  By  fol- 
lowing them  strictly  harmony  is  preserved,  the  sounds  are 
perfect,  the  strains  pleasing  in  proportion  to  the  care  paid 
all  these  many  laws  of  music ;  and  while  the  young  student 
cannot  expect  to  appreciate  fully  all  these,  there  should  be 
an  earnest  desire  to  understand  leading  principles. 

A  scale  of  any  kind  presents  the  material  of  a  key,  and 
the  leading  note  or  tone  is  the  key-note  or  key-tone,  called 
the  tonic.  All  keys  are  either  major  or  minor,  and  two 
have  been  chosen  as  the  models  on  which  all  others  are 
formed — C  in  the  major,  A  in  the  minor.  The  pitch  may 
be  different  in  different  keys,  but,  as  you  will  see,  the  struct- 
ure or  manner  of  building  your  tone  ladder  up  is  exactly 
the  same  in  all  major  keys  and  in  all  minor  keys. 

Now,  then,  the  tonic  is  of  the  greatest  importance,  as, 
without  knowing  that,  we  would  not  have  any  idea  in  what 
key  any  piece  of  music  was  written ;  and  in  order  to  pre- 
serve the  unity  of  sound,  the  finish  of  any  melody  is  always 


74  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

on  the  tonic  note,  or  else  on  the  major  or  minor,  third  or 
the  fifth,  and  in  the  close  of  the  piece,  if  in  a  chord,  the 
lowest  note  must  be  the  tonic. 

The  next  tone  of  importance  to  your  key  is  the  domi- 
nant. Using  C  as  our  model,  take  the  fifth  from  that,  i.  e., 
G,  and  you  have  the  dominant.  The  chord  of  the  domi- 
nant is  the  controlling  chord,  because,  in  making  the  modu- 
lation from  one  key  to  another,  the  moment  you  reach  the 
dominant  you  are  the  same  as  in  the  key,  and  it  is  the  chord 
which  exercises  most  influence  over  the  progression.  The 
sub-dominant  is  t\\Q  fourth  from  the  key-note  going  up; 
reverse  it,  or  turn  it  down,  and  it  is  the  fifth.  (Exercise 
this  upon  your  piano,  and  it  will  become  clear  to  you  at 
once.) 

Now,  then,  each  family  of  tones  of  course  has  its  rela- 
tions. When  we  speak  of  a  related  key,  we  mean  one  in 
which  there  is  but  one  note  of  difference.  For  example, 
take  your  key  of  C.  G  is  its  related  key,  because  there  is 
in  the  scale  of  G  but  one  note  of  difference,  F  sharp. 

F  natural  is  a  related  key  of  C,  because  there  is  only  the 
difference  of  B  flat,  and  these  keys  work  in  harmony  to- 
gether, although  of  course,  by  making  your  progressions 
properly,  you  pass  from  them  into  every  other. 

Now,  for  a  little  bit  of  study  go  back  to  your  fugue  of 
old  Bach.  If  the  subject  has  the  tonic,  or  begins  with  it, 


Formation  of  the  Scale.  75 

what  is  the  answer  ?  Study  this  out  easily  and  carefully,  as 
a  means  of  impressing  the  significance  of  the  terms  upon 
your  mind. 

The  minor  scale  is  formed  in  the  following  fashion :  Ev- 
ery major  scale,  to  begin  with,  has  its  relative  minor,  and 
that  minor  of  course  must  have  its  tonic  or  key-note.  To 
determine  this  you  must  count  down  from  the  key-note  of 
the  major  scale  three  half  steps,  otherwise  to  a  minor  third. 
For  example,  take  the  key  of  G.  Three  half  steps  below 
you  have  your  minor  third,  which  is  E;  therefore  E  is  the 
tonic  or  key-note  of  the  relative  minor  of  G,  and  it  starts 
the  scale  known  as  E  minor.  If  a  piece  is  written  in  the 
minor,  however,  the  signature  is  precisely  the  same  as  in 
the  major.  For  instance,  in  this  case,  the  key  being  G  ma- 
jor, there  would  be  one  sharp,  F,  in  the  signature.  To  de- 
termine, however,  that  the  piece  is  in  the  minor,  see  whether 
the  major  seventh  from  the  key-note  of  E  is  not  always 
raised,  otherwise  D  sharp,  as  this  is  invariably  the  case  in 
all  minor  scales. 

Take  now  the  key  of  C ;  count  down  three  half  steps, 
you  have  A;  A,  therefore,  is  the  prime  unison  or  tonic  of 
your  minor  scale.  Now  let  us  see  how  the  scale  is  formed, 
remembering  that  all  minor  scales  are  built  up  on  the  same 
principle.  B,  which  is  a  major  second,  follows;  next  C, 
which  is  a  minor  third;  D,  a  perfect  fourth ;  E,  a  perfect 


76  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

fifth  ;  F,  a  minor  sixth  ;  G  sharp,  an  accidental,  and  your 
major  seventh ;  and  A  of  course  the  octave.  Now  you  will 
observe  that  the  seventh,  by  what  is  called  a  chromatic  al- 
teration, is  always  made  major,  raising  it  a  half  step.  In 
playing  a  minor  scale  up  from  the  lower  note  to  the  upper, 
no  one  plays  the  minor  sixth,  for  the  simple  reason  that  it 
is  hard  for  voices  and  impossible  for  some  instruments  to 
take  it,  and  for  this  reason  it  is  made  major;  otherwise  F 
sharp  in  the  key  we  are  considering,  because  that  augmented 
second  from  F  natural  to  G  sharp  is  very  difficult  for  voices 
to  reach  accurately,  and  it  would  be  impossible,  as  I  say.  for 
certain  instruments.  Returning,  however,  in  the  descent  of 
the  scale,  this  does  not  apply>  so  you  may  play  your  scale 
correctly,  according  to  the  given  rule  of  harmony ;  for  in- 
stance, using  your  G  sharp  and  F  natural. 

Now,  if  this  sounds  very  puzzling  it  will  be  a  proof  that 
in  your  study  of  the  intervals  you  have  not  sufficiently  im- 
pressed upon  your  mind  exactly  the  meaning  of  the  term 
used,  or  learned  how  to  calculate  your  degrees,  and  it  will 
be  an  excellent  evidence  to  you  of  the  necessity  of  taking 
things  slowly  and  carefully,  and  thoroughly  understanding 
each  division  of  your  labor  as  far  as  you  go. 

The  minor  is  employed  with  admirable  effect  by  all  com- 
posers, deepening  the  melancholy,  sentiment,  pathos,  or  inten- 
sity of  their  work,  and  in  some  themes  being  indispensable. 


Illustrations  of  Signature.  77 

Take  your  twelve  scales,  and  you  will  find  that  they  are 
all  built  up  on  precisely  the  same  rules. 

When  a  piece  is  written  partly  in  one  key  and  partly  in 
another,  it  is  said  to  be  modulated,  but  in  any  and  every 
case  it  must  return  to  the  original  key,  and  all  the  notes 
which  do  not  by  rights  belong  to  the  key  —  the  flats  and 
sharps  which  would  occur  in  the  key  that  it  goes  into  for 
a  while — are  written  and  are  called  accidentals.  Occasion- 
ally the  key  into  which  the  piece  changes  is  sufficiently 
remote  from  the  original  to  make  it  worth  while  to  entire- 
ly alter  the  signature ;  for  example,  supposing  the  key  be 
E-flat  major,  your  signature  would  be  thus : 


tJ 

Modulating  or  changing  to  E  major,  the  signature  would  be 
altered  thus: 


The  original  flats  would  be  cancelled  or  turned  into  natu- 
rals. When  the  modulations  are  only  into  a  very  nearly 
related  key — for  instance,  into  the  key  of  the  dominant, 
which  is,  you  know,  the  fifth  from  the  tonic — then  no  alter- 
ation is  needed,  for  the  accidentals  would  be  so  few.  For 
this  reason  we  find  the  second  movement  of  a  sonata  in  the 
dominant  requires  no  change  in  the  signature. 


The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 


The  following  shows  you  a  table  of  the  sharp  and  flat 
signatures  now  in  use : 

r-fr*  jtt.T 


G  Major. 


D  Major.          A  Major. 


E  Major.          B  Major. 


*  G-Flat  Major.    D-Flat  Maj.    A-FlatMaj.    E-Flat  Maj.    B  Flat  Maj.     F  Maj. 

Some  composers  in  the  last  century  dropped  the  last  sharp 
or  flat  in  the  signature,  and  marked  it  throughout  the  piece 
as  an  accidental.  The  reason  given  by  good  critics  for  this 
is  that  they  desired  thereby  to  call  the  attention  of  the 
player  more  particularly  to  it,  as  it  is  regarded  as  the  most 
necessary  note  in  the  signature,  and  without  that  you  could 
not  distinguish  the  key  from  the  one  just  preceding  it.  For 
example,  in  the  key  of  D  flat  the  last  flat,  G,  is  the  only  one 
which  distinguishes  it  from  its  predecessor,  A  flat,  and  it  is 
accordingly  of  greatest  importance.  Part  of  the  "  Messiah  " 
is  written  out  in  the  way  I  have  mentioned,  leaving  out  this 
essential  note  in  the  signature.  An  excellent  suggestion  for 
your  musical  note -book  would  be  the  mention  of  certain 
pieces  where  the  signatures  vary.  Give  the  original  key, 
mention  the  modulations,  the  accidentals,  etc.,  and  especially 
note  the  use  of  major  or  minor. 


George  Frederick  Handel.  79 


CHAPTER  VI. 

George  Frederick  Handel.  —  An  English  Country-house. — A  Young 
Lady's  Impressions  of  the  great  Composer  in  1711. — "Tweedledum 
and  Tweedledee." — "Rinaldo"  and  other  Operas. — A  Friendly  Cote- 
rie.— "The  Harmonious  Blacksmith." — "Mr.  Handel"  in  Dublin. — 
Mr.  Dubourg. — The  First  Performance  of  the  "Messiah." — Last  Days. 
— Definition  and  History  of  the  Oratorio. 

ONE  May  morning,  in  the  year  1711,  the  drawing-room 
of  an  English  house  not  far  from  Windsor  Castle  presented 
an  animated  appearance.  A  distinguished  visitor  was  ex- 
pected, and  the  three  young  ladies  of  the  family,  attired  in 
their  best  flowered  chintzes,  and  with  their  most  approved 
of  company  manners,  were  gathered  in  the  large  bow-win- 
dow, quite  breathless  with  anxiety  as  to  how  this  morning 
call  would  be  on  all  sides  enjoyed.  One  of  the  daughters 
of  the  house  had  been  in  Germany  attached  to  the  Hano- 
verian court,  where  she  had  made  the  acquaintance  of  the 
guest  now  expected,  George  Frederick  Handel,  the  musi- 
cian and  composer,  who  is  perhaps  best  known  to-day  for 
his  famous  oratorio  of  the  "  Messiah." 

When  George  I.  became  King  of  England  he  continued 
his  interest  in  Handel,  and  was  the  means  of  inducing  the 


8o  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

musician  to  visit  his  adopted  country,  and  the  eldest  Lady 
G ,  having  met  her  former  teacher  drinking  tea  at  Wind- 
sor, an  invitation  for  a  morning  at  her  father's  country- 
house  quickly  followed  ;  and  we  may  fancy  a  flutter  among 
these  simple  maidens,  whose  musical  ability  was  of  the  most 
limited  order,  and  who,  from  what  they  had  heard,  were  in- 
clined to  feel  rather  afraid  of  the  burly,  hot-tempered  gen- 
ius just  then  absorbed  in  writing  Italian  opera  music,  which 
was  all  that  the  fashionable  world  of  London  in  that  day 

cared  for.     Young  Lady  G had  passed  a  morning  with 

the  daughters  of  the  Prince  of  Wales,  whom  Mr.  Handel 
was  teaching  to  write  music,  and  I  have  no  doubt  that  the 
young  people  enjoyed  a  little  gossip  over  the  two  factions 
into  which  society  was  then  divided.  Operas  were  quite  a 
novelty.  Fine  ladies  and  gentlemen  crowded  the  green- 
rooms of  the  opera-house,  chatted  and  talked  at  the  wings 
as  if  they  were  in  a  drawing-room.  Fashion  governs  nearly 
everything,  and  Handel,  whose  soul  was  full  of  grand  ideas, 
had  to  content  himself  at  first  with  working  upon  an  opera 
in  order  to  please  the  public.  He  wrote  "  Rinaldo"  in  four- 
teen days,  and  it  was  produced  at  Drury  Lane  with  a  splen- 
dor that  created  great  excitement  throughout  London.  We 
never  hear  the  opera  of  "Kinaldo  "  now,  but  one  of  its  airs  is 
very  beautiful.  "  Lascia  ch'  io  Pianga"  lingers  in  the  heart 
of  every  one  who  hears  it. 


GEORGE  FREDERICK  HAXDEL. 


Handel  and  Buononcini.  83 

As  soon  as  he  became  famous,  and  very  much  the  fashion, 
Handel  roused  the  jealousy  of  petty  people,  and  opinions 
differed  to  such  an  extent  that  society  actually  took  sides- 
one  favoring  a  distinguished  musician  named  Buononcini, 
and  the  other  Handel.  The  war  raged,  and  during  it  a  wit 
and  poet  named  John  Byron  wrote  the  following  verse, 
which  has  since  been  famous : 

"Some  say,  as  compared  to  Buononcini, 
That  Mynheer  Handel's  but  a  ninny; 
Others  aver  that  he  to  Handel 
Is  scarcely  fit  to  hold  a  candle. 
Strange  all  this  difference  should  be 
'Twixt  tweedledum  and  tweedledee." 

The  Ladies  G belonged  no  doubt  to  the  "  tweedle- 
dum "  faction,  and  so  we  may  fancy  Mr.  Handel  received 
in  this  quaint  drawing-room  where  I  took  a  cup  of  tea  not 
long  ago,  and  heard  the  story — with  all  the  pretty  airs  and 
formality  of  the  period.  Presently  he  is  led  away  to  the 
music-room,  where  was  a  fairly  good  organ,  upon  which  he 
performed,  greatly  to  the  delight  of  his  hostess  and  her  fam- 
ily, and  no  doubt  with  much  more  enjoyment  for  himself 
than  if  he  had  been  obliged  to  exchange  compliment  and 
pretty  nothings  in  the  drawing-room  below.  That  the  visit 
was  considered  an  honor,  indicating  the  feelings  towards  the 
musician,  is  shown  by  the  entry  in  young  Lady  G 's 


84  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

diary,  and  which,  in  faded  characters,  seems  to  bring  up  a 
pleasant  scene  of  the  past : 

"  This  morning  came  Dr.  Handel,  the  great  musician.  He 
played  on  the  organ  for  us,  and  we  were  in  a  state  of  great 

joy  all  the  time.  L could  hardly  keep  from  crying, 

but  I  know  not  whether  it  was  most  with  the  musicke  or 
the  honor.  He  says  the  Prince  of  Wales's  daughters  have 
a  very  pretty  talent  for  musicke,  and  one  of  them  pleases 
him  much." 

Far  back  of  this  time,  however,  Handel  could  remember 
a  childhood  in  which  his  music  had  to  find  utterance  under 
protest.  He  was  born  on  February  23,  1685,  in  Halle,  Sax- 
ony. His  father  was  a  good  surgeon,  but  he  abhorred  mu- 
sic. As  soon  as  little  George  Frederick  began  to  show  an 
aptitude  for  it  his  father  took  him  away  from  school,  lest 
any  one  of  his  companions  should  teach  him  his  notes. 
Whether  among  the  teachers  or  scholars  I  do  not  know, 
but  the  boy  found  a  friend  who  gave  him  a  little  dumb 
spinet,  and  this  he  secreted  in  an  attic,  contriving  not  only 
to  learn  his  notes  from  it,  but  to  use  his  fingers  in  prac- 
tising. Still  his  father  opposed  him  ;  but  at  last  his  genius 
was  made  evident  owing  to  an  accidental  visit. 

The  elder  Handel  was  invited  to  visit  his  son,  who  was  in 
the  service  of  the  great  Duke  of  Saxe-Weissenfels,  and 
young  George,  knowing  that  music  was  always  to  be  heard, 


Handel  to  receive  a  Musical  Education.  85 

if  not  learned,  in  that  place,  determined  to  accompany  bis 
parent.  Dr.  Handel  set  out  in  his  carriage,  but  after  the 
first  mile  looked  around  to  discover  his  little  son  running, 
as  bard  as  his  small  legs  would  carry  him,  after  the  carriage. 
At  this  the  father's  heart  relented  ;  the  child  was  picked  up, 
and,  promising  to  behave  well,  taken  to  the  castle,  where  tbe 
duke  was  willing  enough  to  allow  him  to  remain  for  a  day 
or  two. 

In  the  old  castle  many  of  the  inmates  were  musical,  and 
the  boy,  left  much  to  his  own  devices,  soon  made  friends 
with  them,  and  obtained  easy  access  to  tbe  music-rooms  and 
the  cbapel  organ.  One  afternoon,  the  services  being  ended, 
little  Handel  sprang  on  to  the  stool  before  the  organ  and 
commenced  playing,  unconscious  that  the  duke  was  linger- 
ing below.  His  astonishment  and  delight  were  great  when 
he  was  summoned  to  the  duke's  presence,  and  his  father 
sent  for  to  explain  why  musical  advantages  had  not  been 
given  him.  After  this  there  could  be  no  question  as  to  the- 
boy's  future. 

Old  Dr.  Handel  gave  his  consent  to  his  son's  musical  ed- 
ucation, and  almost  from  that  moment  George  Frederick 
Handel  became  known  as  a  musician. 

I  cannot  tell  you  anything  more  of  his  childhood  or  his 
youth  but  that  he  studied  hard,  and,  like  all  'geniuses,  was 
humble  while  be  was  learning. 

6 


86  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

We  must  skip  over  many  years  to  the  time  when  he  went 
to  England,  for  there  he  produced  his  greatest  work,  and  to 
this  day  the  English  reverence  him  as  their  own.  He  had 
visited  Italy,  and  in  Venice  met  the  best  musicians  of  the 
day.  Of  this  winter  an  amusing  anecdote  is  related.  The 
carnival  season  was  at  its  height,  and  Handel  being  masked 
at  a  certain  ball,  seated  himself  uninvited  at  the  harpsichord 
and  began  playing,  improvising  so  that  his  identity  would 
not  be  known.  The  crowd  of  masks  were  not  attracted 
especially  until  suddenly  a  brilliant  figure  appeared  in  one 
of  the  door-ways  and  stood  transfixed  by  the  music.  This 
was  Scarlatti,  son  of  the  first  great  musician  of  that  name, 
and  himself  the  leading  harpsichordist  in  Italy.  After  a 
few  moments'  silence  he  strode  across  the  room,  calling 
out,  "  This  is  either  the  devil  or  the  Saxon  /"  Handel 
being  known  throughout  Venice  as  "The  dear  Saxon" 
(II  caro  Sassone).  Handel  removed  his  mask,  Scarlatti 
doing  the  same,  and  from  that  moment  the  two  were  firm 
friends. 

A  few  years  later  we  find  him  in  England,  where,  having 
written  his  opera  of  "Rinaldo,"  he  was  obliged  to  arrange 
it  all  for  the  harpsichord,  and  throughout  the  length  and 
breadth  of  the  country  it  was  played.  Perhaps  no  musical 
composer's  work  —  unless  it  be  that  of  the  writers  of  the 
English  opera  to-day — ever  was  so  generally  played,  sung, 


The  Famous  Dead  March.  87 

whistled,  danced  to,  marched  by,  or  buried  with  as  was  Han- 
del's during  the  period  of  his  English  popularity. 

Handel  made  friends,  or  perhaps  I  should  say  associates, 
wherever  he  found  appreciation  of  music,  and  so,  in  a  long 
room  over  a  table  in  Clerkenwell  Green,  he  had  many  a 
delightful  morning  of  music  with  congenial  friends,  none 
the  less  appreciated  because  they  were  entertained  by  one 
Thomas  Britton,  the  owner  of  the  stables,  a  coal-heaver  who 
had  a  passion  for  music,  and  delighted  in  welcoming  Han- 
del, for  whom  he  procured  a  chamber- organ  and  various 
stringed  instruments,  he  himself  performing  very  well  on  a 
viol  de  gamba.  A  painter  of  the  day  sketched  the  coal- 
heaver  and  his  guests,  and  made  a  picture  of  one  evening's 
scene  there  when  Handel  was  playing  "  The  Harmonious 
Blacksmith"  for  such  a  company  as  Pope  the  poet,  the 
Duchess  of  Queensbury,  Dr.  Pepusch,  Colley  Gibber,  Buo- 
noncini,  and  many  others  of  that  period  of  genius  and 
splendor. 

When  Handel  began  to  work  on  his  oratorios  he  had  to 
contend  against  a  strong  feeling.  "  Saul,"  in  which  occurs 
the  famous  Dead  March,  was  produced  in  1739.  (This 
march  is  noticeable  to  the  student  as  being  one  of  the  few 
very  stately  and  solemn  pieces  of  the  kind  which  is  written 
in  a  major  key.)  "Israel  in  Egypt"  followed  this,  but  Han- 
del's success  in  England  seemed  to  have  considerably  abated. 


88  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

The  Irish  papers  announced  in  November,  1741,  that  "Dr. 
Handel  arrived  in  the  packet-boat  from  Holyhead,  a  gentle- 
man universally  known  by  his  excellent  composition  in  all 
kinds  of  music. 

In  Dublin  he  took  people  by  storm,  and  be  it  said  to  the 
credit  of  the  Irish  taste  in  music,  which  is  too  slightly  ap- 
preciated even  to-day,  that  his  best  work  was  what  attracted 
most  attention  in  the  city  of  Dublin.  There,  on  the  13th 
day  of  April,  1742,  Fishamber  Street  was  crowded  to  ex- 
cess, the  doors  of  the  new  music-hall  thronged,  noblemen 
and  ladies  of  "quality"  competing  eagerly  with  people  of 
the  middle  and  even  lower  classes  for  places  in  the  concert- 
room.  On  that  day,  as  was  announced,  "Mr.  Handel's  new 
oratorio,  '  The  Messiah,'  was  to  be  performed  for  the  first 
time."  It  is  interesting  to  us  to  know  that  the  chief  sing- 
ers on  this  first  occasion  were  Mrs.  Gibber,  Mrs.  Avolio,  and 
Mr.  Dubourg.  Of  the  latter  an  amusing  story  was  told  me 
by  a  well-known  musical  director,  who  showed  me  Handel's 
pitch-pipe.  Dubourg  was  fond  of  introducing  cadenzas 
into  his  music,  whether  sung  or  played.  In  vain  Handel, 
as  director,  tried  to  keep  the  artist  strictly  to  his  text.  At 
a  special  concert,  when  Dubourg  in  his  most  elaborate  man- 
ner began  indulging  some  fantasies  of  the  kind,  Handel 
stood  up  and  called  out, 

"Welcome   home,  Mr.  Dubourg!  welcome  home   again, 


Failure  of  the  Oratorio  of  "  Samson''  89 

sir!"  which  recalled  the  discomfited  Dubourg  to  his  proper 
place. 

So  successful  was  the  oratorio  that  the  whole  of  Dublin 
rang  with  his  praises.  The  anxiety  to  obtain  places  became 
so  great  that  the  ladies  of  rank  in  the  capital  agreed  for  the 
time  being  to  go  without  hoops  so  that  an  additional  num- 
ber of  people  could  be  admitted  in  the  audience,  and  Eng- 
land, which  had  for  some  time  neglected  and  imbittered 
the  composer,  woke  to  the  fact  that  a  very  great  man  in- 
deed had  been  in  their  midst.  Still  on  his  return  to  Lon- 
don a  great  many  in  the  fashionable  world  tried  to  inter- 
fere with  his  success.  The  oratorio  of  "Samson"  was 
produced,  but  failed,  and  it  was  not  until  1746-7  when  "Ju- 
das Maccabaeus"  appeared,  that  the  tide  seemed  to  turn  in 
his  favor,  and  to  this  day  shares  some  of  the  perennial  hon- 
or offered  to  the  "Messiah."  "Joshua,"  "Solomon,"  "Su- 
sanna," and  "Theodora,"  followed  this,  and  Handel  was 
again  on  the  pinnacle  of  success. 

He  lived  very  quietly,  with  but  few  and  simple  amuse- 
ments, smoking  his  pipe  and  drinking  his  beer  moderately 
with  a  few  intimate  friends,  and  caring  but  little  for  the 
opinions  floating  about  him.  In  1751  he  was  at  work  upon 
a  new  oratorio,  "  Jephthah,"  and  was  attacked  with  that 
blindness  from  which  it  seems  so  many  famous  musicians 
have  been  doomed  to  suffer.  In  1752  his  eyesight  failed 


90  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

entirely,  but  it  is  said  that  his  nature  became  much  softer, 
gentler,  and  more  kindly  in  every  way  after  this  terrible 
affliction  was  pronounced  incurable.  To  all  sorts  of  chari- 
table institutions  he  contributed  liberally,  and  played  fre- 
quently on  the  organ  at  the  Foundling  Hospital  for  some 
charitable  purpose.  He  had  no  desire  to  have  his  life  pro- 
longed ;  on  the  contrary,  it  is  said  that  during  that  last  year 
he  frequently  expressed  a  hope  that  he  might  die  upon 
Good -Friday;  "in  hopes"  he  said,  "of  meeting  his  good 
God,  his  sweet  Lord  and  Saviour  on  the  day  of  his  resur- 
rection." 

On  the  6th  of  April,  1759,  he  conducted  an  oratorio  of 
the  "Messiah"  at  Covent  Garden.  Late  on  Good-Friday 
night  in  the  same  year  he  quietly  passed  away,  and  so  in 
his  last  earthly  hour  fulfilling  his  dearest  wish,  and  leaving 
behind  a  record  of  unfailing  Christian  goodness,  an  untiring 
devotion  to  work,  and  music  which  will  live  as  long  as  the 
voices  and  hearts  and  hearing  of  any  people  exist. 

The  oratorio,  strictly  speaking,  is  a  sacred  poem  sung  by 
soloists  and  a  chorus,  and  with  a  full  orchestra  accompani- 
ment, but  without  any  stage  or  scenic  effect,  such  as  scenery, 
costume,  or  dramatic  action.  In  the  Middle  Ages  Scripture 
stories  were  most  popular  for  dramatic  representations,  and 
they  undoubtedly  were  the  basis  of  the  oratorio  as  we  have 


Emilio  del  Cavaliere.  91 

it  to-day.  In  the  fourteenth  century  the  choristers  of  St. 
Paul  regularly  performed  certain  miracle  plays,  as  they 
were  called,  in  which  were  fine  choruses  and  some  single 
part  songs,  but  between  that  century  and  the  sixteenth  very 
little  progress  seems  to  have  been  made  in  them.  In  the 
year  1600  both  the  oratorio  and  the  opera  were  presented 
in  Italy,  but  as  in  every  other  form  of  composition  a  great 
many  changes  were  made,  many  new  ideas  evolved  and. 
elaborated  before  Handel  in  the  "Messiah"  fairly  perfected 
the  scheme  of  composition.  An  Italian  composer  named 
Emilio  del  Cavaliere  was  the  first  composer  of  an  oratorio, 
but  the  musical  interest  of  the  day  in  Italy  inclined  so 
strongly  to  operatic  music  that  Cavaliere  did  not  follow  his 
first  attempt  with  anything  as  remarkable.  Handel,  how- 
ever, seizing  upon  such  suggestions  as  the  Italians  of  the 
centuries  preceding  had  offered,  and  building  largely  on 
the  old  forms  of  mediaeval  sacred  plays,  produced  his  ora- 
torios as  you  have  seen,  with  a  success  which  time  has  not 
diminished.  It  is  said  that  should  the  student  be  chiefly 
interested  in  the  study  of  the  historical  oratorio,  an  Italian 
composition  of  Handel's,  "  La  Resurrezione,"  will  afford  the 
best  example.  When  Handel  wrote  it  the  oratorio  had 
kept  up,  so  to  speak,  in  development  with  the  opera — by 
which  I  mean  that  they  were  treated  in  point  of  composi- 
tion, arias,  and  arrangement  of  melody  very  nearly  in  the 


92  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

same  way — but  when  they  received  the  German  spirit,  some- 
thing more  solemn  and  dignified  resulted.  Finally,  when 
that  tempestuous,  tumultuous,  inspired  fortnight  occurred 
in  Handel's  life,  in  the  year  1741,  during  which  time  he 
composed  the  "Messiah,"  we  may  consider  the  oratorio  as 
perfected.  Up  to  that  point  choral  writing  was  not  based 
on  any  especially  stated  rules.  Handel  was  free  to  do  with 
it  what  he  liked;  he  had  the  inspiring  words  of  the  Script- 
ure to  guide  him  in  the  composition  of  choruses  such  as 
never  had  been  listened  to  before.  The  orchestra  of  his 
day,  although  different  from  ours,  was  a  fine  one,  and  well 
suited  to  Handel's  purpose,  and  in  all  airs  which  belong  to 
what  is  known  as  the  Cantabile  kind  he  had  artistic  sense 
enough  to  do  away  as  much  as  possible  with  an  orchestral 
accompaniment,  for  which  reason  the  finest  singers  are  al- 
ways glad  of  an  opportunity  to  display  their  powers  and 
express  their  highest  musical  feelings  in  works  like  the 
"Judas"  or  the  "Messiah."  No  greater  evidence  of  the 
effect  of  personal  feeling  in  composition  can  be  given  than 
in  the  "  Messiah."  Handel's  whole  soul  was  in  the  work. 
When  he  was  writing  the  exquisitely  pathetic  and  beautiful 
movement  beginning,  "He  was  despised,"  the  composer 
was  thoroughly  overcome  and  burst  into  tears,  and  it  is 
related  that  he  spent  part  of  the  day  playing  and  reading 
such  portions  of  the  Testament  as  belong  to  the  Passion 


Grandeur  and  Simplicity  of  the  "Messiah"          93 

of  our  Lord.  When  composing  the  beautiful  introduction 
to  "  Comfort  ye  my  people,"  Handel  declared  that  the  con- 
stantly repeated  major  chords  which  follow  the  tender,  lin- 
gering, minor  cadences  in  the  overture,  spoke  to  him  directly 
words  of  comfort,  and  so  precisely  expressed  what  he  most 
desired  to  convey  —  an  impression  of  the  saving  power 
which  Christ's  message  of  consolation  was  to  possess.  Take 
the  score  of  the  "Messiah"  after  hearing  it  and  go  over 
certain  special  portions ;  trace  out  so  far  as  you  can  the  dif- 
ferent keys  employed,  the  various  striking  changes ;  see 
how  wonderfully  words  and  music  are  made  to  fit ;  try  to 
read  it  going  step  by  step  from  the  opening  movement  to 
the  last  grand  "Amen"  which,  when  Handel  had  written, 
it  is  said,  he  uttered  to  himself  upon  his  knees. 

Other  composers  of  whom  we  may  speak  later  composed 
famous  oratorios,  but  for  grandeur  and  simplicity  none  ever 
written  has  exceeded  Handel's  "  Messiah." 


94  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 


CHAPTER  VH. 

The  Story  of  the  Opera. — Count  Vernio  and  his  Friends. — A  Musical 
Centre  in  Florence. — The  First  Opera. — Instruments  used. — Allesan- 
dro  Scarlatti. — Stradella. — The  Size  of  the  Opera  in  England. — Henry 
Purcell  and  the  Westminster  Boys. — An  Old  Picture. — Gluck  and 
Marie  Antoinette. — Gluck's  Boyhood. — Fashion  and  Art. — Gluck  de- 
termined to  Reform  the  Spirit  of  the  Opera.— Classical  Music,  and 
how  to  Define  it. 

ONE  evening  towards  the  close  of  the  sixteenth  century, 
a  number  of  gentlemen  were  hurrying  up  the  staircase  and 
along  the  corridors  of  a  house  in  Florence.  They  were 
richly  dressed  according  to  the  custom  of  the  time,  but  they 
were  all  students,  all  deeply  absorbed  in  music,  and  they 
were  on  their  way  to  the  salon  of  one  Giovanni  Bardi, 
Conte  di  Vernio,  for  the  purpose  of  discussing  a  new  idea 
in  their  beloved  art.  Now,  if  we  followed  these  gentlemen, 
what  should  we  hear  and  see  ?  Something  very  interesting, 
yet,  from  our  point  of  view  to-day,  very  strange.  They 
were  determined  to  develop  opera,  yet  they  had  only  the 
vaguest  idea  how  it  should  be  done. 

The  opera  as  we  have  it  at  present  had  so  far  been  un- 
heard of,  and  the  only  suggestion  these  Italian  gentlemen 


Caccini.  95 

had  for  such  a  form  of  musical  composition  was  that  given 
them  by  the  Greek  lyrical  dramas  in  the  famous  theatre  of 
ancient  Athens,  where  plays  were  given  accompanied  by  an 
orchestra  of  lyres  and  flutes.  When  the  "Agamemnon" 
was  performed  every  word  of  the  dialogue  was  declaimed 
as  musically  as  possible,  and  the  choruses  were  sung  as  well 
as  was  possible  at  that  time.  In  early  English  times  music, 
or  recitative,  was  introduced  into  the  simplest  plays  usually 
performed  in  the  public  streets.  People  in  various  coun- 
tries had  been  gifted  with  some  perception  of  the  beauty  in 
combining  music  and  dialogue,  but,  as  I  have  said,  the  regu- 
lar opera  was  unknown  up  to  the  sixteenth  century. 

Our  Italian  gentlemen  discussed  their  new  ideas  over  and 
over  again  before  they  made  definite  efforts  to  put  them 
into  practice.  One  of  the  party  named  Caccini  wrote  a 
series  of  songs,  or  "  pieces,"  which  he  sang  at  Bardi's  house 
one  evening,  accompanying  himself  on  the  lute.  He  had  a 
beautiful  voice,  and  delighted  every  one,  so  that  his  sugges- 
tion of  attaching  to  these  songs  something  dramatic  in  the 
way  of  action  was  received  with  pleasure.  Little  by  little 
the  idea  of  a  musical  drama  gathered  strength,  and  one  of 
the  first  actual  performances  of  which  we  read  was  at  Man- 
tua in  1594-,  when  a  work  called  "  L' Amfi  parnasso  "  was 
given.  We  who  have  heard  the  opera  in  its  perfection 
would  be,  no  doubt,  greatly  amused  could  we  witness  "L'Amfi 


96  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

parnasso  "  given  precisely  as  it  was  in  Italy  towards  the  close 
of  that  splendid  and  warmly  colored  and  suggestive  century. 

There  was  no  overture  and  no  instrumental  accompani- 
ment of  any  kind;  five  singers  only  took  part  in  it.  When 
two  were  on  the  stage  the  remaining  three  stood  behind  the 
scenes  singing  a  kind  of  accompaniment.  Everybody  in 
Mantua  was  charmed  by  this  performance,  considered  en- 
tirely novel  and  very  graceful  in  character,  but  what  would 
dear  old  Master  Vecchio,  who  wrote  it,  have  said  had  lie 
looked  ahead  nearly  three  hundred  years  to  the  time  of  the 
great  Bayreuth  festival,  where  Wagner's  operas  were  pro- 
duced with  such  a  wealth  of  orchestration  and  so  many  glo- 
rious and  superbly  trained  voices? 

Conte  Vernio's  house  was  not  the  only  one  in  Florence 
where  the  new  musical  impulse  was  well  received  and  help- 
ed on.  A  nobleman  named  Corsi  received  the  musicians  of 
the  day,  offering  them  every  encouragement,  and  especially 
urging  on  the  work  of  one  Jacopo  Peri  and  Vincent  Galileo 
—father  of  the  great  astronomer — and  Caccini.  These  three 
young  men  were  burning  with  genius,  and  possessed  a  great 
amount  of  energy,  but  it  appears  that  no  one  of  the  three 
had 'much  knowledge  of  harmony  or  counterpoint.  Cac- 
cini, as  I  have  told  you,  wrote  a  series  of  very  dramatic 
songs,  or,  as  they  were  called,  canzonettes,  which  were  the 
basis  of  music  of  a  more  dramatic  character.  The  special 


Cor  si's  "Dafne."  97 

importance  of  this  music  to  the  student  of  to-day  lies  in  the 
fact  that  it  was  the  first  written  for  a  single  voice,  the  first 
composed  for  an  accompaniment  of  one  instrument,'and,  as 
may  be  imagined,  it  produced  a  marked  effect  upon  music, 
both  vocal  and  instrumental,  all  over  the  world.  Madrigals 
had  preceded  these  canzonettes,  and  no  doubt  contained 
much  more  that  was  more  pleasing  to  the  ear  than  many  of 
the  new  songs  offered  the  public  by  the  composers  of  the 
latter  part  of  the  sixteenth  and  the  beginning  of  the  seven- 
teenth century;  but  there  is  no  doubt  that  we  owe  to  the 
three  musicians  I  have  mentioned  the  first  definite  idea  for 
the  music  known  technically  as  Monodia,  which  is  a  term 
from  the  Greek,  single,  a  song,  "and  applied  by  modern 
critics  to  music  written  in  what  is  sometimes  called  the  ho- 
mophonic  style;  that  is  to  say,  music  in  which  the  melody 
is  confined  to  a  single  part  instead  of  being  equally  distrib- 
uted between  all  the  voices  employed,  as  in  the  polyphonic 
schools."* 

Peri,  at  the  suggestion  of  Signer  Corsi,  wrote  a  work  in 
the  operatic  style  called  "  Dafne,"  "in  order,"  as  he  says 
himself,  "  to  test  the  effect  of  the  particular  kind  of  melody 
which  they  imagined  to  be  identical  with  that  used  by  the 
ancient  Greeks  and  Romans  throughout  their  dramas,  and" 

*  Grove's  Musical  Dictionarjr,  page  354. 


98  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

although  we  are  told  that  "  it  charmed  the  whole  city  "  of 
Florence,  where  it  was  performed,  it  was  not  sufficiently 
characteristic  to  create  a  school  of  similar  composition.  I 
think  it  safe  to  say  that  the  first  true  Italian  opera,  on 
which  all  of  ours  have  been  founded,  was  Peri's  next  work, 
"Eurydice,"  which  he  composed  in  honor  of  the  marriage 
of  King  Henry  IY.  of  France  with  Maria  of  Medici.  The 
performance  of  this  opera — the  first  ever  given  in  public — 
took  place  in  the  year  1600,  and  raised  the  whole  of  Italy 
to  enthusiasm.  The  libretto  was  written  by  Kinaccini,  and 
the  noblemen  of  Florence  contended  for  the  honor  of  per- 
forming in  it.  Behind  the  scenes  Corsi,  the  liberal  patron 
of  the  Florentine  art,  presided  at  the  harpsichord,  while 
three  noted  men  of  Florence  performed  on  the  chitarone,  a 
very  long,  deeply-necked  lute,  with  wire  strings  and  two  sets 
of  tuning-pegs  (an  old  chitarone  is  preserved  in  the  South 
Kensington  Museum),  a  viol,  and  a  large  lute.  Three  flutes 
were  added  to  this  little  orchestra.  In  the  library  of  the 
British  Museum  is  a  copy  of  the  score  of  this  opera,  which, 
when  I  read  it,  seemed  to  me  to  possess  much  delicacy  and 
spirit,  and  I  believe  that  good  critics  consider  it  a  work  of 
decided  art  in  spite  of  Peri's  ignorance  of  many  of  the 
rules  of  counterpoint. 

From  this  hour  the  opera  was  recognized  as  a  form  of  art 
in  musical  composition,  and  as  the  .interest  in  music,  espe- 


THE   BOY   I.UI.I.I. 


Alessandro  Scarlatti.  99 

cially  where  a  dramatic  spirit  could  be  added,  was  beginning 
to  be  felt  all  over  Europe,  it  progressed  and  developed  rap- 
idly, as  you  may  imagine. 

It  would  be  impossible  in  this  space  to  tell  you  the  story 
of  the  opera  in  detail — how  it  advanced  steadily,  in  France 
reaching  a  great  height,  where  a  composer  named  Lulli,  in 
1650,  established  it  among  the  French  people.  Lulli  had 
been  brought  from  Florence  as  a  page  in  the  court  of  Louia 
XIV.  He  served  the  king's  niece,  Mademoiselle  de  Mont- 
pensier,  and  no  doubt  he  had  listened  from  boyhood  to  all 
the  finest  music  of  the  day  in  her  boudoir. 

Among  Italian  composers  of  this  early  period  the  man 
who  seems  to  me  most  interesting  was  Alessandro  Scar- 
latti. He  made  striking  improvements  in  the  form  of  the 
opera,  varied  its  monotony  in  many  original  ways,  and, 
best  of  all,  insisted  upon  its  being  written  from  a  scientific 
point  of  view.  Peri  and  his  followers  had  not  cared  par- 
ticularly for  writing  according  to  the  strict  rules  of  harmo- 
ny. They  seemed  to  have  despised  the  art  of  counterpoint, 
and  therefore  it  is  that  their  work  could  never  live,  or  do 
more  than  please  the  uneducated  ear.  Our  debt  of  grati- 
tude to  them  is  for  their  discovery,  as  it  were,  of  what  could 
be  done  with  music  and  dialogue,  and  their  zeal  in  carrying 
out  an  entirely  novel  method,  but  to  Scarlatti  we  owe  the 
bringing  of  science  to  bear  upon  this  first  brilliant  suggestion. 


ioo  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

Stradella,  a  famous  contemporary  of  Scarlatti,  wrote  in 
the  operatic  style,  and  at  the  same  time  contributed  largely 
to  church  music  in  his  day,  giving  to  it  a  peculiar  character, 
a  certain  breadth  and  melodious  form,  different  from  the 
more  solemn  strains  of  church  composers  who  had  preceded 
him.  Stradella's  life  was  a  very  sad  one,  ending  tragically. 
He  was  a  gentleman  of  great  refinement,  but  not  of  high 
rank,  so  that  when  he  became  engaged  to  one  of  his  pupils 
whose  rank  was  far  above  his  own  it  created  a  greal  deal  of 
excitement  in  Florence  and  Venice.  Stradella  and  his  fair 
pupil  were  married,  and  would  have  lived  very  happily  but 
for  the  fact  that  assassins  constantly  pursued  him.  Once 
three  of  these  men  tried  to  kill  him.  They  followed  him  to 
the  church  of  St.  John  in  Home,  where  he  was  to  sing,  but 
there,  while  listening  to  his  heavenly  voice,  their  purpose 
changed ;  his  music  dissipated  all  their  blood-thirsty  feel- 
ings, and  they  made  their  escape,  afraid  to  confront  their 
employers  with  stainless  hands.  Stradella,  however,  was 
not  destined  to  escape  the  vengeance  of  his  wife's  friends. 
In  Genoa  both  husband  and  wife  were  secretly  stabbed  to 
death,  no  trace  of  the  assassins  being  found. 

Of  the  rise  and  progress  of  the  opera  in  England  much 
could  be  said,  but  I  must  group  only  a  few  facts  about  some 
one  centre. 

The  English  seem  from  very  early  times  to  have  de- 


IN  THE  CHOIR-SCHOOL   AT   WESTMINSTER  ABBEY. 


Henry  Pur  cell.  103 

lighted  in  combining  music  with  a  certain  sort  of  dialogue. 
It  was  the  custom,  as  I  have  said,  to  give  performances  in 
the  public  streets,  the  singers  standing  in  large  carts,  around 
which  crowds  of  people  collected.  With  all  their  grotesque- 
ness  and  absurdity  there  was  a  dignity  about  them  which 
impressed  their  rude  audiences. 

In  1658  was  born  in  London  a  boy  named  Henry  Purcell. 
Music  seemed  to  grow  with  him.  When  he  was  very  young 
he  was  put  into  the  choir  school  at  Westminster  Abbey, 
and  it  was  only  the  other  day  I  was  standing  in  the  old 
school -room  where  the  boy  Purcell  sat,  and  looking  at  a 
quaint  old  picture  of  him  which  hangs  upon  the  wall. 

The  Westminster  boys  were  taught  music  very  fairly  by 
old  Cook  and  Humphries.  It  must  have  been  a  cheerful 
life.  To-day  the  school  has  been  enlarged  and  beautified, 
but  even  then  it  surely  possessed  the  charm  of  peace,  and 
yet  great  harmonies,  for  it  stands  almost  in  the  shelter  of 
the  abbey,  and  all  day  long  the  boys  had  the  dear  old  clois- 
ter to  run  about  in,  and  twice  a  day  they  listened  to  glori- 
ous music  on  the  organ.  Purcell  grew  full  of  musical  fire, 
and  when  he  was  eighteen  he  was  appointed  organist  of  the 
great  abbey.  He  wrote  constantly,  catches,  glees,  songs, 
and  hymns,  which  to  this  day  are  listened  to  and  sung  with 
delight. 

It  was  when  Purcell  was  about  nineteen  that  he  one  daj> 

7 


IO4  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

received  an  invitation  from  a  school-master  to  call,  on  mu- 
sical business,  at  his  house  in  Chelsea.  Thither  he  went. 
He  found  a  young  ladies'  school,  and  an  energetic  master 
who  wished  his  pupils  to  perform  something  operatic.  So 
Pnrcell  wrote  the  music,  and  Tate  the  words,  of  "Dido  and 
^Encas,"  a  little  operetta  in  which  he  himself  performed, 
and  which  was  so  successful  that  henceforth  he  wrote  chief- 
ly for  the  stage. 

But  all  the  time  everybody  in'  London  was  singing  or 
playing  his  glees  and  madrigals.  Jn  Westminster  was  a 
famous  old  tavern  known  as  Purcell's  Head,  and  clubs  used 
to  meet  there  to  sing  his  music.  Meanwhile  we  can  fancy 
Milton  as  a  youth  playing  his  most  solemn  music  in  that 
quaint  room  of  his,  with  its  faded  hangings  and  grand 
organ,  and  at  the  theatre  elaborate  performances  of  "  The 
Tempest,"  "  The  Indian  Queen,"  and  other  plays,  to  which 
was  added  "Mr.  Purcell's  musicke." 

Those  were  rollicking  and  riotous  times.  Purcell's  sweet 
music  seems  to  come  in  with  some  feeling  of  soothing 
sounds,  but  had  the  times  been  better  he  would  have  done 
more,  I  am  sure,  in  his  noblest  direction.  Everything  at 
court  and  around  it  was  careless  and  reckless.  Dryden,  the 
poet,  who  wrote  many  of  the  plays  for  which  Purcell  fur- 
nished the  music,  bitterly  regretted  when  he  was  older  that 
he  had  wasted  so  much  time  amusing  an  ungodly  people. 


Gluck  and  Marie  Antoinette.  105 

Purcell  seems  only  to  have  thought  of  his  music,  and  cer- 
tainly at  this  date,  two  hundred  years  after  his  death,  his 
sweetness  and  charm  are  as  strongly  felt.  In  1695  he  died, 
and  his  tomb  is  in  the  abbey  where  his  childish  feet  so 
often  passed  and  repassed,  and  beneath  the  organ  where  he 
so  often  played  in  his  most  innocent  and  most  happy  years. 
When  I  was  a  child  I  used  to  be  very  fond  of  a  faded  lit- 
tle picture  which  I  often  saw  in  an  old  lady's  house.  It 
hung  on  a  staircase,  and  going  up  and  down  I  liked  to 
stop  and  look  at  it,  and  make  up  stories  about  the  two  peo- 
ple in  it.  The  picture  represented  a  fine  room,  evidently 
in  a  palace.  A  splendidly  dressed  young  lady,  with  a  tre- 
mendous coiffure  and  a  brocaded  gown,  was  seated  before  a 
spinet  or  old-fashioned  piano.  Just  Jbehind  her  was  a  gen- 
tleman, also  dressed  in  the  fashion  of  1770.  He  seemed  to 
be  teaching  her  to  play.  The  young  lady,  I  thought,  was 
charmingly  pretty.  The  gentleman  had  a  strong,  rather 
stern  face,  high  cheek  bones,  and  a  large  forehead,  but  the 
look  of  his  eyes  was  not  unkindly.  Underneath  the  picture 
was  printed  in  script,  with  a  great  many  flourishes, 

"  Gluck  and  Marie  Antoinette" 

The  little  picture  was  of  no  special  merit  as  a  work  of 
art,  yet  it  possessed  such  an  extraordinary  fascination  for 
my  childish  eyes  that  the  other  day,  when  at  a  concert  I 


IO6  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

listened  to  some  of  Gluck's  sweetest  music,  the  strains 
seemed  to  bring  it  back  in  a  flash  to  my  mind's  eye.  In 
imagination  I  again  saw  clearly  the  little  ebony  frame  and 
faded  tints,  the  pretty,  smiling  young  dauphiness,  and  the 
grave  though  kind-hearted  master. 

That  scene  was  but  one  from  the  life  of  Gluck,  who  was 
famous  in  the  last  century  for  his  operas,  his  social  popu- 
larity, his  grand  pupils,  and  last,  but  what  is  best  of  all,  his 
being  the  founder  of  opera  in  its  most  classical  form. 

On  July  2,  1714,  Christoph  Willibald  Bitter  von  Gluck 
was  born  at  Weidenwang.  His  father  was  in  the  service  of 
a  prince,  and  Christoph  had  all  the  musical  advantages  of 
the  period,  specially  those  of  the  Jesuit  College  at  Korri- 
motau,  where  he  learned  to  sing,  to  play  the  harpsichord 
and  the  organ  and  the  violin.  He  early  tried  his  hand  at 
composition ;  his  ideas  were  mainly  dramatic,  but  the  opera 
of  that  day  was  not  satisfactory,  and  you  must  bear  in  mind, 
when  criticising  Gluck's  early  work,  that  orchestral  music, 
except  in  a  very  few  places,  was  not  understood,  and  at 
least  the  arrangement  of  the  orchestra  as  we  have  it  now 
was  not  known,  and  as  a  rule  conductors  of  the  theatre  or 
concert  band  played  on  the  harpsichord,  keeping  time  not 
too  well,  for  a  few  instruments  which  were  imperfectly  put 
together  and  with  but  little  idea  of  harmony.  Chamber 
music  consisted  chiefly  of  trios,  the  quartette  not  then  be- 


PAPA  HAYDN. 


Handel's  Advice  to  Gluck.  109 

ing  in  use,  and  anything  distinctly  like  a  classical  composi- 
tion in  the  operatic  or  dramatic  style  had  not  been  offered 
to  the  public.  Italian  music  had  spread  its  influence  over 
the  northern  countries  of  Europe,  but  before  Gluck's  day 
Bach  and  Handel  had  created  something  that  was  more  de- 
cidedly German,  both  in  sacred  and  secular  music,  and  Gluck 
himself  had  strongly  German  instincts  although  he  studied 
in  Milan,  and  before  he  was  of  age  had  written  and  pro- 
duced eight  operas  in  the  Italian  style. 

These  were  not  a  great  advance  on  those  of  other  writers, 
but  Gluck  felt  quite  sure  that  something  much  better  could 
be  done,  and  when  in  1736  he  went  to  England,  he  visited 
Handel,  who  was  then  prosperous  and  busy  in  the  court  of 
George.  II. 

Gluck  was  only  twenty-two,  an  eager,  restless  young  man, 
with  his  head  full  of  ideas,  and  a  pocket  full  of  manuscripts. 
To  old  Handel  he  showed  his  music  and  begged  for  criti- 
cism, but  Handel  would  only  admit  that  it  "promised  well." 
But  he  gave  Gluck  a  most  valuable  suggestion  when  he  de- 
clared that  the  young  composer  of  the  operas  should  turn 
his  attention  to  counterpoint,  to  something  which  would 
result  in  a  more  masterly  style.  Off  went  Gluck  to  Paris, 
and  there-  meeting  with  much  encouragement  from  the 
poets  and  writers  of  the  day,  as  well  as  the  royal  family, 
set  to  work  on  a  new  basis. 


HO  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

The  opera,  as  it  was  then  written,  consisted  simply  of  a 
series  of  songs  in  which  the  story  of  the  opera  was  related ; 
there  were  some  imperfectly  rendered  recitations,  an  or- 
chestral accompaniment  was  unskilfully  devised,  and,  as  a 
rule,  worse  performed,  but  the  airs  were  frequently  very 
popular,  and  the  whole  thing  was  kept  going  because  it 
pleased  the  public  taste.  The  instinct  of  genius,  however, 
could  not  be  satisfied  by  any  work  planned  and  produced 
on  so  irregular  and  incorrect  a  model,  and  Gluck  decided 
that  he  could  and  would  reform  operatic  composition.  In 
France  he  obtained  suggestions  of  a  fine  style  of  dramatic 
recitative ;  in  Italy  his  natural  taste  for  melody  had  been 
cultivated,  and  his  experience  in  England  and  in  Germany 
taught  him  the  use  of  a  carefully  arranged  orchestra. 

In  one  of  his  letters,  translated  by  Lady  Wallace,  he 
writes :  "  My  purpose  was  to  restrict  music  to  its  true  office, 
that  of  ministering  to  the  expression  of  poetry  without  in- 
terrupting the  action." 

Fashion  governed  art  and  music  very  curiously  in  those 
days.  It  was  in  1746  that  there  was  a  rage  in  England  for 
what  was  called  the  "glasses."  This  was  in  reality  a  har- 
monica— an  instrument  made  of  glasses,  and  which,  by  ap- 
plying a  finger  moistened  with  water,  produced  what  were 
considered  agreeable  concords.  It  is  odd  to  think  of  the 
great  composer  Gluck  making  his  bow  before  the  public 


' ' //  Parnasso. "  in 

at  the  Haymarket  Theatre,  as  a  performer  oil  the  musi- 
cal glasses.  In  one  of  Horace  Walpole's  famous  letters,  he 
writes  of  this  event  as  stirring  the  fashionable  world.  The 
instrument  later  became  very  popular,  and  Mozart  and  Bee- 
thoven did  not  disdain  to  write  music  for  it. 

Gluck's  work  went  on  very  steadily,  in  spite  of  the  con- 
troversies of  his  friends  and  enemies  and  his  personal  an- 
noyances. Final  success  came  with  his  grand  opera  found- 
ed on  the  mythological  story  of  Orpheus  and  Eurydice. 

I  have  told  you  that  Gluck  reformed  the  style  of  the 
opera.  He  modelled  his  work  upon  the  old  Greek  ideas 
of  dramatic  art.  He  felt  that  so  far  the  opera  had  been 
more  like  a  concert — a  mere  collection  of  melodies  and  bal- 
lads; he  bent  all  his  energies  to  making  a  lyric  drama  of 
operas,  and  he  succeeded. 

In  Yienna  much  of  his  time  and  his  work  had  to  be 
given  to  the  princes  and  princesses,  who  were  his  patrons. 
On  one  occasion  the  royal  family  performed  his  opera  of 
"II  Parnasso."  About  this  time  he  taught  the  archduchess 
Marie  Antoinette,  and  later  she  wrote  from  Paris  to  her  sis- 
ter, speaking  of  him  as  "notre  cher  Gluck"  (our  dear  Gluck). 

It  was  Gluck  who  first  introduced  cymbals  and  the  big 
drum  into  the  orchestra.  He  fought  hard  over  this  inno- 
vation. His  enemies  got  out  satirical  pamphlets,  in  which 
his  "big  noises"  were  ridiculed,  but  Gluck  went  his  own 


112  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

way,  determined  to  carry  his  point  and  prove  himself  right. 
Gluck's  last  opera  was  "  Echo  et  Narcisse."  This  was  pro- 
duced in  1779,  and  soon  after  he  retired  to  Vienna,  where 
he  passed  his  last  years  among  the  kindest  friends.  In 
1787  he  died  suddenly. 

The  great  object  of  Gluck's  life  was  attained.  He  made 
himself  felt  in  every  branch  of  operatic  performance ;  he 
improved  the  method,  arrangement,  and  especially  its  dram- 
atic power;  he  made  it  a  drama,  and  its  music  classical. 

This  word  classical,  as  applied  to  music,  I  am  sure  many 
of  our  young  people  do  not  fully  understand.  To  define  it 
completely  would  be  difficult,  but  I  will  try  and  give  you 
some  idea  of  what  it  means. 

To  be  strictly  classical  a  musical  composition  must  be 
written  according  to  the  standard  rules  of  the  art,  and  with 
a  subject  or  theme  worthy  of  the  setting.  It  may  be  very 
simple,  it  may  have  but  slight  elaboration,  yet  it  must  con- 
tain the  elements  of  true  musical  inspiration  and  of  musical 
art  before  it  is  classical.  To  form  any  correct  judgment  as 
to  what  is  classically  good,  you  must  have  some  knowledge 
of  the  laws  of  music,  so  that  you  see  how  useful  is  the 
study  of  a  certain  amount  of  harmony  to  those  who  never 
aspire  to  fine  performance.  You  may  ask  who  is  to  judge 
for  us  whether  the  subject  of  a  musical  work  is  worthy  ? 
This  has  to  be  decided  by  the  good  taste  of  the  person 


Music  a  Useful  Study.  1 1 3 

who  is  criticising,  and  at  the  same  time  we  can  follow 
the  opinion  of  the  majority  of  those  critics  whom  the 
world  allows  are  best  fitted  to  form  such  judgments  for  us. 
Our  likes  and  dislikes,  of  course,  need  not  be  governed  by 
this,  nor  need  music  be  heavy  or  labored  to  be  considered 
"  classical,"  as  so  many  young  people  suppose.  The  airiest 
of  Bach's  gavottes,  the  most  emotional  of  Beethoven's  an- 
dantes, the  most  brilliant  of  Mendelssohn's  overtures — all 
of  these  are  as  purely  classical  as  the  most  ponderous  and 
sublime  of  symphonies  or  sonatas.  It  is  doing  a  good 
theme  perfect  justice  which  makes  a  work  classical,  and  a 
poor  subject,  incorrectly  treated,  is  not  to  be  called  music, 
no  matter  how  much  "dash"  or  "go"  or  so-called  pretti- 
ness  it  may  have  about  it;  and  the  young  student  of  music 
ought  to  be  as  careful  in  regard  to  the  choice  of  his  or  her 
studies  as  in  speaking  of  a  language.  To  be  classical  is 
simply  to  be  grammatical.  "Would  you  wish  to  recite  a 
piece  of  poetry  in  a  foreign  tongue,  without  any  regard  to 
rhythm,  rhyme,  or  reason,  simply  because  the  mere  words 
in  French  or  German  were  spoken  ?  Would  not  such 
a  performance  seem  positively  ludicrous?  When  you  can 
bring  to  your  musical  study  the  same  sensitiveness  and  ap- 
preciation with  which  you  regard  the  study  of  a  language, 
you  will  find  that  you  care  only  for  what  is  the  best,  or,  in 
other  words,  the  classical. 


H4  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

"Papa  Haydn." — What  came  of  a  Frolic. — The  Wig-maker's  House 
hold. — The  Wandering  Minstrels. — "Whose  Music  is  that?" — Sym- 
phonies.— What  they  are. — Haydn's  Last  Hours. 

ONE  day,  nearly  one  hundred  and  fifty  years  ago,  two 
elderly  gentlemen  were  dining  together  in  an  old  house  in 
Hamburg,  Germany ;  they  were  music-masters  of  note  in 
those  days.  Herr  Franck  was  the  host ;  the  guest  was 
Herr  Reuter,  capellmeister  at  Vienna.  Their  conversation 
naturally  enough  was  upon  music,  the  new  and  the  old 
musicians,  singers  and  conductors.  Suddenly  Herr  Franck 
declared  that  he  had  in  his  house  a  prodigy,  a  boy  of  nine 
years  of  age,  whom  he  had  brought  up  from  the  country. 
He  had  discovered  him  in  his  father's  house,  singing  and 
keeping  perfect  time  with  two  pieces  of  stick,  while  his 
father,  a  coach-maker,  and  his  mother  accompanied  him, 
the  one  with  the  harp,  the  other  with  a  vigorous  but  not 
untuneful  voice.  The  Hamburg  musician,  detecting  the 
possibilities  of  something  very  fine  in  the  child's  voice,  as 
lie  sat  there  singing  in  the  little  cottage  kitchen,  brought 
him  to  Hamburg,  where,  with  a  fair  share  of  blows  and 


YOUNG   HAYDN   SINGING   BEFORE   THE   TWO   GREAT   MUSICIANS 


Herr  Frances  Prodigy.  117 

scoldings,  he  was  teaching  him  the  divine  art  of  mnsic. 
Herr  Keuter  was  delighted  by  his  host's  account  of  the 
little  genius.  The  boy  was  summoned  from  the  kitchen 
where  he  was  dining  with  the  cook,  and  no  doubt  enjoying 
his  Sunday  pudding  with  great  relish,  for  he  worked  hard 
and  did  not  fare  too  well. 

I  like  to  think  of  that  picture — of  the  old  wainscoted 
dining-room,  the  grave  musicians  looking  up  from  their 
dinner  as  the  door  opens  on  a  small,  dark-haired,  brown- 
skinned  boy,  a  dainty,  delicately  modelled  child,  who  enters 
shyly  and  stands  at  a  distance  from  the  table,  his  hands  be- 
hind him  and  the  head  bent  down,  until  his  teacher,  Herr 
Franck,  bids  him  sing.  Then  the  boy's  voice  breaks  all 
the  bonds  of  restraint ;  back  goes  his  little  head  and  he 
sings.  It  is  an  irrepressible  burst  of  melody ;  up  springs 
Keuter,  the  old  master,  exclaiming, "  He  shall  come  to  my 
choir ;  he  is  just  what  I  want." 

This  was  a  wonderful  step  onward  for  the  child.  But 
Keuter  little  knew  the  future  of  the  boy  whom  he  took 
that  day,  and  never  dreamed  that  his  name,  Francis  Joseph 
Haydn,  would  be  famous  two  centuries  later  in  every  civ- 
ilized country  of  the  world,  and  best  known  as  that  of  the 
founder  of  the  modern  symphony. 

Reuter  carried  young  Haydn  off  to  Vienna,  where  he 
was  placed  in  the  cathedral  choir,  and  where  his  sweet 


n8  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

young  voice,  a  marvellous  soprano,  filled  all  the  town  with 
delight.  His  parents  gave  him  freely  in  charge  to  old 
Renter.  But  the  master  was  selfish  and  exacting.  The  boy 
longed  to  compose,  but  Reuter  refused  to  allow  him  to  take 
lessons  in  composition,  and  made  him  give  his  whole  time 
to  choir  practice.  Haydn  had  very  little  money,  but  he 
hoarded  every  penny  for  a  long  time,  and  when  he  was 
thirteen  years  old  he  purchased  two  treatises  on  music,  and 
having  studied  them  diligently,  actually  composed  a  mass. 

I  do  not  suppose  it  was  very  fine  music,  but  at  all  events 
it  showed  a  great  desire  for  work,  and  it  was  too  bad  that 
Reuter  should  have  roared  with  laughter  over  it,  and  given 
the  eager  boy  no  encouragement.  It  seems  as  though  from 
that  time  the  old  master  was  determined  to  thwart  and  an- 
noy his  pupil.  The  lad  found  choir- work  a  slavery,  but  did 
not  know  how  to  free  himself.  A  piece  of  idle  mischief 
led  to  his  escape.  One  day  in  a  frolic  he  cut  off  the  tail  of 
the  wig  of  a  singer  in  the  choir.  Reuter  flew  into  a  rage, 
turning  Haydn  out  then  and  there,  actually  expelling  him 
from  choir,  board,  and  lodging.  It  was  a  cruel  winter's 
night.  The  lad  wandered  about  the  streets  of  Vienna,  un- 
til he  remembered  the  one  person  who  had  ever  encour- 
aged him.  This  was  a  barber  named  Keller,  and  to  his 
humble  abode  Haydn  directed  his  steps.  Keller  gave  him 
a  cordial  welcome,  though  he  had  but  little  to  offer:  a  loft 


Haydn  s  Early  Life.  1 19 

— in  which,  however,  stood  an  old  harpsichord — and  a  seat 
at  his  simple  table.  In  the  wig-  maker's  family  Haydn 
went  joyfully  to  work.  He  had  some  sonatas  of  Bach's, 
he  picked  up  odd  bits  of  music  here  and  there,  mastered 
the  science  of  those  who  had  gone  before  him,  and  though 
often  cold  and  hungry,  was  never  cheerless.  Now  and  then 
he  went  into  the  shop,  where  Keller  and  his  daughter  Anne 
were  at  work  on  wigs,  and  where  Haydn's  assistance  was 
quite  acceptable.  Anne  Keller  was  a  plain,  dull  girl,  who 
knew  nothing  of  the  great  art  of  her  father's  lodger,  yet 
Haydn  was  grateful  for  her  rough  sort  of  kindness  to  him. 
He  became  engaged  to  her,  and  later,  when  he  was  more 
prosperous,  married  her. 

It  was  not  long  before  the  young  musician  had  made  a 
circle  of  friends.  He  played  on  the  violin  and  the  organ, 
sometimes  in  the  churches  and  occasionally  in  the  salons  of 
some  great  ladies,  but  his  chief  enjoyment  was  a  little  club 
of  wandering  minstrels.  They  were  a  band  of  enthusiastic 
youths  who  wandered  about  Vienna  on  moonlight  nights  to 
serenade  famous  "musicians. 

One  night  they  directed  their  steps  to  the  house  of  Herr 
Curtz,  the  leader  of  the  Opera.  Under  his  windows  they 
began  one  of  Haydn's  compositions,  the  young  musician's 
violin  slowly  filling  the  moonlit  garden  with  melody.  No 
demonstration  from  old  Curtz  was  expected,  but  suddenly 


1 20  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

a  window  was  flung  open,  out  came  Curtz's  bead,  and  his 
voice  screamed  to  know  who  was  playing. 

Back  came  the  answer,  "  Joseph  Haydn." 

"  Whose  music  is  it  ?" 

"  Mine." 

Down  came  Curtz,  collared  the  astonished  young  man, 
and  brought  him  up-stairs  to  a  big,  candle-lit  room,  where 
stood  a  fine  piano  littered  with  music.  There,  when  the 
two  had  regained  their  breath,  Curtz  explained  that  he 
wanted  Haydn  to  compose  some  music  for  a  new  libretto 
he  had  written.  Now  this  was  certainly  an  important  mo- 
ment. Haydn  sat  down  to  the  piano,  banged  away,  tried 
various  ideas,  and  at  last  hit  upon  the  right  thing.  Before 
daylight  he  had  arranged  with  Curtz  for  the  music,  for 
which  he  was  promised  one  hundred  and  thirty  florins. 

It  was  his  first  real  success,  and  from  that  moment  pros- 
perity attended  him.  He  wrote  his  first  symphony  when  he 
was  twenty-eight,  in  the  year  1759.  Soon  after  he  received 
an  appointment  in  the  household  of  Prince  Esterhazy,  where 
his  duty  was  a  curious  one.  He  was  obliged  to  have  a  piece 
of  music  ready  to  lay  on  his  patron's  breakfast-table  every 
morning.  This  may  seem  drudgery,  but  in  reality  these 
years  were  among  the  happiest  of  Haydn's  life,  marred  only 
by  his  marriage  with  the  barber's  daughter,  Anne  Keller, 
whose  wretched  temper  at  last  forced  him  to  separate  from 


•  .."  •     "Papa  Haydn"  121 

her.  He  cared  for  her  tenderly,  however,  and  she  was  well 
content  with  her  lot  in  life. 

Around  Haydn,  in  England,  France,  and  Germany,  a  band 
of  young  musicians  gathered,  eager  to  watch  his  develop- 
ments in  music.  Among  them  Mozart,  then  a  very  youth- 
ful composer,  was  not  only  the  greatest  genius  but  the  most 
interesting  figure.  He  it  was  who  gave  to  the  master  that 
endearing  title  of  "Papa  Haydn,"  whereby  he  was  and  even 
now  is  tenderly  and  familiarly  known.  Between  the  two 
men  existed  the  most  touching  friendship,  broken  only  by 
Mozart's  early  death. 

I  have  told  you  that  Haydn  was  the  founder  of  the  sym- 
phony as  we  know  it  to-day.  Strictly  speaking,  the  sym- 
phony is  a  long  and  elaborate  composition  for  a  full  orches- 
tra ;  arranged  for  a  piano  it  suggested  wind  and  stringed  in- 
struments, and  if  properly  played  gives  a  fine  idea  of  all  the 
orchestral  effects  produced.  Any  number  of  instruments 
may  be  employed  in  its  execution,  and  voices  are  occasion- 
ally added.  The  movements  of  the  symphony  are  four: 
the  allegro,  the  andante  or  adagio,  the  minuet  or  scherzo, 
and  the  allegro  or  presto.  Two  themes  or  subjects,  or  we 
might  say  ideas,  are  employed  in  the  first  movement,  and 
these  are  given  in  two  different  keys,  the  theme  working 
back  and  forth,  up  and  down,  returning  to  the  original  key 
with  grace  or  strength  or  brilliancy,  or  it  may  be  a  pathos 


122  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

which  belongs  to  certain  progressions  from  the  minor  to 
the  major  and  vice  versa.  Once  the  symphony  was  start- 
ed, it,  as  you  may  readily  imagine,  suggested  innumerable 
improvements  in  the  orchestra  of  the  day;  consequently 
Haydn's  work  was  not  alone  that  of  composition,  but  of 
development  for  musicians  in  different  ranks,  and  when 
finally  produced,  his  work  created  by  its  demands  a  supply 
of  good  material  in  the  orchestra  which  was  speedily  forth- 
coming. 

Not  alone  upon  the  symphony  did  Haydn  work.  His 
oratorio,  "  The  Creation,"  was  composed  in  1799,  and  his 
quartettes  and  concertos  are  of  a  superior  order. 

With  a  performance  of  "  The  Creation  "  in  1809  is  asso- 
ciated one  of  the  last  scenes  of  Haydn's  life. 

The  public  of  Vienna  wished  to  pay  their  honored  musi- 
cian a  tribute,  and  so  the  oratorio  was  given  with  every 
possible  brilliancy  of  effect  and  performance.  Haydn  was 
an  old  man,  and  very  feeble,  and  he  was  obliged  to  be  car- 
ried into  the  theatre;  but  there  he  sat  near  his  dear  friend 
Princess  Esterhazy,  while  all  eyes  turned  lovingly  and  rev- 
erently towards  him. 

When  the  music  reached  that  part  in  which  the  words 
"  Let  there  be  light"  occur,  Haydn  rose,  and  pointing  heav- 
enward said,  aloud,  "It  comes  from  thence;"  and  indeed  all 
knew  that  the  master's  work  was  always  a  subject  of  prayer 


Death  of  Haydn.  123 

and  humble  supplication  that  he  might  be  able  to  do  the 
best  for  the  good  of  all. 

After  that  evening  Haydn  never  left  his  house.  He  grew 
feebler  daily,  but  suffered  little  pain.  One  day,  when  he 
was  thought  to  be  past  consciousness,  he  suddenly  rose  from 
his  couch,  and  by  a  superhuman  effort  reached  the  piano. 

There,  in  a  voice  which  yet  held  the  cadences  of  the  boy 
chorister  of  long  ago,  he  sang  the  national  hymn,  and  so, 
his  hands  dropping  on  the  keys,  he  was  carried  gently  to 
his  bed  and  to  his  peaceful  death.  This  was  in  May,  1809 : 
Francis  Joseph  Haydn,  born  in  1732,  died  in  his  seventy- 
eighth  year. 


124  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

The  Story  of  the  Sonata. — Suites  and  Madrigals.— Corelli's  "Work. — Anec- 
dote of  Handel  in  Rome. — "C  Major." — The  Movements  of  the  So- 
nata Explained  and  Defined.— Old  Dances  and  Dance  Tunes. — What 
the  Minstrels  and  Soldiers  of  the  Sixteenth  Century  Introduced.— Min- 
uets.— Scherzos. 

THE  history  of  the  sonata  is  one  which  I  am  sure  all 
young  students  who  enjoy  their  work  could  read  in  detail 
with  both  profit  and  much  entertainment,  for  it  belongs  to 
a  most  picturesque  and  interesting  period  in  musical  art. 
At  the  end  of  the  sixteenth  century  a  great  desire  arose 
among  musical  enthusiasts  to  create  some  form  of  music 
which  would  express  feelings  of  various  kinds.  Up  to  that 
time  the  grandest  form  of  composition  had  been  used  only 
in  church-music,  and  while  these  earnest  individuals  had  no 
desire  to  detract  from  the  power  and  beauty  of  such  music, 
they  considered  rightly  enough  that  a  refining  influence  in 
society  would  be  music  which  appealed  more  to  their  hu- 
man sentiments  than  those  inspired  only  by  the  solemnity 
of  religious  ceremonial.  The  opera  and  the  cantata  had 
been  received,  and  although  by  no  means  perfect  were  suc- 
cessful ;  but  an  elaborate  form  of  composition  such  as  be- 


The  Sonata.  125 

came  known  later  under  the  name  of  sonata,  was  not  known 
until  the  end  of  the  sixteenth  century.  Even  then  such 
pieces  were  much  more  simple  than  the  sonata  as  we  see 
it  one  hundred  and  fifty  years  later ;  the  sonata,  indeed, 
which  Beethoven  finally  perfected  and  handed  down  to  us. 
Originally,  about  1620,  the  sonata  consisted  of  but  one 
movement,  and  seems  to  have  come  from  the  madrigals  of 
that  period.  What  were  called  suites  often  formed  a  sug- 
gestion for  those  early  sonatas,  for  which  reason  we  find 
that  the  names  applied  to  different  parts  of  such  a  work 
closely  resemble  those  used  for  the  dance  tunes  of  the 
sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries.  When  written  for 
church-music,  as  it  was  in  that  day,  the  sonata  consisted  of 
slow,  solemn  movements,  but  the  sonata  as  we  have  it  to- 
day must  consist  of  four  movements.  The  drama  also  sug- 
gested some  of  the  musical  ideas  used  in  its  formation,  and 
there  is  no  doubt  that  it  at  one  time  was  used  as  an  accom- 
paniment for  vocal  performance.  Were  it  possible  to  go 
into  close  detail,  I  could  give  you  a  score  of  names  connect- 
ed with  early  sonatas  and  many  stories  belonging  to  their 
time;  but  what  we  have  to  consider  is  the  sonata  as  we 
have  it  to-day.  Perhaps  the  sonatas  of  a  musician  named 
Corelli  may  be  considered  as  a  fair  starting-point,  since  he 
worked  with  a  close  regard  to  forms  and  published  sixty 
sonatas  of  different  kinds,  chiefly  beginning  with  a  slow 


126  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

movement,  very  dignified  and  stately,  and  followed  by  three 
movements  of  varied  character.  Corelli  was  born  in  Fusi- 
gnano,  in  Italy,  in  1653.  He  studied  counterpoint  or  such 
harmony  and  thorough-bass  as  could  then  be  taught  from 
Simonelli  and  the  violin  from  Basani.  On  this  instrument 
he  is  said  to  have  performed  marvellously  well,  but  an  an- 
ecdote related  of  him  and  Handel  indicates  somewhat  the 
delicacy  but  lack  of  vigor  in  his  style.  Handel  was  in 
Rome  for  the  purpose  of  conducting  some  of  his  own  can- 
tatas. A  cantata  is  a  kind  of  short  opera  or  oratorio,  and 
was  originally  a  sort  of  musical  recitation  by  a  person  with 
no  dramatic  performance  and  accompanied  by  one  instru- 
ment; at  present  it  consists  of  a  choral  work  of  more  elab- 
orate character;  too  short  to  be  called  an  oratorio, and  when 
it  is  secular  too  light  in  tone  or  melody  to  be  dignified  by 
that  name.  Handel's  cantatas  were  many  of  them  very  state- 
ly and  grand,  and  in  the  special  one  which  he  directed  in 
Rome  while  Corelli  led  the  band  there  occur  some  very 
powerful  passages.  Corelli,  as  well  as  being  leader  of  the 
band,  played  first  violin ;  and  exquisite  as  was  his  style  Han- 
del lost  all  patience  over  the  tame  way  in  which  he  produced 
these  parts,  especially  where  the  following  notes  occur. 

•£. 


CHRISTOPH   KITTER  VOX   GLUCK. 


Handel's   Temper.  1 27 

At  last,  unable  to  endure  it  any  longer,  Handel  rushed 
forward  and  snatched  the  violin  out  of  Corelli's  hands, 
stamping  up  and  down  before  him,  began  to  fairly  thunder 
it  forth,  singing  loudly  and  playing  on  the  instrument  at 
the  same  time.  Corelli  listened,  answered  most  politely 
some  of  Handel's  violent  remarks  and  calmly  began  over 
again,  not  even  losing  his  temper,  but  not  giving  the  pas- 
sage in  question  with  any  more  vigor,  for  which  reason 
Handel  never  could  be  brought  to  do  Corelli  justice  as  a 
composer  or  performer,  but  he  is  well  known  now  to  have 
reformed  many  points  in  technique;  and  limited  as  he  was 
both  in  composition  and  performance,  we  owe  him  a  great 
deal  for  his  methodical  manner  and  his.  patience  in  rear- 
ranging the  confused  ideas  which  belonged  to  that  period. 
Sometimes  he  made  startling  mistakes,  one  of  which  indi- 
cates the  lack  of  musical  knowledge  at  that  day,  and  being 
connected  with  the  famous  composer  Scarlatti  is  especially 
interesting.  The  two  composers  were  at  a  concert  for  the 
King  of  Naples.  Corelli  was  leading,  and  in  a  composition 
of  Scarlatti's  made  some  small  mistakes  which  confused 
him  in  spite  of  Scarlatti's  efforts  to  gloss  it  over.  The 
next  piece  was  in  the  key  of  C  minor.  Corelli  began  it 
in  C  major.  "We  will  begin  again,"  whispered  Scarlatti, 
but  again  and  again  Corelli  failed  to  see  or  to  rectify  his 
mistake ;  and  it  is  said  that  so  great  was  his  humiliation 


1 28  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

that  his  health  immediately  began  to  fail,  and  in  fact  lie 
died  soon  afterwards,  in  January,  1713. 

The  four  movements  of  the  sonata  are  as  follows :  first  an 
allegro,  next  an  andante,  following  this  a  minuet  or  scherzo 
— this  was  introduced  by  Beethoven — the  fourth  movement 
again  allegro  or  presto  or  rondo.  The  allegro  has  two  of 
what  are  called  themes  or  subjects,  one  in  the  tonic  or  key- 
note, the  other  in  the  dominant.  This  is  the  fifth  note  above 
the  key-note ;  for  example,  should  the  first  theme  of  an  al- 
legro be  written  in  C,  the  second  would  have  to  be  in  G. 
It  is  called  the  dominant  because  the  key  to  any  passage  can- 
not be  actually  known  unless  it  has  this  note  for  the  root. 
Should  the  first  theme  of  the  sonata  be  written  in  the  minor 
key  then  the  second  would  have  to  be  in  the  relative  major. 

The  second  movement  of  the  sonata,  the  andante,  has 
usually  one  theme  or  subject,  and  it  is  a  key  which  relates 
in  some  way  to  the  tonic  or  leading  key.  The  third  move- 
ment, the  minuet,  has  its  origin  in  mnsic  of  French  origin. 
It  was  written  always  in  dancing  time.  Sometimes  it  is 
called  the  trio,  because  of  its  second  movement  being  com- 
posed in  three  part  harmony.  "When  we  come  to  consider 
the  symphony  we  will  hear  more  of  the  minuet  and  scher- 
zo time.  The  fourth  movement  goes  back  to  the  original 
key,  but  there  is  only  one  theme,  and  this  is  often  repeated 
over  and  over  in  various  ways. 


Definition  of  Musical  Terms.  129 

This,  of  course,  is  merely  an  outline  whereby  composers 
have  a  certain  rule  to  govern  them,  but  they  are  allowed 
certain  license,  so  that  occasionally  you  will  find  sonatas 
written  without  close  adherence  to  this  form.  Schubert 
constantly  disregarded  rules  in  his  sonatas,  and  occasionally 
Beethoven  did  the  same.  To  Haydn,  Mozart,  and  Bee- 
thoven we  owe  the  sonata  as  we  have  it  now;  for  begin- 
ners I  should  recommend  Haydn  and  Mozart  as  the  simplest 
reading  and  best  music  to  begin  upon. 

The  actual  meaning  of  the  term  allegro  is  "  cheerful," 
from  which  you  can  form  some  idea  of  its  application  in 
musical  expression,  but  its  proper  significance  relates  to  the 
speed  to  be  used  in  playing  any  portion  of  a  piece  of  music 
which  is  marked  allegro.  The  tempo  of  such  portions  is 
between  andante  and  presto.  Various  words  are  combined 
with  allegro,  such  as  "  molto,"  "conbrio,"  which  indicate 
a  quickening  of  the  time;  then  the  "allegro  moderate," 
or  "  non  troppo,"  meaning  a  slower  time;  while  the  size 
of  the  hall  in  which  an  orchestra  are  playing,  the  number 
of  performers,  and  many  such  points  indicate  the  time  in 
which  the  allegro  is  to  be  taken,  no  matter  how  the  marks 
read  on  the  music. 

The  andante,  following  the  allegro  in  a  sonata,  means 
to  "  move  along  at  a  moderate  pace,"  and  like  adagio  and 
larrjo  the  term  is  used  as  a  name  for  a  piece  of  music,  or 


1 30  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

else  as  the  name  for  one  movement  always  taken  slowly  in 
sonata,  symphony,  etc. 

The  minuet  or  scherzo,  which  is  the  third  movement  of 
the  sonata,  was  introduced  by  Beethoven.  The  minuet  is 
a  piece  of  music  in  dancing  measure,  and  is  emphatically  of 
French  origin.  The  name  is  from  menu,  and  refers  to  the 
small  steps  of  the  dance.  When  it  was  invented  is  un- 
certain. A  French  composer  named  Lulli  is  supposed  by 
many  to  have  invented  it.  The  first  form  of  the  minuet 
consisted  of  two  eight-bar  phrases  in  £  time.  These  were 
repeated,  sometimes  beginning  on  the  third  beat  of  the  bar, 
but  generally  upon  the  first,  and  the  movement  was  ex- 
tremely moderate  and  precise. 

Mozart,  in  "Don  Giovanni,"  has  written  what  is  consid- 
ered the  most  perfect  form  of  the  original  minuet.  Fol- 
lowing this  first  movement  came  a  second  written  in  three- 
part  harmony,  for  which  reason  it  was  called  a  trio.  Fre- 
quently the  second  part  of  the  dance  contained  sixteen  or 
more  bars  in  place  of  the  original  eight.  In  what  is  known 
as  the  suite  we  frequently  find  a  minuet  in  this  form.  The 
suites  which  led  the  way  to  the  sonata  were  a  collection  of 
dance  tunes,  and  their  history  is  interesting,  romantic,  and 
picturesque.  In  the  latter  part  of  the  sixteenth,  and  in  the 
beginning  of  the  eighteenth  century,  dancing  tunes  had 
spread  all  over  civilized  Europe.  Travelling  musicians  took 


Dancing  and  Dancing  Tunes.  131 

them  from  place  to  place  entertaining  the  ladies  and  gen- 
tlemen of  Court  with  them,  while  people  returning  from 
the  wars  or  soldiers  of  foreign  nations  brought  from  place 
to  place  the  dances  characteristic  of  their  own  climes ;  and 
the  French  and  German  and  English  people  adopted  them, 
in  course  of  time  popularizing  them  as  completely  as  though 
they  had  originated  among  themselves. 

In  Qneen  Elizabeth's  day  there  was  music  of  various 
kinds  ordained  for  dancing.  Suites  consisting  of  "A  staid 
tnusicke  ordered  for  grave  dancing"  and  again  a  "  lighter 
and  more  stirring  kind."  The  poets  of  her  day  make  fre- 
quent references  to  these  old  dancing  tunes,  which  are  sig- 
nificant to  us  now  in  our  study  of  sonata  or  symphony,  as 
germs  of  the  original  feeling  remain  enough  in  both  tempo 
and  treatment  to  be  suggestive,  or  to  create  a  background 
for  us  as  we  practise,  which  makes  work  for  us  both  pict- 
uresque and  entertaining.  The  variety  in  styles  and  meth- 
ods of  dancing  and  dancing  tunes  suggested  the  idea  of 
putting  together  a  collection,  in  which  there  should  be  a 
sufficient  contrast  to  make  the  performance  amusing  and 
inspiring.  Therefrom  started  the  suite.  Dances  of  vari- 
ous countries  were  selected,  and  composers  of  genius  and 
note  devoted  much  time  to  working  for  them. 

The  dances,  of  course,  are  too  numerous  to  mention — 
Pavans,  Gattiards,  Allemanes,  and  Branles  originated  in 


132  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

Italy,  Suabia,  and  France — and  when  these  passed  out  of 
fashion  the  Allemandes  and  Courantes  and  the  Sarabande 
came  into  favor.  Following  these  the  Minuet,  the  Riggar 
doon,  the  Chacone,  and  finally  in  the  English  suite  the  Jig 
appeared.  A  description  of  these  dances  is  not  necessary 
here,  although  their  characteristic  would  be  well  worthy  of 
study  to  the  pianist,  because  of  their  direct  influence  upon 
music  and  the  suggestions  which  they  offer  for  expression 
and  feeling,  as  well  as  for  the  impetus  which  the  history  of 
any  part  of  a  science  is  sure  to  give  to  the  study  of  it.  The 
scherzo,  from  the  Italian  word  meaning  jest,  belongs  to  the 
sonata,  and  occupies  a  prominent  position  therein.  The 
old  minuet  or  trio  formed  the  groundwork  of  the  scherzo 
as  Beethoven  developed  it,  and  in  it  certain  phrases  are  re- 
peated, introduced  and  reintroduced  with  endless  variations 
in  a  spirit  of  gayety  arid  musical  mirth  which  are  charming 
when  in  the  hands  of  a  great  composer.  The  movement  is 
short,  the  rhythm  carefully  marked,  and  triple  time  consid- 
ered the  best.  Sometimes  for  the  sake  of  strong  contrast 
different  time  is  used,  but  Beethoven  clung,  whenever  it 
was  possible,  to  the  |-  time,  even  when  another  tempo  might 
have  been  as  well  used.  An  admirable  critic — Professor 
Gehring  of  Vienna — suggests  that  this  has  been  done  so  that 
the  written  notes  should  attract  the  eye  and  therefore  im- 
press the  mind  of  the  player  with  the  composer's  idea  of  a 


The  Scherzo.  133 

"  tripping  lightness  "  —  a  quick  rhythm,  the  three  notes 
with  their  little  "separated  stems"  being  more  suggestive 
than  quavers  with  united  ends.  In  Beethoven's  C  minor 
symphony  the  scherzo  is  worthy  of  the  closest  attention  : 
suddenly  it  rushes  from  gayety  into  something  terror-strick- 
en and  pursued,  returning,  as  the  above-quoted  critic  says, 
"  All  alive  and  well,"*  in  the  tremendously  joyful  finale. 
All  sorts  of  eccentricities  are  employed  in  the  scherzo  of 
the  8th  symphony  ;  especially  when  in  rushes  the  tremen- 
dous bass  with  its  C  sharp  converted  into  D  flat,  and  just  as 
the  whole  thing  seems  to  have  culminated  in  the  chord  of 
F  repeated,  behold  there  is  a  fresh  impetus  aroused  —  a  start 
up  again,  and  a  new  and  brilliant  finale.  The  scherzo  of 
the  9th  symphony  is  considered  very  typical,  and  the  phrase 
given  below  indicates  the  character  of  the  whole. 


Timp. 


Together  with  the  study  of  the  different  portions  of  the 
sonata  and  the  symphony,  it  is  well  to  make  especial  note 
of  the  keys  and  their  reference  to  each  other. 

*  Professor  Gehring  does  not  suggest  any  resemblance  in  Schumann's 
work  to  this  special  scherzo,  but  it  seems  to  me  that  there  are  strong 
characteristics  in  common. 


1 34  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 


CHAPTER  X. 

Wolfgang  Amadeus  Mozart. — "Master  and  Miss  Mozart,  Prodigies  of 
Nature." — A  Concert  in  the  London  of  1765. — "Nannerl." — The  Chil- 
dren's Presents. — Home  Discipline. — The  House  in  Chelsea. — Playing 
and  Composing. — The  First  Symphony. — An  Old  Letter. — Duets  a 
Novelty. — In  Italy. — The  First  Opera. — An  Important  Visit. — The 
Weber  Family. — A  Heartless  Coquette. — Constanza. — "The  Magic 
Flute." — Last  Days. 

IN  the  month  of  May,  1765,  an  advertisement  appeared 
in  London,  announcing  that  a  concert  would  be  given  at 
Hicksford's  Rooms,  Brewer  Street,  Golden  Square,  "  For 
the  benefit  of  Miss  Mozart,  aged  thirteen,  and  Master  Mo- 
zart, eight  years  of  age,  prodigies  of  nature — a  concert  of 
music,  with  all  the  overtures  of  this  little  boy's  own  com- 
position." 

Suppose  that  we  had  been  able  to  attend  that  concert 
in  May,  1765.  A  charming  occasion  it  must  have  been,  for 
London  was  quite  excited  over  the  event;  piano-forte  per- 
formances were  novel  enough  then,  at  least  so  far  as  special 
representations  of  the  kind  are  concerned,  to  give  this  oc- 
casion a  character  of  its  own ;  children,  "  prodigies  of  nat- 
ure," were  particularly  acceptable  to  the  London  public. 


WOLFGANG   AMADEUS  MOZART. 


The  Mozart  Prodigies.  137 

At  that  time  precocity  among  young  misses  and  masters 
was  regarded  very  favorably  ;  we  read  of  quite  small  chil- 
dren being  brought  into  company  for  the  purpose  of  enter- 
taining older  minds  who  had  grown  tired  of  the  round 
of  foolish  dissipations  and  ordinary  social  pleasures ;  small 
children,  scarcely  able  to  speak  their  own  language,  some- 
times recited  in  classic  tongues;  dances  were  devised  re- 
quiring grace  and  accuracy,  and  the  little  people  who  per- 
formed them  were  feted  and  made  much  of,  so  that  the 
performances  of  Miss  Mozart  and  her  email  brother  were 
hailed  with  delight. 

Very  few  of  the  prodigies,  however,  of  that  splendid  pe- 
riod, lived  to  fulfil  any  promise  of  their  childhood ;  but  as 
we  read  or  hear  the  sonatas  of  Wolfgang  Amadeus  Mozart 
to-day — as  we  listen  to  the  never-tiring  strains  of  "Don  Gio- 
vanni"— as  the  organ  swells  forth  in  the  glorious  masses  to 
which  he  has  given  his  name,  the  scene  in  Golden  Square 
rises  as  a  background  for  so  much  that  is  wonderful  and 
inspiring,  that  we  fain  would  conjure  up  its  every  detail, 
separating  it  very  clearly  from  occasions  of  a  lighter  char- 
acter in  those  summer  seasons  when  George  III.  was  young 
and  music  beginning  to  be  patronized.  I  am  sure  there 
was  a  great  deal  of  jostling  about  of  sedan-chairs  and  foot- 
men that  evening,  and  in  the  spring  twilight — they  gave 
concerts  earlier  then  than  now — the  gorgeously  dressed 


138  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

ladies  and  gentlemen  must  have  looked  very  much  like 
a  picture.  Let  us  follow  them  into  Hicksford's  Rooms. 
We  find  ourselves  in  a  large  and  well-lighted  hall  with 
chairs  and  benches  and  a  large  platform  containing  some 
instruments  and  a  good  harpsichord.  Out  comes  old  Papa 
Mozart,  a  dignified  gentleman  from  Salzburg,  leading  a  child 
by  each  hand :  one  a  charmingly  pretty  little  girl  in  the 
quaint  dress  we  are  reviving  to-day;  the  other  a  boy  of 
eight,  of  a  most  striking  grace  and  beauty,  and  dressed  like 
a  little  court  gentleman — that  is,  with  knee-breeches,  silken 
hose,  shoebuckles,  a  little  satin  coat  with  lace  ruffles,  and 
a  little  sword  at  his  side.  The  little  boy  makes  his  bow  to 
an  enthusiastic  audience ;  he  sits  down  at  the  piano,  and 
forthwith  begins  one  of  his  own  sweet,  childlike,  yet  har- 
monious compositions.  Then  "Nannerl,"  as  she  is  called, 
plays.  Presently  the  two  young  prodigies  vanish,  the  fine 
audience  moves  away,  the  lights  are  out,  and  the  boy's  Lon- 
don fame  had  begun.  As  we  go  through  dingy  Golden 
Square  to-day,  one  hundred  and  eighteen  years  later,  we 
think  of  all  the  music  he  left  for  us  to  hear  and  feel  and 
play  between  that  night  when  he  performed  his  own  lit- 
tle compositions,  and  the  day  of  his  death  in  1791,  at  the 
early  age  of  thirty-five  years. 

Wolfgang  Amadeus  Mozart  was   born   at   Salzburg  in 
1756.     His  father  had  possessed  musical  talent,  which  de- 


Mozart's  Careful  Training  of  his  Children.        1 39 

scended  to  the  boy  as  genius.  At  three  years  of  age  he 
learned  to  play  ;  before  he  was  five  he  had  composed  a  great 
many  little  melodies,  which  his  father  wrote  down  for  him. 

I  remember  seeing  in  the  studio  of  an  English  artist*  in 
London,  himself  the  son  of  a  great  musician,  a  picture 
representing  the  baby  Mozart :  a  charming  little  figure  lead- 
ing a  visionary  choir  of  angels.  It  seemed  to  me  the  very 
embodiment  of  what  Mozart  might  have  been  as  a  child — 
beautiful,  fascinating,  angelic,  and  a  musician  from  his  soul 
to  his  very  finger-tips. 

His  sister  Anna,  or  "  Nannerl,"  as  they  called  her  at  home, 
also  played  marvellously  well,  and  when  the  children  were 
very  young  their  father  started  with  them,  on  a  concert 
tour,  during  which  time  they  played  in  London.  As  I  told 
you,  the  great  ladies  and  gentlemen  of  the  day  delighted  in 
juvenile  precocity  ;  the  little  Mozarts  were  f^ted  and  ca- 
ressed in  a  way  which  would  have  spoiled  the  lad's  sweet, 
sunny  nature,  perhaps,  but  for  his  father's  watchful  care. 
With  the  true  German  instinct  for  discipline,  the  elder  Mo- 
zart guarded  his  children  carefully  from  over -excitement 
or  indulgence.  Presents  were  constantly  made  them  — 
garments  of  satin  trimmed  with  finest  of  laces.  Rich 
jewels,  besides  all  sorts  of  fanciful  and  expensive  toys,  were 

*  Mr.  Felix  Moscheles. 


140  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

showered  upon  the  children.  And  even  out  of  these  the 
careful  father  found  a  means  of  training  the  children's  nat- 
ures; the  clothes  were  used  only  on  concert  or  special  so- 
cial occasions ;  the  jewellery  was  kept  locked  away  in  a  large 
box,  and  the  children  were  only  allowed  to  take  it  out  and 
look  at  it  when  their  behavior  had  been  particularly  good. 
They  were  permitted  to  play  with  it  for  a  little  while,  but 
its  intrinsic  value  was  never  told  them.  During  this  Lon- 
don visit  the  Mozarts  were  for  a  time  in  lodgings  in  Chel- 
sea, a  part  of  London  which  was  then  an  open  country,  with 
blooming  gardens  and  green  lanes  stretching  in  every  direc- 
tion, while  the  roar  of  the  great  city  was  far  in  the  distance, 
and  even  Hicksford's  Rooms  were  a  long  journey  away. 

Old  Mr.  Mozart  fell  ill,  and  for  some  time  the  children 
had  to  keep  very  quiet.  The  harpsichord  was  closed,  and 
the  brother  and  sister  took  to  running  about  the  pretty, 
suburban  place,  no  doubt  enjoying  the  respite  from  practis- 
ing; but  even  in  this  happy  time  Mozart's  little  brain  was 
at  work  with  musical  compositions.  The  enforced  idleness 
and  freedom  from  care  was  in  its  way  productive.  He 
delighted  to  romp  with  Nannerl,  to  build  up  a  little  house 
of  stone  and  moss  and  weeds  in  the  garden  back  of  their 
lodgings;  but  undercurrent  was  the  impulse  towards  music- 
al work,  mingling  with  his  play  and  frolics,  and  finally  tak- 
ing definite  shape,  when  he  composed  his  first  symphony 


Master  and  Miss  Mozarfs  Entertainments.        141 

(Opus  15).  He  was  then  in  his  tenth  year,  but  in  this  work 
an  amount  of  scientific  knowledge  is  displayed  which,  tak- 
ing the  resources  of  the  time  into  consideration,  shows  us 
what  sparkling  genius  the  boy  Mozart  possessed.  Soon 
after  this  the  father  recovered,  the  family  removed  to  a 
quaint  old  inn  in  Coruhill,  London,  and  more  concerts  were 
advertised ;  but  the  children  had  their  precious  souvenir  of 
that  "field -and -flower"  holiday  in  the  manuscript  which 
was  produced  to  the  delight  of  the  father  during  his  conva- 
lescence, and  among  the  novelties  offered  in  the  programme 
were  "  Duets  for  Four  Hands  on  the  Harpsichord." 

This  was  in  the  year  1765.  Among  the  treasures  in  an 
old  house  in  England  I  have  seen  preserved  a  letter  in 
which  these  performances  are  alluded  to;  one  could  wish 
that  the  writer  had  given  more  detail ;  but  as  would  be  nat- 
ural, I  suppose  she,  being  the  mother  of  two  little  people 
of  her  own,  dwelt  more  on  her  anxiety  that  her  children 
should  be  able  to  do  like  "  Master  and  Miss  Mozart "  than 
upon  the  methods  and  appearance  of  the  latter.  She  refers 
to  their  performance  as  "  vastly  amusing,"  and  says  that  the 
boy  has  a  "  most  engaging  look,"  and  the  little  girl  a  "  sweet 
German  face,  with  a  very  serious  although  enchanting  ex- 
pression." Still  the  letter  shows  how  entirely  novel  and 
quaint  a  proceeding  it  was  considered.  People  who  crowd- 
ed to  hear  the  children  desired  strongly  to  visit  them  at 

9 


142  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

home;  and  it  would  seem  as  though  they  almost  believed 
there  was  some  trickery  in  the  way  the  performance  was 
conducted,  for  Mozart  the  elder  at  last  announced  a  series 
of  "  test "  entertainments. 

In  the  old  inn  was  a  large,  wainscoted  room  where  the 
harpsichord  was  placed.  Here  audiences  including  the  tal- 
ent, wit,  and  fashion  of  London  assembled  twice  a  week, 
while  the  children,  attired  in  all  their  bravery — and  perhaps 
on  these  occasions  being  permitted  to  wear  some  of  the  de- 
lightful jewellery —were  brought  forward,  the  audience  being 
requested  to  "test"  them  at  the  harpsichord.  It  is  said  they 
never  failed  in  satisfying  and  delighting  their  hearers,  the 
boy  charming  every  one  by  his  gayety,  his  quaintness,  his 
sweetness  of  temper,  and  as  well  the  abandon  with  which 
he  entered  into  his  work ;  and  Nannerl,  the  little,  serious- 
eyed,  blooming  madchen,  fascinating  the  brilliant  company 
by  her  simplicity  and  talent,  and  the  adoring  fondness  she 
showed  for  her  little  brother. 

Passing  from  this  time  of  sunny  though  precocious  child- 
hood to  a  boyhood  in  which  he  worked  indefatigably,  we 
find  Mozart  in  Italy,  studying,  composing,  performing,  and 
writing  the  most  delightful  letters  home,  chiefly  to  his  dear 
Nannerl,  who  by  this  time  was  more  devoted  to  domes- 
tic duties  than  music.  But  to  her  the  boy  always  poured 
forth  his  musical  sentiments.  Did  he  hear  anything  which 


Opera  of  "  La  Tinta  Giardanera"  143 

pleased  him  it  was  to  Nannerl  that  he  desired  to  write  it; 
and  I  think  in  all  the  history  of  great  lives  there  has  rarely 
been  anything  more  touching  than  the  devotion  displayed 
by  Mozart  to  those  whom  he  loved  —  first  to  his  parents 
and  sister,  later  to  his  wife. 

One  of  the  most  interesting  experiences  of  the  Mozarts 
took  place  after  the  Italian  visit  in  1775.  The  Elector  of 
Bavaria  invited  Mozart  to  write  an  opera  for  the  Carnival. 
Mozart  set  to  work  speedily,  watched  over  by  his  parents 
and  sister,  and  when  the  work  was  completed — it  was  called 
"  La  Tinta  Giardanera  "  —  the  father  and  son,  with  pretty 
Nannerl,  set  off  for  Munich,  where  court  life  was  then  very 

gay- 

In  the  old  market-place  at  Munich  lived  a  very  respect- 
able widow,  and  Nannerl,  a  charming  maiden  at  that  time, 
was  taken  there  to  lodge,  the  father  and  son  being  com- 
pelled to  be  nearer  court.  Of  course  Nannerl  shared  all 
the  delights  and  excitement  of  the  visit.  Rehearsals  began 
at  once,  and  young  Mozart  darted  in  and  out  of  his  sister's 
lodging  half  a  dozen  times  a  day  to  report  progress.  Not 
very  long  ago  I  was  standing  in  the  door-way  of  the  old 
house,  and  looking  up  the  heavy  oaken  staircase,  back  of 
a  little  shop,  which  led  to  the  rooms  where  Anna  Mozart 
spent  those  days ;  and  it  seemed  to  me  that  I  could  see 
Mozart's  fast  flying  young  feet  as  he  rushed  up  and  down, 


I /I /I  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

humming  bits  of  the  opera,  or  perhaps  suggestions  of  the 
finer  work  which  was  to  come  later.  At  all  events  a  fas- 
cinating picture,  with  Nannerl  bending  over  the  balustrade 
from  the  gloom  of  the  old  hall  above,  her  sweet  young 
face  shining  down  a  benediction  upon  the  ardent  and  anx- 
ious younger  brother.  No  musical  life,  unless  it  be  that  of 
Felix  Mendelssohn,  affords  more  charming  pictures,  or  in- 
deed more  pathetic  ones,  than  that  of  Mozart,  and  the  sun- 
shine in  his  music  seems  to  me  to  belong  to  all  this  period 
of  youth,  the  dawn  of  early  manhood  with  which  these  days 
are  so  tenderly  associated. 

At  last  the  grand  night  came.  Nannerl  was  dressed  with 
extremest  care  by  the  old  widow,  and  joined  her  father  and 
brother.  The  three  were  fairly  trembling  witli  excitement, 
Mozart  slipping  his  fingers  now  and  then  into  his  sister's 
for  a  sympathetic  pressure,  although  he  carried  his  young 
head  high,  and  in  his  splendid  new  costume  of  satin  and 
lace,  with  the  flash  of  diamonds  in  his  ruff  and  on  his  slip- 
pers, looked  like  a  young  prince  come  forth  to  greet  his 
people. 

The  opera-house  was  crowded  to  excess;  the  court  was 
there  in  full  splendor,  and  Mozart,  the  youthful  Maestro, 
sat  with  his  father  and  Nannerl  waiting  so  anxiously  for  the 
performance  to  begin  that  he  scarcely  heeded  the  glances 
bent  upon  him  from  every  side.  The  boy — he  was  scarcely 


Mozart's  Fondness  for  his  Parents.  145 

nineteen — stood  the  blaze  of  admiration  very  well.  His 
mind  was  centred  upon  the  music,  and  from  the  first  note 
to  the  last  it  was  a  triumphant  success.  Mozart  became  the 
object  of  the  wildest  enthusiasm,  and  from  that  hour  his 
musical  fame  was  established. 

Unfortunately,  however,  all  of  Mozart's  days  were  not  so 
cloudless  nor  so  joyful.  In  his  short  and  busy  life  the  pe- 
riods of  anxiety  and  heart-sickness  seem  almost  to  predom- 
inate, marking  the  serenity  and  the  sunshine  of  the  early 
days  all  the  more  clearly.  The  little  family  circle  at  home 
was  so  centred  in  the  lad  that  when  he  started  out  on  a 
second  tour,  and  the  father  could  not  accompany  him,  the 
mother  left  her  household  duties  to  Nannerl  and  set  forth 
with  her  son.  An  adoring  fondness  for  his  parents  was  one 
of  the  most  lovely  traits  in  Mozart's  beautiful  nature.  On 
this  trip  he  wrote  home  with  pride  how  careful  he  was  of 
his  mother,  and  she,  good  woman,  watched  him  tenderly, 
giving  up  everything  to  his  pleasure  and  profit. 

He  spent  the  winter  in  Mannheim,  where  his  letters  show 
how  very  busily  he  was  employed.  He  writes  that  he  rose 
early,  "dressed  quickly,"  and  after  breakfast  composed  un- 
til twelve ;  then  wrote  until  half-past  one,  when  he  dined. 
At  three  he  began  to  give  lessons,  which  continued  until 
supper-time;  after  which  he  read,  unless  he  was  among  his 
friends.  Of  course  he  had  a  large  circle  wherever  he  was, 


146  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

but  in  Mannheim  during  this  winter  he  formed  friendships 
which  shadowed  all  his  life. 

The  Weber  family  were  there — brilliant  musicians,  agree- 
able and  witty.  There  were  five  daughters,  and  Mozart 
straightway  fell  in  love  with  the  eldest,  Aloysia,  a  beautiful 
girl,  who  was  studying  for  the  stage.  She  was  well  pleased 
with  the  young  composer's  attentions,  and  he  went  to  Paris 
half,  or,  as  he  considered  it,  wholly  engaged.  That  was  a 
sad  visit  to  Paris.  His  mother,  wishing  to  economize  for 
her  sou's  sake,  took  rooms  in  a  cold,  poor  quarter  of  the 
town,  and  there  fell  ill  with  a  fatal  disorder.  Poor  Mo- 
zart wrote  home  the  most  pathetic  letters.  We  can  fancy 
how  he  tried  to  save  her,  but  it  was  in  vain.  The  care- 
ful, tender,  self-sacrificing  mother  faded  from  his  life,  her 
last  thoughts  being  to  commend  this  beloved  son  to  God's 
keeping. 

Full  of  sadness,  the  poor  young  fellow  hastened  to  Mann- 
heim, where  he  hoped  Aloysia  Weber  would  console  him. 
She  had  gone  to  Munich,  and  thither  he  followed  her. 
There  the  true  selfishness  of  the  Weber  family  was  shown 
to  him.  They  had  become  prosperous,  and  Mozart,  although 
famous,  was  far  from  being  rich,  so  that  the  family  of  his 
betrothed  received  him  coldly.  Aloysia  herself  scarcely 
listened  to  the  first  words  he  said.  He  had  entered  the 
Weber  parlor  full  of  hope  and  anxiety  to  see  his  future 


Mozart's  Marriage.  147 

wife,  and  tell  her  the  story  of  his  sorrow.  He  must  have 
looked  noble  and  manly,  with  the  tenderness  of  his  grief  in 
his  handsome  face,  but  Aloysia  turned  aside  coldly ;  there 
were  others  there  to  whom  she  talked.  Mozart  hesitated  a 
moment,  and  then  seating  himself  at  the  piano,  sang  in  his 
rich,  clear  voice,  "Ich  lasse  das  Mddchen  das  nicM  will''1 
(I  leave  the  maiden  who  leaves  me),  and  before  the  evening 
was  over,  the  engagement  was  at  an  end. 

"We  could  wish  that  his  intimacy  with  the  "Webers  had 
also  ended,  but  later  he  renewed  acquaintance  with  them, 
and  in  spite  of  much  opposition  from  his  anxious  father 
and  Nannerl  he  married  Constanza,  Aloysia's  younger  sis- 
ter. With  her  he  tried  to  be  happy,  but  even  in  his  ten- 
derest  letters  we  see  that  she  was  ill-tempered,  cold,  and 
selfish.  But  Mozart's  nature  was  so  uniformly  sweet  that 
it  took  a  great  deal  to  make  him  positively  wretched,  and 
unkind  he  could  not  be. 

When  he  was  in  the  midst  of  many  worries,  one  summer, 
he  used  to  ride  out  every  morning  for  exercise,  and  leaving 
his  wife  sleeping,  he  never  failed  to  pin  a  little  note  to  her 
pillow,  that  she  might  find  it  on  awaking.  It  was  always 
a  sweet  word  of  love  and  care  for  her,  and  it  is  hard  to 
think  Constanza  was  not  worthy  of  it. 

There  is  so  much  to  tell  of  Mozart,  I  wish  that  we  might 
linger  an  hour  more  over  his  sweet  story.  His  successes 


148  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

were  so  many  that  it  is  hard  to  think  of  him  as  so  often 
troubled  about  money. 

In  1791  his  beautiful  opera  of  "  The  Magic  Flute  "  was 
produced  with  tremendous  success  at  Vienna.  Constanza 
came  on  to  hear  it,  and  was  thoroughly  frightened  by  Mo- 
zart's altered  looks.  He  was  ashy  pale,  worn  and  thin. 
She  seems  to  have  been  full  of  a  really  tender  feeling  for 
him  then.  He  was  writing  his  famous  mass,  the  "  Requi- 
em," and  continued  it  even  after  he  took  to  his  bed ;  and 
while  Constanza  sat  beside  him,  watching  with  tears  the 
feeble  hand  at  work,  he  told  her  that  his  heart  and  soul 
were  full  of  thoughts  of  the  dear  Lord  who  had  died  for 
him. 

"The  Magic  Flute"  was  drawing  crowded  houses,  while 
Mozart  lay  dying  not  far  off.  In  the  evenings  he  would 
time  the  performance,  saying  to  Constanza  and  her  sister 
Sophie,  and  some  musical  friends  always  with  him,  "  Now 
they  are  singing  this  or  that  part."  The  day  before  his 
death  he  read  over  the  score  of  the  Requiem,  and  asked 
the  friends  near  him  to  try  and  sing  it  with  him.  They 
did  so,  Mozart  coming  in  with  his  part  in  a  sweet,  faint 
voice.  Suddenly,  at  the  Lacrimoso,  he  burst  into  tears,  and 
laid  down  the  score  for  the  last  time.  That  evening  he 
murmured  to  Constanza,  "  Oh,  that  I  could  once  more  hear 
my  '  Magic  Flute !' " 


Death  of  Mozart.  149 

Constanza  glanced  at  Roser,  a  musician  who  was  with 
them,  and,  blinded  by  his  tears,  Roser  sat  down  to  the  piano 
and  sang  one  of  Mozart's  favorite  airs.  It  was  almost  the 
last  sound  his  closing  ears  received.  The  next  morning, 
Sunday,  December  5, 1791,  at  the  age  of  thirty-five,  Mozart 
died.* 

*  Xannerl  survived  her  brother  many  years.  Constanza  Mozart  died 
in  this  century,  having,  in  1809,  married  a  second  time. 


150  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians, 


CHAPTER  XI. 

Ecclesiastical  Music. — Early  Writers. — Palestrina  and  the  Council  of 
Trent. — An  Important  Decision. — The  Reform. — Mass  Music  of  Va- 
rious Composers. 

PROBABLY  no  form  of  music  has  undergone  so  many 
changes  as  that  used  in  Christian  churches  since  the  period 
of  the  Reformation,  all  kinds  of  local  reasons  producing 
modifications,  alterations,  or  offering  suggestions  for  both 
form  and  melody  employed;  but  during  the  last  ten  years 
there  has  been  in  church-music  a  decided  improvement — a 
strong  desire  to  use  the  best  forms,  to  employ  the  purest 
kind  of  melody  and  the  most  harmonious  music,  entirely  in- 
dependent of  its  origin  or  its  traditional  meaning.  While 
the  simple  hymn  tunes  will  always,  I  suppose,  be  more  or 
less  in  vogue  among  the  various  churches,  will  always  be 
beloved  for  sacred  music  at  home,  still  the  tendency  is 
towards  a  finer  or  broader  kind  of  harmony,  something 
which  will  be  worthier  of  study  and  of  performance,  and, 
at  the  same  time,  elevate  the  thoughts  of  the  people,  as  per- 
fectly harmonious  strains  of  music  when  listened  to  with 


Church-music.  151 

a  fervent  spirit,  be  it  of  the  worship  of  God  or  the  appre- 
ciation of  the  art  itself,  must  always  do. 

At  the  present  day  all  Christian  churches  use  for  their 
special  services  a  great  deal  of  what  is  known  as  old  mass 
music;  the  programmes  for  all  Easter  services  include  so 
much  of  the  music  which  has  long  been  known  as  such, 
that  it  is  well  to  understand  the  origin  of  what  we  now  call 
the  mass  music  in  the  history  of  the  art  itself;  for  to-day 
we  owe  to  it  much  that  is  fine  in  all  our  present  forms  of 
melody,  and  especially  a  direct  impulse  towards  an  improve- 
ment in  the  art  of  singing.  The  history  of  mass  music  re- 
ally belongs  to  the  history  of  singing,  but  like  all  such 
phases  in  any  art  where  the  outgrowths  are  many,  the  actu- 
al beginning,  the  first  causes,  or  the  principles  which  domi- 
nate those  beginnings,  are  apt  to  become  confused  or  for- 
gotten after  the  lapse  of  centuries  and  the  constant  ebb  and 
flow  of  so  many  tides  of  musical  feeling. 

If  we  could  look  back  three  hundred  years  to  Easter-time 
in  Italy,  we  should  see  all  the  choir  singing-schools  actively 
at  work,  choir- boys  running  hither  and  thither  between 
their  hours  of  practice,  full  of  enthusiasm  for  their  work, 
gathering  about  the  master  with  anxiety  and  zeal;  for  to 
sing  in  a  choir  in  those  days  was  regarded  as  a  great  favor. 
Hot  only  did  it  open  the  way  to  musical  study  and  advance- 
ment to  any  boy  who  showed  talent,  but  it  elevated  the 


152  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

choir- boy,  who  was  generally  of  very  humble  origin,  and 
often  afforded  him  the  means  of  a  comfortable  home  and 
some  instruction. 

Between  the  fourteenth  and  the  seventeenth  centuries,  to 
advance  in  musical  study  it  was  necessary  for  a  boy  to  be 
admitted  into  some  choir,  as  all  the  first  music  belonged  to 
the  church,  and  was  taught  by  the  chapel  -  master  and  en- 
couraged by  the  ecclesiastics.  So  many  famous  musicians 
and  composers  have  devoted  special  periods  of  their  lives 
to  the  composition  of  mass  music,  and,  as  at  the  present  day, 
so  much  of  it  is  employed  in  all  Christian  churches,  some- 
thing historical  on  the  subject  is  sure  to  be  of  interest,  par- 
ticularly as  at  one  time  the  question  as  to  whether  certain 
forms  of  music  should  or  should  not  be  allowed  in  the 
Roman  Church  produced  a  distinct  phase  in  musical  history 
which  has  influenced  every  period  since  that  time.  In  the 
lioman  Church  from  time  immemorial  the  custom  of  sing- 
ing certain  parts  of  the  mass,  or  church  service,  to  music 
of  a  very  impressive  character  has  prevailed.  It  is  difficult 
to  say  positively  the  exact  source  from  which  this  music 
was  derived.  Tradition  consecrated  certain  forms  of  melo- 
dy or  of  chant  to  the  service  of  the  church,  but  the  first 
collected  form  which  we  now  have  was  revised  or  arranged 
by  St.  Ambrose,  in  the  fourth  century.  Afterwards  St. 
Gregory  the  Great  continued  this  work.  Under  the  name  of 


The  "Kyriel 


153 


plain  chant  various  melodies,  antique  and  solemn  in  form, 
are  preserved,  and  are  still  constantly  sung  in  the  Pontif- 
ical Chapel  of  Rome,  the  cathedrals  of  most  Continental  dio- 
ceses, and  at  present  in  many  Protestant  churches,  especially 
in  the  Episcopalian  or  Church  of  England. 

Here  is  a  specimen  of  the  Kyrie,  which  is  part  of  a  mass 
belonging  to  the  ninth  century,  and  as  for  one  thousand 
years  after  St.  Gregory  composed  his  famous  chant  the 
same  characteristics  are  noticed  here  and  there  in  all  music 
written  for  church  service ;  so  that  a  careful  observation  of 
this  early  form  is  interesting  and  useful  to  the  student. 

TON.  VI. 


'  '^      '  —  r^<  ^  —  .  ^^<  r^^  •  —  '-^  i^j 

"      Ky                           ri  -  e. 

e     -     -      -      -    lei    -    son. 
(ter.) 

A              -^ 

\    Jf                                   L              """*" 

\(f\)         '   ~ez>'   £3^^    M  - 

-3      £2      0                    '""7-,     'j^-pT^  

Chris    -     -     -    -    te.  . 

e      -      -      -      -       lei     -    son. 

(ter.) 

n                         — 

^~~^*. 

r/      .    .                     i    .  - 

—  -^            -                                                  ^-"^~™*-^. 

1   fi           r  "T                                     r^n   rl  t~~~\ 

i^->       ^2—    ^'nf^fc                              ^              >- 

iCl) 

^    J^             "^^   ^"^    i^> 

3 

. 

(^r.) 

In  early  times  each  individual  portion  of  the  mass  serv- 


154  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

ice  used  to  be  sung  to  its  own  tune ;  when  different  church 
festivals  occurred  there  were  special  tunes  appointed  for 
them.  The  invention  of  counterpoint,  however,  opened  up 
a  new  field.  The  composers  of  the  day  were  enthusiastic 
at  once  in  their  desire  to  make  use  of  thorough-bass  for 
mingling  these  tunes  and  other  plain  chant  melodies  into 
masses  arranged  with  reference  to  different  voices,  and  these 
in  turn  gave  rise  to  those  great  schools  of  ecclesiastical 
music  which  led  the  way  to  so  much  that  we  possess  to- 
day, that  we  ought  to  regard  them  with  solemnity  and  re- 
spect. 

During  the  latter  part  of  the  sixteenth  century,  the 
schools  for  ecclesiastical  music  gave  rise  to  a  development 
which  has  never  been  excelled.  In  the  fourteenth  or  fif- 
teenth century,  what  was  called  the  Canto  Fermo  had 
been  employed  for  mass  music.  This  was  a  single,  plain 
chant  melody,  or  some  one  subject  often  derived  from  sec- 
ular sources,  which  served  as  a  theme  for  the  entire  mass. 
"When  composers  of  note  who  entered  into  the  study  of  har- 
mony or  counterpoint  began  to  allow  their  genius  to  take 
wing,  the  old  Canto  Fermo  underwent  many  changes ;  but, 
fortunately,  wherever  in  the  Canto  Fermo  a  fine  possibility 
existed,  or  had  in  it  anything  worth  preserving,  the  writers 
of  sacred  music  treated  it  with  proper  respect. 

A  tenor  singer  in  the  Pontifical  Chapel,  about  1390,  named 


Des  Pres.  155 

Du  Fay,  is  now  considered  the  first  composer  in  what  is 
called  the  primitive  or  early  school  of  mass  music.  He 
worked  hard,  and  his  compositions  are  full  of  fine  sugges- 
tions. Dunstable  and  Binchoys  were  also  writers  of  the 
fourteenth  century,  and  a  singer  in  the  Pope's  chapel,  who 
was  afterwards  chapel-master  to  Louis  XII.,  was  one  of  the 
most  learned  musicians  of  the  fifteenth  century.  This  was 
Josquin  des  Pres.  His  masses  would  be  excellent  specimens 
of  ecclesiastical  music  but  for  his  tendency  to  introduce  too 
much  that  was  trivial.  He  had  an  abundant  genius — that 
is,  his  mind  was  teeming  with  musical  suggestions — and  had 
he  lived  two  centuries  later  we  should  doubtless  owe  him  a 
larger  debt;  for  Des  Pres  needed  only  to  have  his  genius 
rightly  guided  by  good  standards.  But  we  must  judge  of 
people's  work  as  much  by  their  surroundings  and  resources 
as  by  the  genius  in  the  work  itself,  so  that,  looking  back  to 
the  fifteenth  century,  we  can  realize  how  Des  Pres  felt  at 
liberty  to  let  his  imagination  run  riot ;  counterpoint  com- 
bined with  a  purely  classical  idea  and  melodic  form  in  work 
had  not  then  become  fully  understood.  Now  then,  you  can 
readily  understand  how,  as  soon  as  composers  began  to  re- 
gard the  plain  chant  as  only  a  background  for  more  elabo- 
rate church-music,  many  composers  allowed  themselves  too 
much  license  in  their  sacred  compositions.  A  reform  was 
necessary.  The  result  of  this  was,  as  I  have  suggested,  one 


156  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

of  the  most  important  periods  in  the  history  of  the  art  of 
music. 

In  1564  the  Council  of  Trent  decided  that  it  would  be 
necessary  to  lay  down  rules  for  ecclesiastical  music,  and 
also  to  see  that  these  should  be  strictly  enforced  and  car- 
ried out.  So  various  were  the  abuses  which  had  crept  into 
church-music,  and  so  very  difficult  was  it  to  eradicate  them 
without  making  a  sweeping  condemnation,  and  laying  down 
a  strict  law  forbidding  any  but  a  certain  kind  of  music, 
that  many  of  the  council  considered  it  wisest  to  forbid  any 
sort  of  what  is  called  polyphonic  music.  However,  many 
people  within  and  without  the  council  had  become  so  en- 
thusiastic over  the  great  development  in  music,  that  some 
members  of  the  council  earnestly  strove  to  oppose  this 
measure,  and  suggested  that  it  would  be  well  to  preserve  as 
far  as  possible  such  forms  of  music  as  would  include  cer- 
tain melody  and  quartette. 

In  looking  back  at  a  striking  picture  of  that  time  we 
seem  to  see  one  figure,  an  outsider,  yet  a  most  impressive 
character — the  genius,  the  man  who  determined  musical  his- 
tory so  far  as  church  music  was  concerned.  Going  back 
and  forth  between  his  quiet  dwelling  and  the  chapel  of  St. 
Maria  Maggiore,  where  he  was  organist  during  those  anx- 
ious days,  this  musician,  Palestriua  by  name,  lived  a  life  of 
thought  and  zealous  aspiration  ;  his  brain  full  of  musical 


Palestrina.  157 

themes  and  subjects  which  he  fully  believed  he  could  work 
out  in  a  manner  fitting  the  use  to  which  they  would  be  put, 
if  only  the  council  would  not  lay  down  a  law  which  would 
abolish  them  forever! 

Palestrina's  earnest  desire  was  to  prove  the  possibility  of 
producing  music  which  should  be  thoroughly  devotional  in 
character,  and  yet  well  adapted  to  the  sacred  words  of  the 
service.  Finally,  his  eloquence  and  genius  so  prevailed  that 
a  committee  was  appointed  to  listen  to  three  masses  which 
he  prepared,  the  first  of  which  was  to  be  sung  in  the  Sis- 
tine  Chapel  on  the  19th  of  June,  1565,  as  a  test  of  his  skill, 
and  an  example  of  what  might  be  done  if  the  rigorous 
laws  deemed  wise  by  many  of  the  council  were  not  put  in 
force ;  but,  on  the  contrary,  the  genius  of  the  composer  al- 
lowed sufficient  liberty  to  work  with  melody,  quartette,  and 
choir,  restricted,  however,  by  certain  rules  which  Palestrina 
himself  was  the  readiest  to  suggest. 

The  great  day  came.  We  can  fancy  the  excitement  among 
all  classes  in  Rome  at  the  time,  for  the  question  was  one  of 
great  importance.  On  the  decision  of  the  committee  hung 
not  only  the  fate  of  ecclesiastical  music,  but  that  of  many 
people  interested  in  the  study  of  the  art  itself;  and  the 
poorest  of  the  choir-boys  as  well  as  the  most  famous  tenor 
singers  appreciated  how  much  this  decision  meant,  while 
the  large  body  of  outsiders — the  nobles,  the  ecclesiastics 

10 


158  The  .Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

and  dignitaries  of  Rome — the  patrons  of  music,  and  the 
great  throng  of  aspiring  musicians  and  composers  were  full 
of  an  enthusiasm  not  less  in  quality  because  until  the  deci- 
sion was  fixed  they  were  compelled  to  repress  all  expres- 
sion of  it. 

Palestrina  himself  seems  to  have  been  so  convinced  that 
lie  was  working  in  the  right  direction  that  he  scarcely  fear- 
ed the  result;  and  it  shows  how  much  the  music  which  he 
wrote  meant  to  him  in  its  sacred  form,  when  he  plunged 
with  such  ard6r  into  this  occasion,  since,  of  course,  had  he 
not  met  with  approval  in  the  church,  many  places  in  France 
and  Germany  would  have  been  open  to  him  for  composi- 
tions of  another  character,  and  he  would  also  have  re- 
ceived much  encouragement  in  Italy,  even  by  his  friends  in 
the  church,  as  a  purely  secular  composer.  But  Palestrina's 
soul  was  with  music  of  a  different  order:  he  longed  to  see 
sacred  music  elevated  to  its  proper  place;  to  see  melody 
united  with  vocal  art;  to  hear  the  words  so  sacred  and  so 
solemn  to  his  devout  ears  wedded  to  the  very  best  that  be- 
longed to  his  beloved  art.  It  is  said  of  Palestrina  that  on 
the  night  before  the  eventful  day  he  remained  alone  in  his 
study  engaged  in  meditation  and  prayer,  as  a  knight  of 
olden  time  might  watch  the  armor  which  for  the  first  time 
he  was  to  put  on  and  go  forth  to  the  battle  of  life  and  the 
world,  the  triumph  over  flesh  and  the  devil. 


Humble  Origin  of  Palestrina.  159 

The  mass  which  was  ordered  to  be  performed  was  after- 
wards known  as  the  mass  Papae  Marcelli.  The  pope,  the 
committee,  and  a  host  of  the  composer's  friends,  including 
all  the  famous  people  of  Rome,  assembled  in  the  chapel ; 
the  music  began ;  the  solemn  notes  of  the  organ  pealed 
forth,  introducing  to  the  enraptured  hearers  and  to  the 
world  for  all  time  to  come  music  which  may  be  considered 
as  the  most  perfect  of  its  kind,  and  from  which  later  com- 
posers have  had  their  keenest  inspiration.  A  triumphant 
host  of  angels  in  the  new  Jerusalem,  so  said  the  pope  him- 
self, might  have  sung  to  the  apostle  of  the  apocalypse  some 
such  inspiring  strains;  and  Cardinal  Pisani,  a  famous  mu- 
sical critic,  exclaimed  in  his  delight,  "  So  give  from  voice  to 
voice  in  notes  like  these,  and  in  the  sweetness  and  piety  of 
your  hearts  send  forth  strains  which  shall  be  forever  insep- 
arable from  this  occasion."  The  decision  was  fixed,  and  it 
was  decided  by  the  committee  that  this  music  of  Pales- 
trina's  might  be  considered  as  embodying  the  style  in  which 
all  future  church-music  should  be  composed.  Perfect  har- 
mony was  blended  with  solemnity  and  simplicity,  and  the 
heart  and  soul  of  the  composer  seemed  to  have  been  woven 
into  the  most  artistic  and  finished  portion  of  the  work. 

Palestrina  was  born  of  very  humble  parents  in  1529,  and 
as  was  usual  with  a  boy  who  showed  a  talent  for  music  at 
that  time,  he  was  sent  to  Home,  that  his  voice  in  a  choir 


160  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

might  attract  attention  and  procure  for  him  a  musical  edu- 
cation. The  result  was  successful.  From  one  point  to  an- 
other he  progressed  until  the  period  of  which  J  have  told 
you,  and  from  this  point  in  his  career  up  to  the  period  of 
his  death,  in  1594,  he  composed  ninety-three  masses,  besides 
hymns  arranged  for  different  festivals  throughout  the  year, 
lamentations,  litanies,  magnificats,  madrigals,  and  various 
similar  pieces,  all  of  which  have  been  used  from  time  to 
time  in  various  Christian  churches,  and  which  may  be  heard 
on  Christmas  or  Easter  day  throughout  the  whole  country. 
To  all  of  these  he  gave  that  exquisite  character  of  piety  and 
purity  which  were  characteristic  of  his  life;  and  as  he  was 
strongly  in  sympathy  with  St.  Phillipo  Neri,  he  embodied 
much  of  the  loftiness  of  that  saint's  artistic  spirit,  and  con- 
trived, during  his  later  years,  to  give  to  his  religious  works 
an  even  greater  degree  of  solemnity,  a  breadth  and  strength 
which  some  of  the  earlier  models  lacked,  although,  at  the 
same  time,  the  melodic  form  was  never  wanting.  It  was  in 
the  arms  of  Phillipo  Neri  that  he  breathed  his  last  on  Feb- 
ruary 2, 1594. 

Alessandro  Scarlatti,  Leo,  and  Durante  followed  Pales- 
trina,  and  in  1733  Sebastian  Bach  wrote  his  famous  mass 
in  B  minor.  This  was  composed  in  true  German  spirit, 
and  based  upon  what  may  be  considered  family  principles, 
since  we  know  that  John  Sebastian  Bach  was  one  of  a  long 


Italian  School  of  Ecclesiastical  Music.  161 

line  of  men  of  musical  genius,  who  contributed  from  father 
to  son  a  special  kind  of  talent  which  characterizes  all  the 
work  of  the  Bach  family,  and  which  in  John  Sebastian 
seemed  to  have  reached  that  culminating  point  whence  new 
sparks  were  struck  in  the  old  flame ;  but  the  fuel  for  the 
fire  remained  of  the  same  material.  This  great  mass  of 
Bach's  is  more  like  an  oratorio.  It  contains  the  most  re- 
markable fugues,  for  which  reason,  more  than  any  other,  it 
is  worth  the  careful  consideration  of  the  student ;  and  in 
the  opening  of  the  Credo  it  shows  one  of  the  most  perfect 
examples  of  the  ancient  Canto  Fermo  with  modern  harmo- 
nies, and  with  a  masterly  orchestral  accompaniment. 

The  more  recent  Italian  school  of  ecclesiastical  music  cre- 
ates what  is  called  and  known  among  students  as  the  ninth 
period.  Durante  gave  it  the  first  impulse  ;  Pergo  Lesi  car- 
ried it  on;  Haydn  and  Mozart  belonged  to  it  exclusively; 
following  them  in  the  same  line  were  Beethoven  and  Cher- 
nbini.  Weber,  Schubert,  Hummel,  Rossini,  Mercedanti,  and 
Gounod  have  written  masses  of  a  high  order,  but  they  have 
not  kept  strictly  to  the  traditional  forms  for  ecclesiastical 
music.  Sentiment  with  them  sometimes  was  allowed  to 
interfere  with  solemnity,  and  the  dramatic  and  emotional 
quality  in  their  work  is  often  more  remarkable  than  its  re- 
ligious fervor. 

In  the  Sistine  Chapel,  at  tho  present  day,  mass  music  is 


1 62  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

given  in  its  perfection.  On  ordinary  occasions  thirty-two 
singers  are  employed  :  eight  sopranos,  eight  altos,  eight  ten- 
ors, and  eight  bassos.  On  grand  festivals  the  number  is 
doubled,  but  very  rarely  is  there  any  increase  of  orchestra- 
tion or  of  instrumental  accompaniment.  The  mass  music 
is  written  with  a  plain  signature,  or  with  a  single  flat  for 
the  clef.  Time  is  beaten  in  minims,  except  in  the  case 
of  -|,  in  which  three  semibreves  are  counted  in  each  bar. 
After  that  part  of  the  mass  called  the  Introit,  the  choir 
takes  up  the  Kyrie  Eleison,  the  Christi  next,  and  then  the 
Glo?*ia,  which  is  generally  a  very  triumphant  portion  of  the 
mass,  although  certain  portions  of  the  mass  are  always  to 
be  taken  in  what  is  called  adagio  time.  The  Credo  fol- 
lows this;  then  the  Offertory,  where  either  a  voluntary  on 
the  organ  or  a  special  solo  is  inserted;  next  the  Sanctus, 
which  is  invariably  a  largo ;  next  comes  the  last  move- 
ment in  the  mass  music,  which  is  the  Agnus  Dei.  After 
this  are  merely  the  responses  and  the  words  of  the  mass, 
which  are  spoken  by  the  priest  or  deacon. 

It  would  be  impossible  to  give  you  in  this  volume  more 
than  a  general  idea  of  the  importance  of  ecclesiastical  mu- 
sic in  the  fifteenth  century,  with  its  effects  upon  the  music 
of  our  own  time.  As  I  have  said  to  yon,  all  churches  are 
now  making  use  of  the  compositions  of  these  early  Italian 
and  German  masters,  and  their  work  has  a  special  signifi- 


7 he  Fugue  a  Useful  Study,  163 

cance  for  the  student  of  to-day.  No  matter  what  words  are 
used  in  any  church  for  the  music  composed  originally  for 
the  Roman  mass,  the  methods  and  treatment  of  that  music 
must  remain  characteristic,  and  to  the  student  they  are 
more  interesting  when  taken  in  connection  with  an  entire 
work.  Mozart's  Twelfth  Mass,  Haydn's  famous  mass  in  B, 
Beethoven's  and  Rossini's  requiems,  several  of  Weber's 
masses,  besides  those  of  earlier  composers,  all  now  furnish 
the  music  for  different  Christian  church  services,  and  it  will 
be  worth  the  student's  time  and  attention  to  make  certain 
distinctions  between  old  traditional  forms:  where  the  plain 
chant  or  early  melodic  form  is  used,  where  an  idea  like  a 
Canto  Fermo  is  worked  out,  and  where  the  general  impulse 
of  the  composer  is  allowed  complete  sway.  Connected  with 
such  a  study  are  certain  points  in  harmony.  For  example, 
take  the  suggestions  offered  by  that  original  Kyrie  of  which 
we  have  spoken,  and  then  the  fugues  in  Bach's  mass  in  B 
minor.  Study  something  about  a  fugue,  and  then  examine 
one  portion  even  of  one  of  these,  and  gather  therefrom  as 
much  material  as  possible  for  the  next  opportunity  you 
have  for  listening  to  treatment  of  the  same  by  the  organist 
in  your  own  church. 


164  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

Ludwig  von  Beethoven. — Boyhood  and  First  Studies. — At  the  Princess 
Lichnowsky's. — Cold  Water  and  Compositions. — An  Amusing  Anec- 
dote.— Sad  Years. — "Adelaide." — Blind! — Last  Days. 

THEKE  is  something  about  a  great  genius  such  as  Bee- 
thoven's which  makes  one  feel  awestruck  with  a  silent  sort 
of  homage  to  which  words  cannot  pay  sufficient  tribute. 
Sculpture  seems  to  do  most,  for  in  the  cold,  still  grandeur 
of  marble  we  can  embody  our  ideas  of  homage  of  a  master 
like  the  one  whose  story  I  wish  to  tell  you  here.  The  de- 
tails of  his  sad  and  anxious  and  fretted  life  seem  to  fall 
away,  to  sink  into  insignificance  ;  his  petty  failings,  the  bur- 
dens which  tried  and  harassed  him  do  not  seem  so  much 
part  of  himself  as  the  work  which  he  has  left  us,  which  is 
immortal,  even  though  he  died  without  realizing  its  great- 
ness, or  its  power  for  influencing  the  whole  musical  world. 
Beethoven's  life  began  and  ended  with  absolutely  no  per- 
sonal satisfactions,  for  even  his  work  was  a  sad  sort  of  re- 
source:  his  heart  when  heavily  burdened  found  refuge  in 
it.  His  work  was  the  result  of  an  instinct,  but  deafness  and 


Early  Life  of  Beethoven.  165 

blindness  overtook  him  in  the  midst  of  giving  the  world 
the  noblest  utterances  of  his  poetic  and  inspired  soul. 

Ludwig  von  Beethoven  was  born  at  Bonn,  December  16, 
1770.  His  family  had  belonged  originally  to  Louvain.  His 
father  and  his  grandfather  were  musicians  in  the  court  band 
of  the  Elector  of  Cologne ;  his  father,  being  a  tenor  singer, 
was  appointed  to  an  official  position  in  1756.  Jean  Bee- 
thoven, the  father  of  our  musician,  married  the  daughter  of 
the  chief  cook  at  Ehrenbreitstein,  a  widow,  who  died  when 
her  son  was  seventeen,  and  who  seems  to  have  been  beloved 
passionately  by  the  boy.  Both  parents,  although  not  very 
well  off  in  this  world's  goods,  loved  music  heartily,  and  see- 
ing signs  of  a  precocious  talent  very  early  in  Ludwig,  gave 
him  every  advantage;  but  the  lad  hated  to  practise,  and  to 
force  him  to  the  piano  the  father  used  to  beat  him  unmer- 
cifully. However,  with  genius  like  his  the  drudgery  of 
learning  was  soon  over,  and  the  child  began  to  feel  an  in- 
fluence towards  composition.  Various  little  things  are  pre- 
served which  he  wrote  between  his  seventh  and  ninth  years, 
his  earliest  publication  being  the  three  sonatas  for  the  piano- 
forte, published  when  he  was  eleven  years  of  age,  in  1781. 
One  Pleiffer,  a  tenor  singer,  who  joined  the  opera  troupe  in 
Bonn,  and  came  to  board  with  the  Beethoven  family,  taught 
him  for  about  a  year,  and  meanwhile  he  learned  the  organ 
from  a  court  organist  who  was  enthusiastic  over  the  child, 


1 66  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

then  scarcely  ten  years  of  age;  and  he  wrote  a  funeral  can- 
tata which  was  performed  by  the  organist,  and  excited  con- 
siderable discussion  in  the  town. 

When  he  was  about  eleven  years  of  age,  Ludwig  accom- 
panied his  mother  to  Holland,  travelling  about  and  per- 
forming at  various  private  houses  where  his  precocious  tal- 
ent roused  positive  enthusiasm,  although  among  the  people 
whom  he  visited  there  was  too  little  technical  knowledge 
to  make  his  genius  really  appreciated.  However,  it  paved 
the  way  for  the  boy's  success  a  little  later,  and  at  all  events 
gave  him  a  certain  amount  of  confidence,  and  enabled  him 
to  try  his  hand  at  improvising,  and  above  all  things  to  criti- 
cise his  own  work. 

It  was  about  this  time,  when  Beethoven  was  not  twelve 
years  of  age,  that  the  new  organist  at  Bonn  appointed  him 
as  his  deputy  during  his  absence  in  Munster,  which  shows 
what  his  ability  must  have  been,  since  the  music  of  the 
chapel  was  of  a  complicated  description,  and  required  skill 
"both  in  the  execution  and  the  understanding  necessary 
for  its  interpretation.  However,  the  boy  did  so  well  that 
Neefe,  the  organist,  declared  he  would  become  a  second 
Mozart. 

Soon  after  this  we  find  Beethoven  visiting  "Papa  Haydn," 
and  presenting  him  with  a  cantata  which  he  had  composed. 
Haydn  encouraged  the  lad  greatly,  and  gave  him  some  les- 


Peculiar  Habits  of  Beethoven.  167 

sons,  but  Beethoven's  inclination  was  more  for  Mozart's 
style  than  that  of  Haydn. 

As  soon  as  it  was  possible  Beethoven  established  him- 
self in  Yienna,  where  Mozart's  sudden  death  after  a  brill- 
iant musical  life  had  roused  the  Viennese  people  to  a  great 
necessity  in  the  art.  So  Beethoven  went  to  work  and  to 
study,  and  quickly  gathered  about  him  a  circle  of  friends, 
among  whom  were  some  valuable  and  appreciative  pa- 
trons. 

At  the  house  of  Prince  Lichnowsky  he  was  always  wel- 
comed, the  host  and  hostess  doing  everything  to  make  him 
comfortable  and  happy,  humoring  his  queer  temper,  his 
rough  sort  of  teasing,  and  the  peculiarities  of  his  dress. 
Beethoven  was  always  a  clumsy,  awkward  figure  in  a  draw- 
ing-room. He  had  a  big  head,  with  a  shock  of  dark  hair,  and 
features  only  redeemed  from  absolute  plainness  by  the  soul 
that  lay  in  the  depths  of  his  dark  eyes  and  the  smile  that 
showed  his  brilliant  white  teeth.  He  cared  nothing  for  his 
appearance,  although  he  was  so  fond  of  washing,  that  one 
of  his  friends  recorded  that  when  really  intent  on  any  com- 
position, it  was  his  habit  to  fill  a  huge  basin  with  water,  and 
from  time  to  time  wash  his  hands  and  arms  violently ; 
meanwhile  he  would  hum  over  his  composition  and  return 
to  his  work  with  new  ardor. 

At  the  Lichnowskys  he  was  humored  in  every  way  pos- 


1 68  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

sible,  the  princess  trying  to  make  him  feel  free  of  all  obli- 
gation ;  but  it  must  sometimes  have  been  hard  to  manage 
him.  For  instance,  to  make  him  feel  that  he  was  of  first 
importance,  the  princess  instructed  her  servants  always  to 
answer  Beethoven's  bell  when  it  rang,  without  waiting  even 
to  attend  to  her  orders. 

The  master,  hearing  of  this,  resented  it  deeply,  and  poor 
as  he  was  insisted  on  having  a  servant  of  his  own.  Anoth- 
er story  of  his  peculiar  sensitiveness  is  of  the  time  when 
they  were  rehearsing  "  Leonora,"  one  of  his  grandest  com- 
positions. It  so  happened  that  the  third  bassoon  was  ab- 
sent, and  Beethoven,  who  was  waiting  to  conduct  the  orches- 
tra, lost  all  patience.  Prince  Lobkowitz,  who  was  present, 
tried  to  make  a  joke  of  it,  and  to  put  him  in  good-humor. 

"What  harm  done?'5  he  said;  "the  first  and  second  bas- 
soon are  here,  don't  mind  a  third !"  Beethoven  nearly 
danced  with  rage;  and  when  the  rehearsal  was  over  he 
started  for  home,  deliberately  crossing  the  Platgoe  Square 
to  the  gates  of  the  Lobkowitz  Palace,  where  he  stood  still 
and  shouted  up  the  entrance,  "  Donkey  of  a  Lobkowitz ! 
Donkey  of  a  Lobkowitz !" 

That  his  friends  loved  and  humored  him  in  spite  of  many 
such  scenes,  shows  us  how  gentle  and  true  a  heart  must  real- 
ly have  beaten  under  his  rough  exterior. 

He  never  married,  although  some  of  his  music,  sonatas 


Beethoven  s  Love  for  /it's  Nephew.  169 

and  songs,  especially  "Adelaide,"  were  dedicated  to  the  wom- 
an he  asked  vainly  to  be  his  wife,  Countess  Guiccardi ;  and 
needing  some  human  being  to  care  for  and  to  make  happy, 
he  adopted  his  nephew  Carl.  I  think  no  story  could  be 
sadder  than  that  of  Beethoven's  love  for  this  wretched  boy, 
who  abused  his  confidence  in  every  way,  and,  indeed,  by  his 
wicked  deceits  broke  the  master's  heart  Beethoven's  let- 
ters are  pathetic  enough,  but  here  and  there  some  words 
sound  like  cries  from  his  very  son).  He  begs  Carl  to  come 
and  see  him — just  to  give  him  an  hour — he  is  so  lonely,  and 
he  has  toiled  and  labored  that  the  boy  might  know  ease 
and  comfort;  but  Carl  was  selfish,  vain,  and  deceitful.  Un- 
less it  were  for  money,  he  had  no  idea  of  spending  any  time 
with  the  uncle  whose  ill-health  and  disappointments  were 
fast  making  him  a  fretful,  melancholy  invalid.  Carl  finally, 
after  doing  everything  disreputable,  enlisted,  and  Beethoven 
was  forced  to  hear  and  know  the  extent  of  his  deceit  and 
villany ;  yet  before  he  died,  the  old  love  and  tenderness  for 
his  adopted  child  stirred  in  him,  fanning  the  spark  that  had 
never  quite  been  extinguished,  and  he  added  a  codicil  to  his 
will — "  I  appoint  my  nephew  Carl  my  sole  heir." 

Friendships  and  his  glorious  work  might  have  done 
much  for  the  master,  but  that  his  terrible  misfortune  of 
deafness  came  so  soon  upon  him. 

It  was  one  day  in  1800  that  he  asked  his  dear  friend  Hies 


170  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

to  walk  out  into  the  woods  with  him.  There  he  acknowl- 
edged to  Hies  how  fast  he  was  growing  deaf,  and  from  that 
hour  he  seems  to  have  felt  that  earthly  joy  was  at  an  end. 
He  could  still  lead  his  own  works,  but  when  the  perform- 
ance was  ended  he  would  have  to  be  turned  gently  around 
to  see  the  applause  he  could  not  hear!  No  wonder  his 
friends  tried  to  humor  his  passing  waywardness  when  he 
was  stricken  with  such  a  grief.  He  had  loved  to  play  and 
to  compose  at  dark,  and  by  holding  his  violin  very  near  his 
face,  for  some  time  he  contrived  to  feel  the  sweet  sounds; 
but  gradually  these  faded  out  of  all  hearing.  At  last  we 
have  a  picture  of  him  standing  among  his  orchestra,  deaf 
to  all,  and  gradually  growing  blind  ! 

The  spectacle,  the  very  thought  of  it  is  so  sad  that  we 
turn  to  his  lonely  death-bed  almost  with  relief.  He  loved 
to  walk,  and  even  when  ill  spent  much  time  roaming  about 
the  country.  "I  wander  about  here  with  music-paper,"  he 
wrote,  "among  the  hills  and  dales  and  valleys,  and  scribble 
a  great  deal.  No  man  on  earth  can  love  the  country  as  I 
do." 

Happily  this  sympathy  with  nature  remained  always  to 
cheer  him,  for,  as  his  eyesight  failed,  he  still  remembered  the 
visions  of  green  and  blossom  which  he  had  seen. 

Although  some  money  was  found  in  his  desk  after  death, 
he  seems,  during  his  life,  to  have  had  a  terrible  struggle 


Death  of  Beethoven.  171 

with  poverty,  and  would  have  died  in  actual  want  but  for 
certain  help  from  England.  Not  one  loving  word  from  the 
nephew  Carl  came  to  cheer  his  last  hours,  and  on  March  26, 
1827,  he  passed  away,  glad  of  a  release  from  life  which 
meant  now  only  pain  and  melancholy  to  the  greatest  mas- 
ter of  his  art  the  world  has  ever  known.  His  tomb  in  Vi- 
enna bears  emblems  of  life  and  death,  with  the  one  word 
.Beethoven. 

To  attempt  a  criticism  of  Beethoven's  work  would  be 
impossible.  I  often  recall  what  I  once  heard  a  famous  mu- 
sician say  when  some  younger  man  was  questioning  the 
master's  work : 

"  We  don't  want  anything  better  than  what  Beethoven 
gave  us,  and  no  one  ever  got  to  tfie  end  of  him  yet" 

How  often  the  student  may  remember  that !  The  varie- 
ty is  infinite;  not  one  sonata,  not  one  symphony  but  might 
contain  study  for  a  lifetime.  Beethoven  did  not  write  im- 
pulsively. It  is  said  that  he  went  over  and  over  his  work; 
and,  as  you  will  find,  it  is  always  full  of  marks  of  expres- 
sion so  carefully  made  that  you  can  be  safe  to  follow  every 
one,  sure  that  it  will  produce  precisely  the  desired  effect. 

A  great  deal  of  discussion  has  gone  on  of  late  years  as  to 
the  time,  or  "  tempo,"  as  musical  people  say,  in  which  the 
sonata  should  be  played,  and  of  late  it  seems  to  me  that 
pianists  are  inclining  to  make  the  tempo  much  more  rapid ; 


1 72  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

but  no  young  student  should  attempt  this,  whatever  they 
may  hear  in  a  concert -room.  Take  it  all  gradually,  for 
study  more  than  performance,  and  master  each  part,  know- 
ing as  much  of  its  meaning  as  you  possibly  can.  No  one 
can  teach  you  more  than  you  can  learn  in  one  sonata  of 
Beethoven's.  No  orchestral  performance  can  do  more  for 
you  than  one  symphony  of  his,  but  critically  examine  his 
part.  Take,  for  instance,  the  opening  movements  of  the 
sonata  popularly  called  the  "Moonlight."  In  that  alone 
lies  the  study  of  half  a  year,  and  yet  how  many  young  peo- 
ple dash  at  it,  all  unconscious  of  what  a  little  investigation 
might  do  for  them.  Remember  it  is  like  a  language,  the 
words  of  which  you  must  learn  before  you  can  express 
yourself.  Every  true  artist  says  something  of  his  own, 
which  it  is  the  part  of  the  student  to  discover  and  then 
repeat  in  a  voice  to  which  he  may  give  an  expression  cf 
his  own. 


The  Sonata  and  Concerto.  173 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

Beethoven  and  the  Concerto. — Explanation  of  this  Form  of  Composition. 
— Viadana. — Difference  between  Composers'  Methods. — Cadenzas,  and 
what  they  mean. 

ALTHOUGH  the  name  of  Beethoven  must  always  be  indel- 
ibly associated  with  the  sonata,  yet  his  modifications  and 
improvements  in  that  form  of  composition  known  as  the 
Concerto  make  it  seem  to  belong  to  the  great  master  in  a 
peculiar  and  permanent  fashion.  Mozart  gave  to  the  con- 
certo its  first  idea  of  permanence,  and  it  was  founded  upon 
the  sonata.  The  name  is  intended  to  express  an  instrument- 
al composition,  which  is  expressly  designed  to  display  the 
skill  of  one  performer  on  an  instrument,  and  which  is  ac- 
companied by  an  orchestra.  The  first  notice  we  have  of 
any  concerto  was  one  written  in  1603  by  a  composer  named 
Viadana,  for  voices  and  organ.  Other  instruments  were 
added  later,  and  in  1686  Torvelli  published  a  concerto  for 
two  violins  and  a  bass.  The  sonata,  as  you  know,  grew  out 
of  the  suite,  and  the  concerto  was  the  result  of  the  sonata, 
but  of  course  a  general  idea  characterizes  them  all.  The 

11 


The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

concertos  of  different  masters  are,  of  course,  as  different  as 
are  their  different  styles,  and  yet  a  certain  set  of  rules  are 
observed  in  their  composition.  A  concerto  consists  of  three 
movements,  while  the  scherzo,  which  is  used  in  the  sonata, 
is  excluded.  The  first  movement  in  Mozart's  concertos  be- 
gins with  what  is  called  a  tutti  passage  for  the  orchestra. 
This  tutti  ends  in  the  original  key  and  not  in  the  dominant 
or  the  relative  major,  as  would  have  to  be  the  case  in  a  so- 
nata if  the  composition  were  in  a  minor  key.  Following 
this  comes  the  solo,  whether  of  piano  or  other  instrument. 
A  repetition  of  the  beginning  follows  as  a  general  rule,  in 
which  the  honors  are  divided  between  the  solo  instrument 
and  the  orchestra.  The  second  subject  is  produced  precisely 
as  we  have  had  in  a  sonata,  and  in  this  the  first  solo  portion 
almost  invariably  is  brought  to  a  brilliant  close  in  the  key 
of  the  dominant  or  the  relative  major.  For  instance,  sup- 
posing it  to  be  written  in  the  key  of  C,  the  solo  in  the  sec- 
ond part  would  end  in  G.  Then  follows  another  tutti,  a 
second  solo,  and,  like  the  sonata,  it  is  worked  up  and  down, 
and  finally  back  to  the  original  key.  Mr.  Prout,  in  an 
admirable  explanation  of  Mozart's  concertos,  mentions  the 
fact  that  in  many  old  concertos,  near  the  end  of  the  last 
tutti,  upon  the  chord  on  the  dominant,  a  pause  is  made  for 
the  introduction  of  a  cadenza  by  the  soloist.  I  have  heard 
this  done  several  times  in  modern  concertos,  notably  in  one 


The  Cadenza.  175 

or  two  of  Beethoven's,  especially  prepared  for  the  Sunday 
concerts  in  Paris,  and  I  have  no  doubt  such  variations  are 
constantly  made.  Beethoven  wrote  many  such  cadenzaa 
for  his  own  concertos.  With  him  the  custom  was  to  con- 
clude the  cadenza  with  a  long  shake  on  the  chord  of  the 
dominant  seventh.  The  orchestra,  then,  in  a  short  but  fine 
passage  concludes  the  movement.  Sometimes  it  is  the  so- 
loist who  is  passive  during  this  pause,  and  the  orchestra 
who  round  the  movement.  This  is  specially  noteworthy  to 
the  young  student,  because  the  cadenza,  being  to  a  certain 
extent  outside  matter,  may  be  subject  to  special  criticism 
and  analysis,  and  is  useful  since  it  must  be  characteristic 
both  of  the  composer's  genius  and  the  skill  of  the  player. 
Beethoven  decided  to  give  greater  prominence  to  the  or- 
chestra in  his  concertos.  Mozart  had  made  the  orchestra 
subservient  to  the  soloist.  Also  Beethoven  connected  the 
second  and  third  movements  in  his  concertos,  examples  of 
which  are  to  be  found  in  the  concertos  in  G  and  E  flat. 
Mendelssohn  followed  this  precedent  so  closely  that  in  the 
piano-forte  concertos  of  G  minor  and  D  minor  the  move- 
ments are  continuous.  In  Beethoven's  concerto  in  G,  and 
the  one  in  E  flat,  he  entirely  broke  away  from  the  long  es- 
tablished custom  of  opening  a  concerto  with  a  tutti  for  the 
orchestra.  The  concerto  in  G  opens  with  the  piano  alone ; 
in  E  flat  the  piano  enters  on  the  second  bar.  Mozart  had 


1 76  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

only  once,  and  then  in  a  concerto  rarely  played,  tried  this 
experiment. 

"We  must  call  the  student's  attention  to  one  more  modifi- 
cation of  Beethoven's.  In  the  concerto  in  E  flat,  Opus 
73,  Beethoven  writes  (instead  of  leaving  the  pause  for  the 
cadenza)  one  of  his  own,  adding  the  note, "  Don't  make  a 
cadenza,  but  go  on  at  once  to  the  following  " — the  cadenza 
being,  from  the  nineteenth  bar,  closely  followed  by  the  or- 
chestra. All  of  these  facts  are  interesting,  and  a  strict  at- 
tention to  them,  when  hearing  or  reading  any  of  the  con- 
certos referred  to,  cannot  fail  to  impress  upon  the  student's 
mind  the  motive  and  the  method  of  the  works  themselves; 
and  they  have  their  strong  significance  in  the  history  of  va- 
rious compositions,  helping  us  to  a  more  intelligent  under- 
standing of  what  we  hear  or  study.  Mendelssohn  did  not 
insert  in  his  piano-forte  concertos  any  cadenza  at  all,  nor 
has  Brahms.  Schumann  and  Raff  have  made  some  varia- 
tions in  the  form  of  the  concerto — Schumann  being  one  of 
the  composers  of  modern  times  who  has  taken  liberties 
with  facility  and  grace ;  and  Liszt's  concertos  for  piano  and 
orchestra  are  composed  upon  a  plan  so  different  from  any 
one  else,  that  they  can  scarcely  be  regarded  in  the  light 
of  any  thing  but  fantasias.  The  concerto  is  regarded  by  cel- 
ebrated pianists  as  the  most  sympathetic  method  of  display- 
ing their  own  powers ;  hence  this  style  of  composition 
should  be  closelv  studied  bv  all  students  of  the  piano-forte. 


Baron  von  Weber.  177 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

Carl  Maria  von  Weber. — Story  of  his  Life. — A  Baby  Prodigy. — Anec- 
dote of  his  Life  at  the  Court  of  Wurtemberg. — "  Der  Freischiltz." — In 
London  -with  Moscheles. — A  Last  Visit. — Asleep. — Overtures  and 
their  Origin. — Structure. — "Weber's  Work. — Mendelssohn's  Use  of  the 
Term. — Overtures  of  English  Composers. 

DURING  the  year  1784  a  German  nobleman  named  Yon 
Weber  arrived  in  Vienna  with  his  little  children,  whose 
musical  abilities  were  so  marked  that  the  father  determined 
to  give  them  every  advantage  within  his  power.  But  Bar- 
on von  Weber  was  poor  and  reckless.  He  had  always  been 
a  spendthrift,  and  was  noted  for  his  eccentric  habits  and 
ideas.  Being  the  uncle  of  Mozart,  he  imagined  that  in  Vi- 
enna he  might  force  his  children  into  a  place  as  prominent 
as  that  filled  by  the  famous  young  composer.  But  this  was 
not  to  be  the  case.  His  sons  were  placed  under  the  care  of 
"Papa  Haydn,"  but  did  not  distinguish  themselves;  and 
meanwhile  the  penniless,  good-looking  father,  a  widower 
of  fifty,  fell  in  love  with  the  very  young  daughter  of  his 
landlord,  a  beautiful  girl  of  sixteen,  who  seems  to  have  con- 
sented readily  to  marry  him. 


178  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

The  newly  wedded  pair  went  almost  at  once  to  the  town 
of  Eutin,  where  the  Herr  Baron  was  offered  the  place  of 
Stadtmiusikant,  or  town  musician.  This  was  rather  a  down- 
ward step,  but  it  at  least  gave  his  little  wife  food  and  shel- 
ter. Old  Weber  seemed  to  have  no  idea  that  she  needed 
more  in  her  life  than  its  actual  necessaries.  He  treated  her 
harshly,  if  not  with  absolute  cruelty,  and  in  1798,  when  her 
one  child,  Carl  Maria  von  Weber,  was  eleven  years  of  age, 
the  poor  little  mother  faded  out  of  life. 

Carl  was  born  at  Eutin  in  1786.  He  was  always  delicate, 
sensitive,  and  over-studious,  and  from  his  birth  his  rough- 
tempered  father  determined  to  make  a  musical  prodigy  of 
him.  What  hours  of  suffering  he  must  have  endured  as  a 
mere  baby,  forced  to  sit  at  the  piano,  his  little  fingers  strain- 
ed upon  the  keys,  while  his  father,  with  a  baton  that  could 
any  moment  become  a  rod,  stood  over  him  ! 

As  a  mere  child  Weber  began  to  compose,  and  his  father 
carried  him  about  from  place  to  place,  sometimes  staying 
long  enough  to  have  one  master  really  influence  the  boy, 
but  rarely  giving  him  time  to  think  out  carefully  the  mu- 
sic that  he  was  urged  on  to  compose.  Much  of  his  time 
was  passed  behind  the  scenes  of  provincial  theatres ;  and  al- 
though the  influence  of  this  sort  of  life  on  his  moral  char- 
acter could  not  have  been  good,  it  helped  him  when  he 
came  to  write  for  the  stage.  He  learned  by  constant  ob- 


CARL    MARIA    VOX    WEBER. 


Von  Weber  and  the  King  of  Wurt  ember g.         181 

servation  everything  connected  with  the  workings  of  the 
opera. 

After  a  yonth  spent  in  many  wanderings,  and  with  hard- 
ships and  disappointments  of  various  kinds,  young  Weber, 
at  twenty-one,  was  appointed  private  secretary  to  the  broth- 
er of  the  King  of  Wurternberg,  and  in  this  position  he 
might  have  been  successful  but  for  a  curious  quarrel  with 
the  king. 

This  monarch  was  a  man  of  low  tastes,  coarse  manners, 
and  extremely  bad  temper.  Poor  Weber  was  often  his  vic- 
tim, for  in  his  character  of  the  duke's  secretary  he  had  to 
beg  from  the  king  whenever  his  Majesty's  very  reckles? 
brother  needed  money  or  any  other  royal  favor.  On  such 
occasions  the  king  vented  all  his  wrath  on  Weber,  and 
treated  him  at  times  with  insult  and  contempt.  One  day, 
after  an  unusually  wild  scene  with  the  king,  Weber  left 
the  royal  apartments,  feeling  as  if  he  could  no  longer  en- 
dure such  an  existence.  He  stumbled  against  an  untidy- 
looking  old  woman,  who  inquired  where  she  could  find  the 
royal  washer-woman. 

Weber  was  still  boiling  over  with  rage  he  had  been  com- 
pelled to  conceal  in  the  king's  presence,  and  on  a  mad  im- 
pulse he  pointed  to  the  door  of  the  king's  cabinet,  saying, 
"  There !"  In  walked  the  unsuspicious  old  woman,  who, 
without  recognizing  the  king,  informed  his  Majesty  that 


1 82  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

the  young  gentleman  outside  had  told  her  she  would  find 
the  washer-woman  there.  The  king,  who  was  well-known 
to  hate  old  women,  sprang  up,  poured  forth  a  volley  upon 
the  terrified  intruder,  and  ordered  Weber  to  be  thrown  into 
prison  at  once.  Later  he  was  released;  but  the  incident 
was  never  forgotten  by  the  king,  who,  when  an  opportuni- 
ty came,  revenged  himself. 

Weber's  father  had  become  involved  in  business  difficul- 
ties, and  Carl  generously  tried  to  shield  the  old  man  from 
disgrace.  But  while  Carl's  opera  of  St.  Sylvana  was  in  re- 
hearsal, and  likely  to  make  a  great  success,  the  king  had 
both  father  and  son  arrested.  A  mock  trial  was  arranged, 
and  the  king  himself  presided  over  it  with  his  usual  fury 
of  temper  and  expression.  Young  Weber  remained  calm 
and  dignified,  even  when  he  listened  to  the  sentence  of  ban- 
ishment pronounced  upon  his  father  and  himself,  and  left 
Wurtemberg  completely  resolved  to  devote  all  his  heart 
and  mind  to  the  pursuit  of  music. 

A  new  era  in  his  life  followed.  He  wrote  with  clearer 
mind  and  greater  success,  and  as  soon  as  he  freed  himself 
from  certain  evil  influences  of  his  life,  the  very  best  part  of 
his  nature  developed.  It  is  comforting  to  think  how  hap- 
py Weber  was  in  his  marriage.  His  wife  was  a  young  art- 
ist, of  exquisite  temperament  and  disposition,  whom  he 
loved  devotedly,  and  who  made  his  home-life  as  perfect  as 


"Der  Freischiitz"  183 

it  could  be,  when  we  remember  how  many  cares  he  had, 
and  that  for  years  he  suffered  with  a  fatal  disease.  It  was 
for  his  wife,  his  dear  Lina,  that  he  composed  the  "  Invita- 
tion to  the  Waltz,"  ever  since  so  famous  as  a  piano-forte 
piece,  and  it  was  under  much  of  her  inspiration  that  he 
wrote  the  opera  of  "  Der  Freischiitz." 

This  great  work  was  performed  for  the  first  time  in  Ber- 
lin, in  1821,  and  Weber  and  his  wife  spent  some  time  in 
that  city  preparing  for  its  production.  In  those  days,  even 
more  than  at  present,  musicians  suffered  greatly  from  the 
effects  of  their  rivals  to  lower  them  and  their  work  in  pub- 
lic estimation,  and  Weber  was  not  spared  such  annoyances. 
But  he  felt  an  enthusiasm  in  his  art  which  entirely  mas- 
tered this  petty  side  of  life ;  and  Sir  Julius  Benedict,  then 
his  pupil,  tells  us  how  Weber  spent  the  day  preceding  the 
production  of  the  opera.  He  passed  some  time  at  the 
piano,  going  over  a  new  work  upon  which  he  was  engaged, 
and  gave  Sir  Julius  and  Lina  the  ideal  story  he  had  in  it. 
The  music  was  the  since  famous  concert  piece  in  F  minor, 
and  it  seemed  that  never  had  the  master  played  better  or 
been  in  a  calmer  and  loftier  mood.  He  then  took  a  light 
dinner  and  had  a  little  rest,  and  so,  with  his  wife  and  fa- 
vorite pupil,  went  to  the  opera-house.  A  great  audience 
was  assembled,  and  among  them  a  little  bright-eyed  boy, 
who  sat  entranced,  an  eager  listener  at  his  father's  side. 


184  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

The  boy  was  destined  later  to  be  famous  as  Felix  Mendels- 
sohn -  Bartboldy.  The  success  was  complete.  The  com- 
poser was  received  like  a  hero  of  victory,  and  slight  and 
awkward  as  he  was,  he  stood  among  his  friends  great  for 
that  hour  at  least.  The  royalty  of  genius  was  about  him, 
and  every  one  paid  homage  to  it. 

Unhappily  Weber  was  not  always  destined  to  such  tri- 
umphs. Five  years  passed  away,  and  we  find  him  in  Lon- 
don, where  he  was  already  famous  as  the  composer  of  sev- 
eral operas — "  Der  Freischiitz,"  "  Euryanthe,"  "  Oberon." 
But  though  the  latter  proved  a  great  success,  the  public  did 
not  receive  Weber  as  his  friends  felt  that  he  deserved  to 
be  received.  Moscheles,  the  composer  and  musician,  the 
loyal,  earnest  friend  of  art  and  its  disciples,  with  Sir  George 
Smart  and  several  others,  did  all  that  they  could  to  make 
Weber  a  successful,  happy  visitor  in  the  English  capital ; 
but  Weber  was  fast  dying,  and  every  trouble  in  his  public 
life  seemed  to  reduce  his  failing  strength. 

A  dear  old  friend  has  told  me  of  her  last  visit  from 
Weber — how  he  toiled  up-stairs  to  her  bright  drawing-room, 
and,  sinking  into  a  chair,  declared  himself  too  ill  to  have 
ventured  out.  But  even  at  the  very  last  he  continued  pa- 
tient and  gentle.  On  the  evening  of  the  4th  of  June,  1826, 
his  friends  saw  him  for  the  last  time.  As  usual,  he  retired 
alone  and  bolted  his  door.  In  the  morning  the  servant 


Meaning  of  the  Word  "  Overture"  185 

who  went  to  call  him  got  no  response.  He  hastened  to  Sir 
George  Smart,  who  with  Moscheles  burst  into  his  room. 
They  found  him  lying  dead,  as  in  a  peaceful  sleep,  his  head 
resting  on  his  arm,  his  expression  one  of  pure  and  gentle 
repose.* 

The  meaning  of  the  word  overture  is  literally  opening, 
and  in  its  original  use  had  reference  to  the  prelude  to  an 
opera ;  but  after  the  close  of  the  seventeenth  century  it 
began  to  take  form  more  as  a  special  kind  of  composition, 
and  later  came  to  be  considered  as  of  direct  musical  impor- 
tance. In  the  time  of  the  composer  Lulli,  the  overture  was 
only  a  sort  of  introduction  in  very  slow  time,  occasionally 
followed  by  an  allegro,  with  certain  repetition  and  sugges- 
tions of  the  music  which  was  to  follow  it.  Handel  gave 
the  overture  a  prominent  place  and  character.  Gluck  strove 
to  identify  the  music  of  his  overtures  with  what  was  to  fol- 
low in  the  opera,  and  at  the  same  time  to  preserve  its  own 
characteristics. 

The  overture  has  shown  in  many  instances  the  same  prin- 
ciples of  structure  which  belong  to  the  first  or  second  move- 
ments of  a  symphony  or  a  sonata,  and  Rossini,  who  has 


*  A  dear  friend  of  Weber  told  me  that  it  was  quite  untrue  that  the 
so-called  "  Weber's  last  Waltz  "  was  found  under  his  pillow.  It  was  not 
even  written  by  him,  but  by  one  of  his  pupils. 


1 86  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

composed  admirable  overtures,  made  a  special  point  of  what 
is  called  the  crescendo.  (Note  in  his  work  also  the  use  of 
the  dominant  of  the  key  before  the  tonic.)  Beethoven  is 
considered  to  have  outrivalled  all  his  predecessors  in  No.  3 
of  the  four  overtures  which  he  wrote  for  his  grand  opera 
of  "  Fidelio."  The  theme  of  the  opera  is  exquisitely  por- 
trayed in  this  overture,  and  for  dramatic  effect  can  scarcely 
be  excelled.  Weber's  overtures  to  his  operas  take  so  dis- 
tinct a  place  in  the  history  of  music  that  his  name  must  be 
forever  associated  with  this  form  of  composition  where  it  is 
used  as  a  prelude.  In  the  overture  to  "  Der  Freischiitz  " 
he  makes  use  of  the  orchestra  in  the  most  skilful  and  ingen- 
ious manner,  suggesting  all  the  characteristics  of  the  opera 
in  the  most  masterly  style;  and  unless  we  consider  Wagner's 
overture  to  "  Lohengrin  "  or  the  "  Tannhauser,"  no  modern 
composer  has  rivalled  him. 

The  name  as  well  as  the  form  of  overture  now  refers  also 
to  a  special  orchestral  piece  intended  for  performance  in 
public,  whereby  the  composer  can  illustrate  some  special 
allegorical  or  poetical  subject.  Mendelssohn's  overtures 
known  as  the  "  Hebrides,"  "  A  Calm  Sea  and  a  Prosperous 
Yoyage,"  are  famous  examples  of  this  kind,  and  the  Shake- 
spearian prelude  which  he  composed  as  a  boy,  and  which 
he  later  combined  with  more  dramatic  music  for  "  Midsum- 
mer Night's  Dream,"  is  regarded  as  a  surprising  work  of  art 


RICHARD   WAGNEU. 


Introduction  and  Preludes.  1 87 

and  sentiment.  Berlioz,  Schumann,  Sterndale-Bennett,  Sir 
Julius  Benedict,  and  many  other  composers  of  modern 
times,  have  given  special  attention  to  overtures  of  this  kind, 
and  in  studying  the  subject  try  to  investigate  also  those 
forms  of  composition  known  as  Introductions  and  Preludes, 
and  remember  that  the  Overture  and  Symphony  have  much 
in  common. 


1 88  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

The  Orchestra  of  Yesterday  and  To-day. — Its  Origin. — Distinction  be- 
tween Orchestras  and  Bands. — A  Wedding  Celebration  in  the  Six- 
teenth Century.— The  Due  de  Joyeuse.— Lutes  and  Viols. — The  First 
Orchestra  on  Record. — Italian  Developments. — Scarlatti's  Obligate. — 
One  Hundred  Years  of  Progress. — List  of  Instruments.— Chamber 
Music. — A  Conductor's  Responsibility. — The  First  Use  of  the  Baton. 
— Mendelssohn's  Facility  in  remembering  Work.  — An  old  Sketch-book. 

THROUGHOUT  the  story  of  music  and  musicians,  so  far  as 
we  have  been  able  to  follow  it,  you  will  remember  certain 
indications  or  suggestions  here  and  there  of  what  may  be 
considered  the  beginning  of  the  orchestra,  and  in  this  chap- 
ter I  wish  to  tell  you  something  more  definite  concerning 
it,  before  reaching  the  life  of  a  famous  leader  or  conductor 
— Felix  Mendelssohn-Bartholdy. 

When  you  attend  a  concert  and  see  before  you  the  order- 
ly and  systematically  arranged  rows  of  musicians ;  when  you 
listen  to  their  rendering  of  some  fine  work,  such  as  Beetho- 
ven's Fourth,  Fifth,  or  Ninth  Symphony,  some  overture  of 
Weber's,  some  concerto  of  Mendelssohn's  or  symphony  of 
Bach's,  it  will  be  interesting  to  you  to  have  learned  whence 


Distinction  between  an  Orchestra  and  a  Band.    189 

came  the  knowledge,  or  I  may  say  the  science,  of  this  ar- 
rangement. The  story  of  the  orchestra  will  tell  you  this. 

The  word  is  taken  from  the  Greek.  It  really  means  an 
open  space  where  people  sit,  but  in  the  present  acceptation 
of  the  term  it  expresses  a  place  for  an  instrumental  band 
and  a  chorus ;  and  properly  speaking,  an  orchestra  must  sit. 

This  is  one  of  the  chief  distinctions  between  an  orchestra 
and  a  band.  Bands,  by  right,  stand  while  they  play,  orches- 
tras ought  to  sit — that  is,  unless  the  weight  of  their  instru- 
ments compels  them  to  stand.  Besides  this  distinction,  a 
band  is  composed  of  wind  instruments ;  an  orchestra  has 
both  wind  and  stringed  instruments. 

The  first  orchestra  of  which  we  have  any  record  suffi- 
ciently correct  to  make  us  certain  that  such  a  term  could  be 
applied  to  it,  was  in  the  sixteenth  century. 

In  France  there  lived  a  certain  famous  nobleman,  the 
Due  de  Joyeuse.  The  splendor  and  beauty  of  his  enter- 
tainments were  renowned,  and  he  was  noted  for  his  interest 
in  everything  which  appertained  to  the  art  of  music.  Wan- 
dering minstrels  always  found  a  hospitable  shelter  within 
his  gates.  Even  the  most  ordinary  dancers  of  the  time  were 
welcomed,  provided  they  could  accompany  themselves  upon 
any  musical  instrument,  and  "  dance  therewith  tunefully  and 
harmoniously."  At  that  time  lutes,  viols,  and  flutes  of  vari- 
ous kinds  were  used  with  cornets,  drums,  and  trumpets,  and 


190  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

some  instruments  which  had  been  brought  to  Europe  by  re- 
turning Crusaders.  These  were  combined  together  in  a  sort 
of  rude  fashion,  but  with  no  reference  to  harmony  or  their 
relation  to  each  other ;  for  which  reason,  as  you  may  well 
imagine,  performances  upon  them,  however  numerous  or 
skilled  the  players,  could  scarcely  be  considered  orchestral. 
However,  the  Due  de  Joyeuse  believed  that  something  bet- 
ter might  be  done.  On  the  occasion  of  his  marriage  with 
the  Lady  Margaret  of  Lorraine,  he  and  some  of  his  musical 
friends  determined  upon  producing  something  decidedly 
novel  in  the  way  of  musical  entertainment  out  of  the  abun- 
dance of  crude  material  before  them.  An  orchestra  with  a 
certain  degree  of  harmony  in  arrangement  was  the  result. 
This  was  in  1581.  Old  accounts  still  exist  of  this  perform- 
ance given  at  the  Chateau  de  Montiers.  It  was  called  the 
"Ballet  comique  de  la  Koyne,"  and  although  as  an  orches- 
tral performance  it  had  in  it  the  same  elements  which  make 
it  appear  to  us  almost  absurd,  at  the  same  time  there  was 
the  foundation  laid  for  the  genuine  orchestra.  "We  read 
that  "ballet-dancers  in  full  dress"  performed  upon  the  vio- 
lins, while  others  played  upon  flutes  and  some  upon  harps, 
the  entire  spectacle  being  a  very  gorgeous  and  brilliant  one, 
and  the  music  considered  by  the  spectators  as  something 
novel  and  delightful. 

From  this  point  we  can  follow  the  story  of  the  orchestra 


Improvement  of  the  Orchestra.  191 

rapidly.  In  Italy  the  impulse  towards  music  was  so  wide- 
spread that  the  orchestra  was  speedily  developed.  lu  1600 
we  read  of  one  as  attached  to  an  oratorio,  and  a  quaint  sug- 
gestion is  offered  by  the  composer  of  the  oratorio.  He  de- 
sires that  the  characters  in  the  drama  should  be  asked  to 
carry  instruments  in  their  hands,  and  play,  or  seem  to  play, 
during  the  symphonies ! 

When  music  became  very  dramatic  in  form,  when  oratorio 
and  opera  developed  an  interest  in  special  accompanists,  the 
orchestra  naturally  grew  in  strength  and  proportion,  and 
asserted  itself  as  a  distinct  form  of  musical  performance. 
Scarlatti  wrote  fine  music  for  two  violins — a  viola  and  bass 
— making  use  of  them  exactly  as  all  composers  in  every 
school  of  music  have  ever  since.  According  to  Dr.  Burney, 
a  well-known  authority  at  the  end  of  the  last  century,  Scar- 
latti wrote  an  obligate  especially  for  one  instrument  in  the 
orchestra. 

Within  a  hundred  years  from  that  performance  at  the 
Chateau  de  Montiers  the  orchestra  had  reached  a  point  when 
we  can  find  in  it  all  the  elements  now  in  use.  The  stringed 
band  was  the  foundation  then  as  now,  and  wind  instruments 
were  used  to  "  enlarge  or  to  beautify  the  structure  of  the 
rest  by  its  efforts,  and  separated  by  its  firm  tone  and  massive 
proportions."  Bach  entered  thoroughly  into  the  spirit  of 
the  orchestra,  and  arranged  his  work  for  it  with  the  greatest 

12 


192  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

possible  regard  for  delicacy  and  expression.  He  objected 
to  making  his  "  effects  "  too  powerful,  having  a  distaste  for 
the  thunderous  in  sound  or  the  overwhelming,  and  accord- 
ingly rnuch  of  his  orchestral  music  is  so  arranged  that  many 
critics  even  of  the  present  day  consider  it  thin  and  ineffect- 
ive. But  his  purpose  was  not  so  much  to  display  the  power 
and  figure  of  an  orchestra  as  to  make  the  instruments  carry 
out  the  idea  of  spirit  and  finish  in  the  composer's  work,  and 
at  the  same  time  to  support  it  by  a  volume  of  sound  with- 
out doing  anything  to  produce  too  great  a  strain  upon  the 
hearer's  capacity.  Handel,  Mozart,  and  Beethoven  worked 
at  the  orchestra  indefatigably,  realizing  its  capabilities  and 
appreciating  that  a  great  field  lay  before  them  ;  that,  of  ne- 
cessity, much  more  could  be  done  than  had  ever  been  at- 
tempted with  a  finely  organized  and  conducted  orchestra. 

The  most  accomplished  pianist  can  learn  a  constant  lesson 
from  hearing  a  good  orchestra  perform  the  well-known 
works  of  great  masters;  and  in  listening  to  any  such  per- 
formance try  to  observe  carefully  the  different  instruments, 
how  they  are  used,  to  what  purpose  the  composer  has  put 
them,  and  precisely  how  far  each  one  influences  the  whole. 
A  most  interesting  and  useful  study  is  to  find  out  before 
hearing  any  orchestral  performance  the  names  of  the  vari- 
ous instruments  used,  and  by  means  of  a  dictionary  or  en- 
cyclopaedia to  learn  all  that  is  possible  about  them,  the  result 


Chamber  Music.  193 

of  which  will  be  that  your  understanding  and  your  enter- 
tainment will  be  decidedly  enlarged,  and  no  doubt  a  concert 
seem  thereby  to  be  transformed  to  you. 

Here  is  a  list  of  the  instruments  of  a  complete  orchestra: 
first  violins,  15 ;  second  violins,  12 ;  violas,  10 ;  violoncellos, 
10 ;  double  basses,  8 ;  flutes,  2;  piccolo,  1 ;  oboes,  cor  Anglais, 
clarionet,  corno  di  bassetto,  bassoon,  double  bassoon,  trum- 
pets, horns,  trombones,  timpani,  cornet-a-piston,  bass  trum- 
pet, tenor  tuba,  ophicleide,  contra  bass  tuba,  harp,  bass 
drum,  cymbals.  The  number  and  kind  of  instruments  can 
of  course  be  varied  to  a  certain  extent  without  losing  the 
effect. 

Chamber  music  differs  from  ordinary  orchestras  because 
none  of  the  instruments  are  doubled — that  is,  only  one  of  a 
kind  is  included  in  it,  and  it  is  adapted  to  a  small  number 
of  performers  on  stringed  instruments. 

Until  the  beginning  of  this  century  the  conductor  of  an 
orchestra  sat  at  a  harpsichord  among  the  instruments,  and 
his  regulation  of  the  orchestra  seems  to  have  consisted  only 
in  keeping  a  watchful  eye  upon  them  and  now  and  then 
•triking  a  few  chords  when  there  was  danger  of  their  going 
wrong.  Even  as  late  as  1829  Mendelssohn  conducted  in 
this  fashion  his  symphony  in  C  minor  at  the  Philharmonic 
Concert  in  London ;  but  very  speedily  the  baton  took  its 
place,  and  about  the  same  time  the  position  of  the  so-called 


194  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

"leader"  of  the  orchestra  became  obsolete.  The  leader's 
duty  had  been  to  keep  the  band  together,  but,  as  he  stood 
among  the  violins,  he  had  very  slight  control  upon  the  larger 
number  of  the  orchestra.  In  the  autobiography  of  Spohr 
the  musician,  he  gives  us  a  picture  of  the  early  condition  of 
things,  and  also  of  a  concert  at  which  he  was  to  direct,  when 
he  insisted  upon  leading  with  a  baton  and  directing  from 
the  front.  "  Henceforth,"  to  quote  the  autobiography,  "  no 
one  was  ever  again  seen  seated  at  the  piano  during  the  per- 
formance of  symphonies  and  overtures."  A  series  of  con- 
certs given  in  1845  in  London  were  conducted  by  Sir  Henry 
Bishop  and  Moscheles,  the  conductor  working  indefatiga- 
bly  then,  as  at  all  times,  for  the  advancement  of  what  was 
best  in  musical  art,  never  desiring  to  promote  his  own  per- 
sonal interests  or  even  popularity  at  the  risk  of  anything 
which  should  retard  the  progress  of  science  and  culture  in 
music.  Believing  firmly  that  the  true  way  to  conduct  an 
orchestra  was  in  the  present  approved  fashion,  he  strove 
to  forward  it,  and  at  length,  in  1846,  Signor,  now  Sir  Mi- 
chael, Costa  announced  a  concert,  and  his  name  simply  as 
"conductor"  appeared  upon  the  programme  for  the  first 
time.  The  part  of  the  conductor  cannot  be  too  highly  val- 
ued. Upon  his  enthusiasm,  as  well  as  his  knowledge  of 
the  work  being  performed,  depends  largely  the  success  of 
any  performance ;  and  the  finest  feeling  must  be  combined 


Mendelssohn  a  Great  Conductor.  195 

with  the  very  finest  qualities  of  a  trne  musician,  and  at  the 
same  time  conductor  and  performers  must  be  entirely  in 
harmony  and  have  worked  their  way  through  many  rehears- 
als, so  that  a  familiarity  exists,  without  which  their  final 
performance  cannot  be  a  sympathetic  one.  Among  the 
many  conductors  of  the  past  century  and  a  half  Handel  and 
Mendelssohn  rank  supreme,  but  the  latter  united  all  the 
qualities  of  a  true-born  conductor  with  those  of  a  thorough 
musician.  Beethoven  could  not  conduct,  not  only  because 
of  his  deafness,  but  because  of  his  curious  disposition.  Schu- 
mann, who  had  certain  elements  of  a  fine  conductor  about 
him,  was  too  absent-minded  for  the  work.  Moscheles  would 
have  been  one  of  the  first  conductors  of  the  age  had  he  had 
time  to  devote  to  the  work ;  and  Mendelssohn  stands  in  this 
century  entirely  alone.  The  conductor  must  study  the  score, 
must  correct  all  the  parts,  often  rearrange  them,  see  that 
they  are  perfectly  marked,  and  take  the  responsibility  of 
the  interpretation  given  the  work  which  his  orchestra  per- 
forms. 

Yery  many  stories  are  told  by  Mendelssohn's  friends  of 
how,  on  certain  occasions,  when  parts  of  the  score  were 
found  missing,  just  as  the  men  were  taking  their  places,  the 
sympathetic  conductor  always  contrived  in  some  fashion  to 
get  the  work  together  again:  his  marvellous  faculty  for 
rapid  musical  work  often  coming  to  the  rescue  of  himself 


196  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

and  his  band.  Once,  on  a  very  important  occasion,  while 
the  audience  were  waiting,  he  dashed  off  a  whole  part, 
writing  it  from  memory. 

In  an  old  house  in  London  there  was,  not  long  ago,  a  book 
full  of  Mendelssohn's  sketches,  when  he  and  Moscheles  were 
on  their  concert  tour;  and  looking  at  them — some  bright, 
some  humorous,  all  happy  and  kindly — one  can  fancy  just 
how  much  heart  and  soul  Mendelssohn  put  into  his  work. 
He  put  his  fun  into  it  as  well  as  his  pathos.  Indeed,  what- 
ever the  great  musician  had,  he  gave  it  all  to  those  around 
him  when  he  stood  in  the  conductor's  place. 


Felix  Mendelssohn-Bartholdy.  197 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

Felix  Mendelssohn-Bartholdy. — "Work  and  Play. — The  Juvenile  Orchestra. 
— A  Pretty  Picture.— Fanny  Mendelssohn.— A  Famous  Journey. — A 
Letter  from  Goethe's  House. — Moscheles  in  Berlin. — A  Memorable 
Evening. — The  E-flat  Concerto. — Work  and  Recreation. — Fanny's 
Marriage. — In  London  and  at  Birmingham. — "With  the  Moscheleses. — 
A  Happy  Marriage. — Founding  the  Conservatory  of  Leipsic. — Fanny's 
Sudden  Death. — The  "Elijah." — "And  behold,  the  Lord  passed  by." 
— Last  Days. 

ABOUT  the  year  1820,  a  musician  in  Berlin  name  Ferdi- 
nand Hiller  used  to  watch  with  interest  the  games  played 
by  certain  clever  little  fellows  led  by  a  particularly  hand- 
some lad  of  ten  years.  This  boy,  whose  name  was  Felix 
Mendelssohn-Bartholdy,  was  quaintly  dressed,  and  had  the 
air  of  distinction  which  was  natural  to  the  Mendelssohn 
family.  He  entered  into  every  game  with  such  spirit  and 
delight  that  Hiller  was  amazed  to  learn  that  he  was  a  mu- 
sical genius  whose  composition  and  performances  were  all 
known  to  an  intimate  circle  of  friends. 

Mendelssohn's  father  was  a  banker  living  in  the  Leip- 
zigerstrasse,  Berlin,  and  Felix,  his  eldest  son,  was  born  in 
1809.  He  had  one  brother  and  two  sisters,  and  never  was 


198  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

a  family  circle  more  thoroughly  happy  and  harmonious. 
Music  was  highly  esteemed  in  the  household,  but,  at  the 
same  time,  it  was  a  disappointment  when  Felix  decided 
upon  a  musical  career.  However,  the  parents  were  wise 
enough  to  see  that  their  son  possessed  real  genius,  and  so 
they  set  to  work  to  give  him  the  best  possible  education. 
So  keen  was  his  eye  and  ear  for  harmony  that  when  he  was 
only  seven  years  old,  and  took  lessons  of  old  Zelter,  he 
called  the  master's  attention  to  a  curious  error  in  a  piece  of 
Sebastian  Bach's.  This  was  the  recurrence  of  six  consecu- 
tive fifths,  and  it  was  this  remarkable  keenness  of  ear  which 
made  him  later  BO  remarkable  as  the  conductor  of  a  great 
orchestra. 

Felix  composed,  as  I  have  said,  while  he  was  still  romp- 
ing with  little  playfellows  in  the  Berlin  streets,  and  once  a 
week  his  father  allowed  him  to  assemble  certain  young  mu- 
sicians and  lead  them  through  some  orchestral  work.  One 
of  his  most  enthusiastic  friends  has  given  us  a  charming 
picture  of  these  "  practices" — the  group  of  earnest  perform- 
ers, the  boy  conductor,  still  wearing  his  childish  costume 
the  round  jacket  and  deep  collar,  standing  on  a  raised  plat- 
form, baton  in  hand,  solemnly  and  most  correctly  directing 
the  players. 

Felix's  sister  Fanny  was  his  special  favorite  and  compan- 
ion. She  was  a  brilliant  musician  and  composed  readily, 


FELIX   MEXDELSSOHN-BAIITHOLDY. 


Mendelssohn's  Visit  to  Goethe.  201 

although  with  less  genius,  perhaps,  than  Felix.  Several  of 
the  "Songs  without  Words"  were  written  by  her.  Never 
was  there  the  slightest  jealousy  or  any  misunderstanding 
between  the  two ;  their  work  and  their  recreation  went  to- 
gether in  complete  harmony.  When  Felix  composed  any- 
thing, he  could  scarcely  wait  to  show  it  to  his  dear  "  Fance," 
as  he  would  call  her.  Everything  which  the  two  young  peo- 
ple liked  they  shared  with  each  other,  and  yet  the  two  lit- 
tle ones,  Paul  and  Rebecca,  were  not  shut  out.  It  was  a 
charming  quartet,  and  no  wonder  that  the  friends  of  the 
Mendelssohns  used  to  fear  the  young  people  would  be  spoil- 
ed by  knowing  only  the  happy,  prosperous  side  of  life. 

In  1821  Felix  made  a  famous  journey.  Zelter,  his  old 
master,  was  a  dear  friend  of  the  poet  Goethe,  and  through 
him  came  an  invitation  to  the  little  boy  to  pass  a  fortnight 
in  the  house  of  the  great  man.  It  was  certainly  a  memora- 
ble visit,  and  Felix,  although  only  eleven  years  of  age,  wrote 
charming  letters  to  his  parents  and  his  sister,  describing  his 
experiences.  From  the  first  of  these  I  quote: 

"  He  [Goethe]  does  not  look  like  a  man  of  seventy-three ; 
rather  of  fifty.  After  dinner  Fraulein  Ulrike,  Fran  von 
Goethe's  sister,  asked  him  for  a  kiss,  and  I  followed  her  ex- 
ample. Every  morning  I  have  a  kiss  from  the  author  of 
1  Faust'  and  ( Werther,1  and  every  afternoon  two  kisses  from 
father  and  friend  Goethe.  Think  of  that !  In  the  after- 


2O2  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

noon  I  played  to  Goethe  for  about  two  hours,  partly  fugues 
of  Bach,  and  partly  improvisations.  In  the  evening  they 
arranged  a  whist-table,  and  Professor  Zelter,  who  took  a 
hand,  said,  '"Whist  means  that  you  are  to  hold  your 
tongue.' " 

The  attention  that  he  received  during  this  visit  does  not 
seem  to  have  touched  Felix's  sweet  nature  with  anything 
like  affectation  or  vanity.  He  returned  home  ready  to  en- 
ter into  family  affairs,  studies,  recreation,  and  the  like,  and 
to  give  them  all  accounts  of  his  sojourn  in  Weimar,  and 
apparently  forgetting  most  of  the  compliments  which  had 
been  paid  him  there. 

In  1824  concerts  of  fine  instrumental  music  were  rare 
even  in  Berlin,  and  so  the  advent  of  Ignaz  Moscheles,  a  fa- 
mous virtuoso  and  composer,  was  hailed  with  delight,  and 
the  excitement  which  attended  the  purchase  of  tickets  for 
his  first  concert  was  something  surprising.  Moscheles  was 
to  play  Bach,  Beethoven,  and  Mozart,  and  also  a  concerto 
of  his  own — the  since  famous  one  in  E-flat  major,  and  which 
is  a  tremendous  work  for  any  pianist  even  at  the  present 
day.  While  he  was  performing  this  concerto,  Moscheles 
observed  among  his  listeners  a  slight,  handsome  lad  with 
flushed  face,  and  dark  eyes  brilliant  with  excitement.  Now 
and  then  the  boy  would  glance  across  at  a  tall  gentleman 
not  far  away,  who  always  responded  to  his  look  with  a 


Moscheles  and  Mendelssohn.  203 

pleasant  smile  and  nod  of  his  head.  Moscheles  looked  also 
at  the  tall  gentleman,  and  as  soon  as  he  had  finished  playing 
he  approached  him  and  inquired  cordially, 

"  Now,  friend  Kapellmeister,  are  you  satisfied  ?" 

The  Herr  Kapellmeister  thus  addressed  was  the  famous 
musician  Hummel,  and  he  replied  in  terms  of  great  enthu- 
siasm, and  added : 

"  My  young  friend,  Felix  Mendelssohn,  is  waiting  to  speak 
to  you."  The  boy  pressed  eagerly  forward  and  caught 
Moscheles  by  the  hand.  Something  was  said  about  the  mu- 
sic, and  then  Moscheles  accompanied  Hummel  and  the  Men- 
delssohn s  back  to  the  house  of  the  latter,  where  a  supper 
was  given,  the  children  being  permitted  to  remain  up ;  and 
the  meal  being  at  an  end,  the  entire  party  adjourned  to  the 
music-room,  where  until  daylight  one  after  another  of  the 
famous  musicians  present  performed  to  the  never-wearying 
delight  of  their  listeners,  Moscheles  astonishing  every  one 
by  his  marvellous  extempore  playing,  old  Zelter  suddenly 
turning  around  and  exclaiming,  "  Come,  Felix,  let  us  see 
whether  you  can  show  any  credit  to  your  teachers.  Sit 
down  and  play  whatever  comes  into  your  head." 

It  seems  to  me  that  the  scene  which  followed  evidences 
more  completely  than  anything  which  had  occurred  in  his 
previous  life  the  true  genius  of  Felix  Mendelssohn.  In- 
stead of  rushing  to  the  piano  and  giving  a  display  of  his 


2O4  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

skill,  the  boy  shrank  back,  turning  pale  and  declaring  that 
he  could  not  play  a  note. 

Zelter  was  enraged,  and  declared  that  he  would  write  to 
Goethe  that  the  boy  Felix  had  turned  coward. 

"  After  playing  at  grand  concerts  at  Weimar,"  exclaimed 
Zelter,  "  is  this  the  way  you  are  going  to  show  the  white 
feather  I" 

"But,"  exclaimed  Felix,  "at  that  time  I  did  not  rightly 
know  what  I  was  doing ;  and  now,  after  those  two  there  " — 
indicating  Moscheles  and  Hummel  —  "I  neither  can  nor 
ought  to  play."  And  with  this  he  rushed  from  the  room, 
bursting  into  tears. 

By  request  Moscheles  left  the  E-flat  major  concerto,  and 
the  next  day,  to  his  great  astonishment,  Felix  performed  it 
for  him  in  such  a  superb  manner  that  Moscheles  declared  it 
would  be  impossible  for  him  to  consider  himself  in  the  light 
of  the  lad's  teacher. 

Soon  after  this  we  find  Mendelssohn  composing  various 
works — operas,  symphonies,  etc.,  and  especially  the  music 
of  the  "  Midsummer  Night's  Dream ;"  soon  after  which 
he  began  to  dream  of  his  greatest  work,  the  oratorio 
"Elijah." 

Fanny  Mendelssohn's  marriage  did  not  remove  her  from 
the  charmed  family  circle.  Just  back  of  her  father's  house 
was  a  beautiful  villa  known  as  the  Garden  House,  and  here 


Mendelssohn  a  Rapid  Composer.  205 

she  and  her  husband,  the  artist  Hensel,  took  up  their  abode. 
Here  she  organized  the  celebrated  matinees  of  music,  at 
which  the  flower  of  Berlin  musical  and  aristocratic  society 
was  present,  and  where  the  noblest  compositions  were  per- 
formed week  after  week. 

Felix's  English  journeys  which  he  made  from  time  to 
time  were  full  of  pleasures,  both  musical  and  social.  With 
his  dear  friends  the  Moscheleses  he  stayed  constantly,  and 
in  the  house  many  pictures  and  other  reminders  of  those 
happy,  busy  days  when  Felix  and  Moscheles  worked  togeth- 
er still  remain.  Moscheles  had  a  fund  of  delightful  humor, 
and  he  and  Felix  seemed  just  fitted  to  draw  out  that  which 
was  most  entertaining  in  each  other. 

Sometimes,  after  hard  work,  Mendelssohn  would  come 
into  Madame  Moscheles's  drawing-room,  tired  and  worn. 
Then  that  ever-ready  friend  knew  just  what  should  be  done. 
She  would  insist  upon  his  lying  down  in  a  darkened  room, 
where  he  would  often  sleep  for  hours.  These  long  sleeps 
were  his  salvation,  for  there  was  in  his  family  a  disposition 
to  sudden  brain  prostration. 

It  was  Mendelssohn's  habit  to  compose  rapidly,  and  then 
to  correct  and  recorrect  some  of  his  best  phrases,  until 
sometimes  Moscheles  would  have  to  insist  upon  his  friend's 
leaving  his  MSS.  further  untouched.  But  Mendelssohn  was 
never  satisfied  :  he  would  yield  grumblingly,  and  declare  he 


2o6  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

never  conld  write  just  what  he  wanted.  But  to  what  genius 
is  any  work  perfect  ? 

Mendelssohn's  wife  Cecile  was  beautiful,  amiable,  and 
sympathetic,  and  she  proved  a  devoted  companion  to  him 
and  a  most  careful  mother.  When  Mendelssohn  and  Mo- 
scheles  undertook  the  guidance  of  the  Leipsic  Conservatoire, 
Felix's  house  became  a  new  social  and  artistic  circle,  and 
Hiller  has  given  a  graphic  description  of  it. 

There  was  a  large  dining-room,  with  a  sitting-room  and 
bedrooms  opening  from  it.  To  the  left  was  Felix's  study, 
a  water-color  drawing  of  which  now  hangs  in  Madame  Mo- 
scheles's  London  home.  Here  were  his  piano,  desk,  and  some 
favorite  pictures,  and  the  small  portable  easel  or  writing- 
stand,  now  also  in  Madame  Moscheles's  possession,  which 
he  constructed  himself,  and  on  which  he  composed  most  of 
the  "  Elijah." 

One  evening  a  friend  found  Mendelssohn  seated,  buried 
in  thought,  before  his  Bible.  He  looked  up  with  one  of 
those  sudden  gleams  which  used  to  transfigure  his  whole 
face.  "  Listen,"  he  said  ;  and  then,  in  a  voice  full  of  agita- 
tion, he  read  that  part  of  the  First  Book  of  Kings  beginning, 
"And,  behold,  the  Lord  passed  by."  It  had  inspired  him 
for  the  "Elijah." 

Those  few  short  years  in  Leipsic  must  have  afforded  de- 
lightful memories  for  the  friends  who  flocked  to  Felix's 


"The  Night  Song"  207 

house.  Not  only  was  there  constantly  good  music,  but  on 
birthdays  and  other  festive  occasions  the  Moscheleses  and 
Mendelssohns  would  improvise  most  delightful  entertain- 
ments, into  which  the  great  artists  entered  with  childlike 
enthusiasm.  On  one  of  these  occasions,  in  which  Joachim, 
the  celebrated  violinist,  took  a  part,  Moscheles  writes  that 
"  Mendelssohn  was  sitting  on  a  large  straw  arm-chair,  which 
creaked  under  his  weight  as  he  rocked  to  and  fro,  and  the 
room  echoed  with  his  peals  of  laughter." 

Felix  was  at  Frankfort  when  news  was  brought  him  of 
his  sister  Fanny's  sudden  death.  She  had  been  playing  at 
one  of  her  matinees — her  fingers  suddenly  dropped  from 
the  keys  —  she  was  carried  into  an  anteroom,  and  soon 
breathed  her  last.  From  that  time  Felix's  spirits  drooped. 
Not  only  did  he  mourn  his  sister's  loss,  but  her  early  death 
seemed  to  be  prophetic  of  his  own. 

On  the  9th  of  October,  184T,  he  composed  his  last  work, 
"  The  Night  Song."  That  same  day  he  came  to  see  the 
Moscheleses,  walking  slowly  through  their  garden,  and  then 
going  ont  with  his  friends  for  a  stroll,  during  which  he 
talked  of  Cecile  and  her  coming  birthday.  From  this  he 
went  to  the  home  of  an  intimate  friend,  Frau  Frege.  There 
he  attempted  some  music,  but  was  forced  to  give  it  up.  He 
went  home,  and  a  little  while  after  his  wife  found  him  pale 
and  cold  upon  the  sofa.  The  next  day  the  symptoms  of 


208  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

brain  trouble  began,  and  on  November  4, 1847,  he  expired, 
at  the  age  of  thirty-eight  years. 

It  has  been  given  to  few  human  beings  to  pass  a  life  so 
unclouded  by  care  or  sadness,  so  full  of  love  and  sympathy 
and  the  joys  of  success,  as  Felix  Mendelssohn's.  In  the  thir- 
ty-eight years  of  his  life  he  included  more  work  and  more 
simple  joy  than  many  who  live  beyond  the  allotted  three- 
score-y ears-arid-ten,  and  it  is  a  relief  to  turn  from  sad  lives, 
such  as  Mozart's  or  Weber's  or  even  Beethoven's,  to  one  like 
his.  Everything  sweet,  everything  that  was  tinged  with  the 
sadness  which  comes  over  any  artistic  spirit,  you  can  find  in 
his  "Songs  without  Words ;"  everything  grand  and  sublime 
in  his  oratorios  of  "  Elijah  "  and  "  St.  Paul." 

When  he  lay  dead  his  earliest  intimate  friend,  Edward 
Devrient,  tells  us  that  lie  seemed  to  be  buried  in  flowers, 
for  to  his  bier  his  friends  brought  everything  that  was  rare 
and  fragrant  in  that  November  season.  He  looked,  Dev- 
rient said,  once  more  as  he  had  looked  when  a  boy.  Dev- 
rient, who  had  been  his  tenderest  companion,  kissed  his 
brow  for  the  last  time,  and  of  that  moment  he  writes — 
"  The  span  of  time  in  my  remembrance  enclosed  the  whole 
of  happy  youth  in  one  perfect  indelible  thought." 


IGNATZ   MOSCHELES. 


Chopin,  Schubert,  and  Schumann.  209 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

A  Trio  :  Chopin,  Schubert,  and  Schumann. — Chopin  in  Paris. — Anec- 
dote of  a  Memorable  Visit. — Flowers  and  Nocturnes. — A  Brief  Story. 
— Schubert's  Life. — Teaching  School  and  Composing. — One  Stormy 
Afternoon. — "The  Erl  King." — Beethoven's  Friendship. — Last  Days. 
— Robert  Schumann. — A  Brilliant  Genius. — Little  Clara  Wieck. — A 
Happy  Marriage. — Sad  Years. — His  Last  Hours. 

THREE  composers  seem  to  occur  to  our  minds  together — 
Frar^ois  Frederick  Chopin,  Franz  Schubert,  and  Robert 
Schumann.  For  myself,  the  music  of  Chopin  seems  always 
to  suggest  certain  scenes  in  his  life,  and  some  of  it  involun- 
tarily brings  to  mind  a  scene  described  by  an  old  friend. 

It  was  in  Paris,  when  Chopin  was  about  twenty-five  years 
of  age,  a  slirn,  refined-looking  young  man  with  a  gay  smile, 
although  very  melancholy  eyes,  and  my  friend  and  her 
painter  cousin  met  him  in  the  market-place  of  the  Madeleine 
buying  violets  and  some  other  spring  flowers,  after  which 
they  all  walked  across  the  sunshiny  square  together  to  Cho- 
pin's apartment,  where  he  had  a  charming  salon  full  of 
softly  tinted  draperies,  of  flowers,  some  dusky  old  portraits, 
and  some  water-colors,  light  in  tone  and  delicate  in  senti- 
ment. Chopin  was  in  excellent  musical  humor.  He  playeJ 

13 


2io  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

for  them,  going  from  one  thing  to  another  until  nearly  even- 
ing. He  improvised,  and  would  turn  his  head  back  from 
the  piano,  looking  from  one  to  another,  well  knowing  the 
sympathy  he  would  read  in  their  faces.  My  friend  told  me 
that  her  memories  of  Chopin  at  the  piano,  as  on  this  occa- 
sion, were  very  wonderful  and  precious  to  her.  Sometimes 
he  would  grow  absorbed,  and  look  like  the  embodiment  of 
his  own  most  melancholy  music,  but  his  touch  was  light  and 
flexible;  no  one,  unless  it  was  Moscheles,  Liszt,  or  Rubin- 
stein, ever  played  his  impromptus  in  any  way  as  well  as  he 
did  himself.  No  musician's  work  seemed  so  entirely  part 
of  the  composer's  very  soul — to  be  the  outcome  of  his  own 
personal  feelings,  his  own  fancies,  his  wild,  fantastic,  and 
pathetic  longings;  and  for  this  reason  one  likes  to  think  of 
him  at  the  piano  in  the  beautiful  room,  playing,  improvis- 
ing, and,  as  it  were,  dreaming  over  the  strange  chords,  the 
brilliant  arpeggios  and  bewildering  chromatic  passages, 
while  all  about  were  the  fragrances  of  spring  flowers,  violets 
and  daffodils,  a  heaping  jar  of  narcissus,  and  great  bowls  of 
lilacs,  white  and  purple,  mingling  their  odors  with  the 
dreamy  sounds.  I  wished  that  my  friend  had  had  more  to 
tell  me  of  that  one  day  in  Paris.  Somehow,  as  I  have  said, 
Chopin's  music  calls  it  readily  to  mind.  He  had  gone  out 
to  buy  the  flowers  as  a  sort  of  inspiration  ;  and  certainly  the 
music  that  resulted  always  lived  in  my  friend's  memory — 


Chopin 's  Early  Life.  2 1 1 

part  of  her  thought  of  the  man  himself,  for  Chopin's  music 
was  distinctly  personal.  Some  critics  think  it  overladen 
with  sentimentality,  an  element  young  players  are  too  apt 
to  get  into  their  style,  and  certainly  to  be  strictly  avoided  ; 
but  Chopin,  it  seems  to  me,  had  too  much  real  genius  to 
make  this  predominate.  Everything  he  wrote  has  its  tinge 
of  melancholy,  everything  has  a  little  undercurrent  of  fan- 
ciful feeling,  which  breaks  out  now  and  then,  like  the  spray 
of  a  fountain,  into  something  which  ends  in  thin  air  before 
you  can  catch  all  its  lights;  but  the  foundation  is  solid,  and 
when  you  play  any  of  Chopin's  music,  remember  not  to  be 
carried  away  by  the  idea  that  it  is  all  to  be  expressed  in 
lightness  and  delicacy.  Try  to  find  the  deeper  thought  first, 
and  then  weave  your  daintiest  feeling  of  the  music  about  it. 
Chopin's  history  was  brief,  and  melancholy  at  the  last. 
He  was  born  February  8,  1810,  at  Zelazowa-Wola,  a  Polish 
village  near  Warsaw,  and  he  died  at  Paris  in  1849.  His 
father,  who  was  French,  settled  in  Warsaw,  where  he  was 
a  professor  at  the  Academy,  and  where  he  had  also  a  first- 
class  private  school.  Little  Frederic  was  brought  up  with 
lads  of  refinement  and  good-breeding,  so  that,  as  a  child,  he 
saw  little  of  the  roughness  of  life.  His  mother,  who  was  a 
Polish  lady  of  extremely  sensitive  temperament,  gave  him 
his  first  ideas  of  poetry  and  romance,  and  perhaps  from 
lier  he  inherited  the  tinge  of  melancholy  which  followed 


2  I  2  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

him  through  life.  But  as  a  youth  he  was  gay  enough,  fond 
of  amusements  and  all  sorts  of  fun. 

Before  he  was  nineteen  he  had  become  a  finished  pianist, 
and  as  this  was  only  in  1828,  it  was  more  of  a  feat  than  it 
could  be  now.  His  teachers  and  friends  were  anxious  for 
him  to  be  known  and  applauded  in  the  world,  and  so  he 
went  from  Poland  to  Vienna,  where  he  quickly  gathered  a 
circle  of  friends  about  him,  who  listened  and  admired  as 
much  as  his  dearest  masters  could  wish.  At  this  time  every 
one  interested  in  any  way  in  music,  whether  as  an  art  or  in 
performance,  was  full  of  curiosity  to  see  and  hear  the  yonng 
Pole,  and  when  he  arrived  in  Paris  he  created  a  sensation 
in  society  as  well  as  in  musical  circles. 

Besides  his  art  young  Chopin  had  the  reputation  of  be- 
ing an  enthusiastic  patriot.  The  revolution  in  Poland  was 
just  over;  every  one  who  came  from  that  unhappy  country 
seemed  to  have  an  air  of  romance  about  him,  and  the  young 
musician,  with  his  graceful  beauty,  his  melancholy  eyes 
and  smile,  playing  as  no  Parisian  had  ever  heard  waltzes 
and  polonaises  played  before,  was  naturally  a  strong  attrac- 
tion in  the  capital,  and  so  he  was  soon  established  there, 
and  gathered  a  wonderful  circle  of  people  about  him.  He 
knew  all  the  famous  men  and  women  of  the  day.  If  some 
people  found  him  cold  and  selfish,  at  least  he  seemed  to 
have  truly  loved  some  of  his  chosen  friends,  and  by  many, 


Early  Death  of  Chopin.  213 

both  among  his  pupils  and  his  friends,  he  was  absolutely 
adored. 

Unfortunately  Chopin's  health,  never  very  strong,  began 
to  break  soon  after  his  twenty -fifth  year.  He  went  to 
Majorca  to  seek  health,  but  returned  to  Paris  only  to  break 
down  again  ;  and  yet  he  had,  like  many  people  of  his  artis- 
tic nature,  an  energy  and  feverish  activity  which  kept  him 
up.  So,  in  spite  of  remonstrances,  he  went  to  London, 
played  there,  and  went  constantly  into  society,  burning  out 
with  a  rush  his  feeble  little  lamp  of  life.  He  hastened  back 
to  his  beloved  Paris,  where  a  favorite  pupil,  M.  Gutman, 
had  everything  in  readiness  for  him. 

But  Chopin's  strength  had  entirely  failed.  He  passed 
his  days  in  weariness  of  mind  and  body,  grateful  for  the 
loving  attentions  of  friends,  and  particularly  soothed  by 
music.  His  pupil  Gutman,  his  sister,  and  the  Countess 
Potocka  nursed  him  constantljT,  and  they  wheeled  his  piano 
to  the  bedroom  door,  where  they  could  play  and  sing  for 
him  when  he  desired  it.  One  evening  about  five  o'clock 
he  seemed  dying,  but  suddenly  he  opened  his  eyes,  and 
looking  at  Countess  Potocka,  murmured,  "Sing." 

She  was  weeping  bitterly,  but  she  went  to  the  piano,  and 
there  sang  the  canticle  to  the  Virgin,  that  wonderful  song 
which  Haweis  tells  us  once  saved  the  life  of  Stradella. 

These  were  among  the  last  sounds  that  reached  the  iiuisi- 


214  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

cian's  ears.  He  died  the  peaceful  death  so  often  accorded 
to  those  who  have  suffered  much  with  his  disease,  and 
while  he  lay  in  his  last  sleep  friends  came,  filling  all  the 
room  with  flowers.  Every  one  knew  of  his  passionate  love 
of  them,  and  so,  late  roses  and  early  autumn  blossoms,  and 
even  spring  violets  and  pansies,  were  strewn  about  him, 
until  he  seemed,  they  say,  to  be  resting  in  some  strangely 
sweet  garden  of  God. 

Chopin's  great  art  was  in  his  harmonic  progressions,  a 
term  better  to  be  understood  after  some  study  of  thorough- 
bass, though  even  without  this  some  idea  of  the  meaning 
may  be  obtained  and  improved  upon  by  studying  different 
parts  of  different  works. 

A  progression  in  harmony  is,  strictly  speaking,  the  follow- 
ing up  of  one  chord  into  another.  An  excellent  idea  is  that 
chords  should  not  be  regarded  only  horizontally,  as  we  are 
accustomed  to  think  of  them  before  us  on  the  printed  page, 
but  as  well  vertically,  which  suggests  to  our  mind  their 
movement  or  on-going  from  one  to  the  other.  A  chord  is 
the  combination  of  any  tones,  and  the  simplest  chord  of  all 
is  formed  by  adding  to  the  tone  its  third  and  then  its  fifth, 
which  is  known  as  the  triad  symphone  or  concord  from 
which  all  other  chords  are  formed.  The  principal  chords  in 
the  scale  are  known  as  the  tonic,  the  dominant,  and  the  sub- 
dominant,  because  their  first  notes  are  taken  from  the  tonic, 


Extempore  Playing.  217 

dominant,  and  sub-dominant  of  the  scale.  A  number  of 
changes,  inversions,  etc.,  belong  to  the  arrangement  of 
chords;  and  as  progression  depends  so  much  upon  them, 
their  careful  study  should  be  regarded  by  any  student  as  a 
most  important  branch  of  his  or  her  work  in  music.  What 
endless  beauties  may  be  wrought  in  progressions  Chopin's 
music  shows  in  perfection. 

In  Chopin's  impromptus  his  peculiar  power  is  most  evi- 
dent. An  impromptu  is  a  piece  written  down,  yet  in  the 
style  of  extempore  playing,  or  improvisation.  Many  musi- 
cians have  been  noted  for  their  fine  ideas  in  extempore 
playing.  This  is,  to  take  up  some  musical  idea,  sit  down, 
and  at  the  piano  elaborate  it  just  as  the  ideas  came.  In 
impromptus  the  musician  gives  the  idea  that  he  is  doing 
likewise,  and  the  result  in  the  music  of  Chopin  and  Schu- 
bert is  something  very  fascinating.  It  may  be  as  well  to 
say  that  Beethoven  and  Mendelssohn  never  used  this  term 
for  any  of  their  music,  but  Chopin  seems  to  have  created  it 
as  something  too  dignified  not  to  take  a  first  place  among 
musical  significations.  When  you  can  play  with  ease 
Chopin's  impromptu  in  C-sharp  minor,  or  his  impromptu 
Opus  36  (Opus  stands  for  work),  then  you  may  feel  that  the 
drudgery  of  finger  exercise  is  at  an  end,  though  its  practice 
should  be  perpetual. 

Schubert,  the  second  in  the  trio  I  have  mentioned,  was 


2 1 8  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

born  in  1797,  and  was  the  youngest  son  of  a  family  of  eigh- 
teen, and  from  earliest  childhood  showed  a  passion  for  mu- 
sic: melody  seeming  to  come  as  natural  to  him  as  the  very 
air  he  breathed.  At  thirteen,  overtures,  quartets,  sympho- 
nies, all  sorts  of  compositions,  were  pouring  forth  from  the 
young  musician's  brain  and  fingers,  no  sort  of  hardship 
daunting  him,  poverty  and  a  rather  rude  home-life  offering 
no  obstacles  whatever  to  his  work.  In  1816  Schubert  was 
engaged  in  teaching  little  boys  in  his  father's  school,  an  oc- 
cupation which  seems  to  have  afforded  him  no  particular 
annoyance,  probably  because  he  worked  at  it  mechanically, 
allowing  his  brain  to  employ  itself  as  it  would  with  musical 
composition  while  he  listened  to  the  a-b  ab  and  the  multi- 
plication table  of  his  little  pupils.  Having  escaped  one  af- 
ternoon somewhat  earlier  than  usual  from  his  work,  he  shut 
himself  up  in  a  little  room,  the  only  spot  belonging  entire- 
ly to  himself  in  his  father's  house.  He  had  obtained  pos- 
session of  a  volume  of  Goethe's  poems,  and  sitting  there  he 
read  the  "  Erl-king."  Something  seemed  to  till  his  heart  and 
mind  and  very  soul  as  he  read.  It  was  an  hour  of  tremen- 
dous inspiration  ;  the  words  seemed  to  him  to  go  to  an  ac- 
companiment of  rushing  wind  and  of  a  fantastic  melody; 
the  forest  stretched  before  him — the  father  and  child  riding 
on  seemed  to  him  to  move  to  harmonies  which  he  could 
not  restrain  himself  from  uttering;  and  then  and  there  he 


ScJiubert.  219 

seized  his  pen  and  wrote  out  the  song  which  will  be  forever 
famous,  never  afterwards  having  to  correct  a  single  line  of 
it,  and  occupying  only  as  much  time  in  the  performance  of 
this  remarkable  work  as  it  took  to  actually  write  the  notes 
down  upon  the  paper.  If  Schubert  had  never  written  an- 
other line,  his  fame  might  well  rest  upon  this  composition. 
Every  great  singer,  every  great  pianist  has  undertaken  an 
interpretation  of  it ;  thousands  have  been  realized  by  the 
publishers  of  it,  and  in  the  lives  of  various  people  we  read 
of  the  effect  produced  by  it  upon  their  minds  at  different 
important  periods;  as,  for  instance,  when  Jean  Paul  Rich- 
ter,  the  poet,  dying  and  blind,  desired,  a  few  hours  before 
his  death,  to  hear  it  sung  for  the  last  time;  and  we  have 
also  a  picture  of  Goethe,  aged,  and  living  much  in  the  past, 
begging  of  Madame  Devrient  to  sing  it  once  more  for  him. 
Schubert,  warm-hearted,  although  at  times  intensely  mel- 
ancholy, had  a  charmed  circle  of  friends;  but  he  was  not 
always  a  good  companion,  his  natural  inclination  to  depres- 
sion depriving  him  of  that  element  of  bonhomie  which  is 
necessary  in  order  to  be  always  en  rappwt  with  one's  gay 
companions.  He  was  plain  in  appearance,  not  strong,  al- 
though rather  large,  and  walked  with  a  stoop  which  made 
him  awkward;  but  he  was  capable  of  all  the  suffering  which 
comes  from  a  sensitive  and  nervous  temperament,  and  he 
had  trouble  enough  to  excuse  many  of  his  morbid  feelings. 


22O  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

Beethoven,  during  his  last  illness,  learned  to  appreciate 
the  younger  composer,  and  between  the  periods  of  his  great 
suffering  he  spent  much  time  poring  over  Schubert's  music ; 
and  almost  in  his  last  moments  the  eyes  of  the  great  master 
rested  upon  his  friend,  and  it  is  said  that  he  strove  vainly 
over  and  again  to  say  something  to  him  as  he  held  his  hand 
in  a  last  farewell.  In  keeping  with  a  German  fashion, 
Schubert  and  some  of  his  friends,  on  the  day  of  Beethoven's 
funeral,  drank  to  the  soul  of  the  great  man.  Some  one  sug- 
gested to  drink  to  the  one  who  should  go  next,  whereupon 
Schubert  started  up,  and  filling  a  glass,  turned  aside,  drink- 
ing to  himself. 

It  is  not  possible  to  give  you  here  a  full  account  of  his 
various  symphonies,  quartets,  masses,  quintets,  sonatas,  and 
songs;  the  last  great  work  was  completed  in  1828.  This 
was  the  seventh  symphony  in  C,  and  it  was  performed  to 
a  crowded  and  enthusiastic  audience.  Fame  and  worldly 
success  were  just  reaching  forth  their  hands  to  lead  him  to 
the  heights  of  peaceful  content,  but  his  health  completely 
failed.  In  November,  1828,  he  expired  at  the  age  of  thirty- 
one. 

At  Leipsic  the  news  of  Schubert's  death  reached  painful- 
ly a  young  man  who  had  been  his  devoted  admirer  since 
boyhood.  This  was  llobert  Schumann,  then  a  lad  of  eigh- 
teen, working  hard,  composing,  and  building  the  foundation 


Schumann — Clara  Wieck.  221 

for  a  great  musical  career.  Schumann's  first  strong  impe- 
tus towards  a  musical  life  was  when,  at  nine  years  of  age,  he 
made  a  journey  to  Carlsbad  with  a  relative  to  hear  Mosche- 
les  play,  and  the  influence  of  this  master's  technique  never 
left  him.  His  father  was  a  bookseller  at  Zwickau,  in  Sax- 
ony, and  although  he  knew  little  of  music,  interested  him- 
self strongly  in  his  son's  talent,  and  at  the  same  time  gave 
him  an  excellent  education.  After  leaving  the  University 
of  Leipsic  he  travelled,  making  the  acquaintance  of  various 
famous  people  and  absorbing  much  material  which  he  was 
later  to  turn  to  excellent  account  in  his  musical  composi- 
tions. To  follow  Schumann's  life  would  be  highly  inter- 
esting to  the  student  of  his  work,  since  in  it  we  find  so 
many  evidences  of  what  influenced  his  compositions.  The 
story  for  many  years  is  a  highly  interesting  one,  including 
the  events  which  led  to  his  marriage  with  the  gifted  daugh- 
ter of  the  old  musician  known  as  Papa  Wieck. 

The  first  performance  of  one  of  Schumann's  symphonies 
took  place  at  Zwickau  in  1832,  and  Clara  Wieck,  then  a 
girl  of  thirteen,  was  the  pianist.  Schumann,  as  well  as  all 
who  heard  her,  was  filled  with  enthusiasm,  and  from  that 
moment  seems  to  have  adored  the  child  who  was  later  to 
become  his  wife.  He  had  not  poverty  to  contend  with,  and 
was  therefore  able  to  indulge  many  of  his  fancies  in  a  mu- 
sical career,  and  also  to  become  interested  in  the  publication 


222  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

of  a  musical  paper.  He  associated  himself  with  all  the  lead- 
ing musicians  and  authors  of  the  day,  and  on  his  marriage, 
in  1840,  life  seemed  to  begin  with  every  promise  of  human 
happiness.  Both  husband  and  wife  shared  simple  domestic 
tastes,  and  at  the  same  time  were  heart  and  soul  musicians. 
Clara  Schumann*  was  the  leading  pianist  of  German}',  and 
he  was  one  of  its  first  composers.  Their  home  at  Leipsic 
formed  a  noted  centre  for  everything  that  was  delightful 
artistically,  but  both  husband  and  wife  enjoyed  periods  of 
seclusion  and  study.  The  intimacies  of  the  Schumauns 
with  Mendelssohn,  Brahms,  Joachim,  and  others  are  almost 
famous,  so  inspiring  and  devoted  were  they;  but  in  spite  of 
all  that  was  so  attractive  in  home  and  artistic  life,  Schu- 
mann's health  failed  :  the  natural  tendency  towards  the  mor- 
bid, which  had  always  been  a  strong  element  in  his  nature, 
increased,  and  the  last  years  of  his  life  were  passed  in  a  pri- 
vate asylum  near  Bonn.  His  insanity  took  the  form  of 
melancholia.  Naturally  his  musical  work  impressed  him 
strongly,  and  various  themes  haunted  him,  so  that  he  WHS 
driven  to  the  verge  of  despair  in  trying  to  work  them  out. 
The  very  last  came  with  the  consolation  of  a  more  peaceful 
period,  and  in  the  arms  of  his  wife,  July  29, 1856,  he  passed 
quietly  away. 

*  Madame  Schumann  still  continues  to  delight  the  most  cultured  au- 
diences (1886). 


MADAME  CLARA  SCHUMANN. 


Musical  Culture.  223 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

Musical  Culture.— A  Young  Girl's  Diary. — Stepping-stones. — An  Over- 
romautic  Student. 

ONE  day  a  group  of  girls  in  a  foreign  conservatory  sat 
down  to  discuss  what  music  they  liked  best.  With  one  ex- 
ception, all  were  Americans,  who  had  recently  entered  the 
B Conservatory.  The  preference  was  for  operatic  mu- 
sic; with  some  for  Beethoven,  and  others  for  Mendelssohn. 

Their  musical  education  had  been  of  the  ordinary  sort. 
They  had  studied  compositions  which  were  selected  with 
no  view  to  progress,  and  with  no  systematic  idea  of  the 
right  sort  of  cultivation,  yet  all  were  tolerably  good  per- 
formers ;  that  is,  their  facility  had  justified  them  in  going 
abroad  to  study  in  a  regular  musical  school,  and,  like  most 
American  students,  they  had  quick  minds,  a  genuine  mu- 
sical enthusiasm — not  the  sort  of  patience  or  diligence  which 
marks  the  German  student,  not  the  brilliancy  of  the  French 
girl,  who  learns  to  make  use  of  her  fingers  with  marvellous 
rapidity,  but  their  appreciations  were  ready  to  be  cultivated, 
and  their  kind  of  enthusiasm  was  wholesome. 


224  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians, 

A  year  later  any  one  of  the  group  would  have  been  sur- 
prised had  she  been  reminded  of  the  opinions  expressed  by 
her  that  day.  System  had  stepped  in  with  the  slow  but 
sure  culture  of  a  whole  year's  hearing  of  only  the  very  best 
music.  If  you  were  studying  astronomy  or  chemistry,  would 
it  occur  to  you  that  you  could  by  any  chance  profit  by  mix- 
ing up  all  the  chapters  in  your  text-books,  taking  up  any 
part  at  any  time,  and  giving  the  end  the  first  place  in  your 
mind?  I  am  sure  such  a  plan  would  seem  absurd  in  the 
extreme;  yet  so  few  young  people  studying  music  stop  to 
consider  the  necessity  of  avoiding  just  such  a  ridiculous 
jumble,  that  in  this  chapter  I  want  to  talk  about  certain 
arrangements  for  musical  practice  which  I  have  seen  work 
very  well. 

To  begin  with,  remember  that  every  moment  you  can 
give  to  your  piano  is  valuable  if  used  in  the  right  way — 
live  minutes  at  a  time  is  profitable ;  on  the  other  hand, 
every  moment  wasted  in  stupid  or  careless  playing  is  a  di- 
rect injury.  Of  course,  even  in  our  severest  studies  we 
like  to  be  amused,  and  one  always  can  be  amused  at  the 
piano,  except  when  one  is  playing  finger  exercises,  over 
which  you  can  at  least  be  interested. 

A  very  entertaining  thing  is  to  have  a  musical  diary,  in 
which  one  records  each  day  what  was  practised  or  learned, 
with  comments  on  the  composer's  style,  any  peculiar  forma- 


Usefulness  of  a  Musical  Diary.  225 

tion  of  chords  or  arrangement  of  notes,  and  any  portions 
which  have  seemed  most  difficult.  You  have  no  idea,  until 
you  make  the  experiment,  how  such  a  book  marks  one's 
progress,  and  how  interesting  it  becomes  to  look  back  upon. 
Reading  such  an  one  the  other  day,  I  was  amused  and  in- 
terested in  noting  how  difficulties  which  in  January  seemed 
insurmountable  had  vanished  by  May.  This  book  was  kept 
with  alternate  leaves  of  music-paper  carefully  inserted,  so 
that  the  owner,  who  was  certainly  an  anxious,  if  not  a  brill- 
iant student,  could  put  down  or  make  note  of  anything 
which  occurred  to  her  as  she  wrote,  and  sometimes  the  re- 
sult was  very  interesting  and  entertaining.  At  the  end  of 
each  month  the  results  were  summed  up  with  a  note  of 
what  had  been  accomplished.  Perhaps  a  few  pages  from 
such  a  diary  will  serve  to  illustrate  my  idea : 

"January  3d.  —  Practised  one  hour  to-day  on  Czerny's 
studies,  and  half  an  hour's  Plaidy,  the  old  five  fingers.  I 
then  tried  Mozart's  minuet  in  E-flat  major,  hoping  to  make 
the  staccato  parts  less  heavy.  After  playing  it  a  few  times,  I 
hunted  out  some  bits  of  my  exercises  with  special  reference 
to  those  pieces,  and  after  ten  minutes  found  I  could  go  back 
to  the  minuet  much  better.  Read  four  pages  of  Haydn. 

"January  4th. — Usual  exercises  practised,  the  minuet  and 
Schumann's  '  Slumber  Song.'  Noticed  the  peculiarities  of 
some  of  the  bars,  and  how  very  necessary  it  is  to  make  the 


226       .         The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

left-hand  work  smoothly.  Worked  ten  minutes  extra  on 
left-hand  finger  exercises.  Found  it  rather  hard  work. 
Went  to  one  of  You  Billow's  concerts  in  the  evening,  and 
returned  wondering  if  I  could  ever  accomplish  anything. 
Was  delighted  to  hear  that  he  practised  finger  exercises  an 
hour  a  day.  He  played  Beethoven's  'Sonata  Appasionata,' 
and  fairly  rushed  it.  I  heard  that  Beethoven  composed  that 

sonata  during  a  terrible  thunder-storm,  and  Mr. says  no 

one  can  play  it  like  Liszt,  and  that  when  Rubinstein  plays 
it  he  is  apt  to  alter  little  bits  here  and  there  just  to  suit  his 
mood.  When  I  heard  Madame  Essipoff,  she  took  a  great 
deal  of  it  very  tenderly.  Von  Billow  is  very  effective,  but 
certainly  tremendous  over  it. 

"January  §th.  —  Tried  to  read  the  'Appasionata'  with 

Mr. .     Too  much  for  me,  but  it  gave  me  an  idea  of  the 

majesty  of  the  whole  thing.  In  practising  Mendelssohn's 
'Spring  Song'  to-day  I  suddenly  discovered  how  to  do  the 
arpeggio  in  the  bass,  and  worked  simply  at  those  portions 
without  reference  to  the  rest  for  a  time.  Mendelssohn 
wrote  the  'Spring  Song'  for  one  of  his  sister's  festive  occa- 
sions. When  Moscheles  went  for  the  first  time  after  Men- 
delssohn's death  to  see  his  wife  Cecile,  he  played  the  '  Spring 
Song'  for  her,  and  it  brought  back  to  them  both  all  their 
tenderest  memories,  so  that  it  must  have  been  most  dear  to 
the  composer. 


Extract  from  a  Diary,  227 

"January  8th. — Miss  H spent  two  hours  here  to-day, 

and  played  all  sorts  of  things.  She  has  just  come  home 
from  four  years'  musical  study  abroad,  chiefly  in  Dresden 
and  Berlin.  She  showed  me  how  Deppe  teaches  his  pupils 
to  hold  the  fingers — to  curve  the  hand  always  slightly  out- 
ward and  sink  the  knuckle  part  a  little.  She  did  some  ex- 
ercises very  well,  but  her  manner  was  excessively  languid. 
She  does  not  seem  to  have  much  musical  instinct,  and  so  it 

seemed  to  me  waste  of  time,  unless,  as  Mr.  says,  she 

could  devote  herself  to  harmony,  and  so  enjoy  music  as  a 
science.  I  played  two  of  Chopin's  waltzes  for  her,  and  was 
very  glad  of  the  suggestions  she  offered  me  about  my  finger- 
ing, which  it  seems  to  me  I  ought  to  consider  more  than  I 
do.  She  described  Liszt's  manner  as  very  entertaining.  He 
is  never  twice  quite  alike,  she  says — sometimes  satirical, 
sometimes  playful ;  but  she  says  his  playing  can  never  be 
described.  It  is  simply  perfect,  especially  in  all  legato  pas- 
sages. She  used  to  see  Tausig  very  often,  and  said  that  ex- 
cept Liszt  he  was  the  most  wonderful  pianist  she  had  ever 
heard  —  but  such  an  eccentric  creature!  like  some  half- 
human  thing,  quite  elfish.  He  died  very  young,  and  was 
a  great  loss  to  the  musical  world. 

"  February  \st.— In  my  musical  note-book  to-day  I  took 
for  an  example  in  modulation  the  '  Largo  Appasionata '  from 
Beethoven's  Sonata,  Opus  No.  2.  The  original  key  is  I) 

14 


228  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

and  it  works  readily  into  the  dominant,  but  goes  from  that 
into  D  minor.  For  a  sudden  transition  it  is  remarkably 
beautiful,  and  the  manner  in  which  it  works  back  to  D  is 
highly  interesting." 

These  quotations  from  a  young  girl's  diary,  which,  as  you 
see,  was  concerned  only  with  musical  matters,  will  perhaps 
show  you  what  might  be  done  in  this  way ;  and  I  am  very 
sure  such  a  book  would  add  greatly  to  the  interest  of  mu- 
sical study.  Various  anecdotes  of  different  compositions  are 
included,  as,  for  example — 

" February  10th. — I  played  Schubert's 'Serenade'  to-day, 
with  G—  —  doing  the  violin  obligate  delightfully.  He  told 
me  that  Schubert  had  composed  this  charming  work,  with 
its  suggestions  of  moonlight  and  rose -scented  gardens,  in 
the  midst  of  the  din  and  racket  of  a  carousal  from  which 
he  escaped,  leaving  his  companions  over  their  beer  and 
songs  at  one  end  of  the  restaurant,  while  at  the  other,  in 
an  open  window,  he  sat  jotting  down  notes  for  this  exqui- 
site song." 

And  again: 

"When  Mendelssohn  was  composing  the  'Elijah'  he  waa 
in  doubt  about  one  passage,  and  accordingly  he  went  to  an 
intimate  friend  who  was  likewise  a  good  critic,  and  played 
it  over  for  him  without  saying  whose  or  what  it  was.  When 
he  had  finished,  Mendelssohn  calmly  inquired,  'What  do 


Reminiscence  of  Mendelssohn.  229 

you  think  of  that?  at  least,  what  would  be  your  opinion  of 
a  work  in  which  that  could  be  included  ?' 

" '  That  it  ought  to  make  the  composer  famous,'  was  the 
answer,  whereupon  Mendelssohn  said  nothing  and  went  his 
way;  but  so  strong  was  the  impression  made  upon  his  im- 
promptu critic's  mind,  that  he  declared  that  to  him  the  whole 
of  the  'Elijah,'  when  he  heard  it  later  and  recognized  this 
portion,  seemed  to  be  concentrated  in  that  one  particular 
portion,  or  to  radiate  therefrom." 

From  one  of  the  monthly  "  summings  up  "  I  will  quote  a 
passage : 

"May  31st. — This  month  I  feel  I  have  accomplished  very 
little  in  the  way  of  expression,  but  a  great  deal  in  overcom- 
ing certain  difficulties.  I  really  can  play  the  E  minor  scale 
fairly  well,  and  the  'Moonlight  Sonata'  no  longer  stares  me 
in  the  face  as  something  which  I  am  never  to  execute.  I 
have  made,  this  month,  a  careful  study  of  musical  terms, 
writing  them  all  down  with  definitions." 

At  the  end  of  the  year  the  diarist  has  put  down  a  list  of 
what  she  had  learned  and  what  concerts  she  had  attended, 
and  in  a  little  companion  volume  the  programmes  of  the 
concerts,  with  photographs  of  the  performers. 

There  was  no  special  literary  merit  in  that  little  book,  but 
I  can  safely  say  it  carried  the  writer  over  tall  places,  and 
now  suggests  many  an  hour  of  work  made  fascinating  in- 


230  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

stead  of  prosaic.  The  romantic  element  in  musical  study 
can  be  carried  to  a  very  ridiculous  extreme,  yet  it  may  safely 
be  allowed  to  tinge  one's  labors ;  for  no  art  possesses  such  a 
field  for  poetic  aspirations. 

I  would  not  for  worlds  suggest  to  my  young  readers  to 
follow  the  example  of  a  young  person  of  twelve  whom  I 
once  knew,  and  who  went  through  a  whole  year  of  very 
commonplace  musical  study — in  which,  I  am  sorry  to  say, 
she  accomplished  but  little — pretending  to  herself  she  was 
in  Vienna  studying  at  a  conservatory,  the  protegee  of  a  fa- 
mous master,  giving  concerts  and  being  treated  as  a  prodigy. 
Little  Miss  K ,  who,  as  you  see,  had  a  most  vivid  imagi- 
nation, used  to  take  her  lessons  with  her  little  head  just  full 
of  these  fancied  scenes,  and  on  leaving  her  teacher's  house 
would  walk  home  with  a  servant,  still  assuming  to  herself 
that  she  was  in  Vienna,  the  observed  of  all  observers.  No 
profit  came  of  all  this  to  her  playing,  as  you  may  easily  be- 
lieve, for  in  her  case  the  ardor  all  went  to  the  imaginary 
side,  and  the  necessity  of  real  work  did  not  occur  to  her. 
It  is  well  for  young  students  to  feel  the  poetry  and  loftiness 
of  the  art  they  are  pursuing,  but  they  should  at  the  same 
time  avoid  eccentric  vagaries. 


Great  Facilities  for  the  Study  of  Music.         231 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

The  Purpose  of  the  Book.  —  Technique.  —  Standard  Authorities.—  Pro- 
fessional Pianists.  —  Books  on  Music.  —  Conservatories  at  Home  and 
Abroad.  —  The  Expense  of  Foreign  Study.  —  Shining  Lights.  —  Au- 
thorities used.  —  How  to  study  Music  profitably. 


the  appearance  of  a  portion  of  this  little  work  in 
HARPER'S  YOUNG  PEOPLE,  a  great  many  questions  have  been 
written  me  in  regard  to  methods  of  study,  instruction,  and 
technique,  and  it  seems  advisable  to  address  a  final  chapter 
to  all  such  friendly  inquirers,  as  well  as  to  any  readers  who 
might  be  interested  on  the  same  points.  To  all  such  let 
me  in  the  commencement  say  that  I  have  neither  the  abil- 
ity nor  the  desire  to  do  more  than  make  general  helpful 
suggestions  through  this  book  ;  that  methods  of  piano  prac- 
tice are  too  various  to  classify  ;  that  good  instruction  is  the 
only  kind  worth  having,  and,  fortunately,  may  be  had  in 
almost  every  city  in  America  to-day,  while  foreign  masters 
have  learned  to  regard  us  as  a  tuneful  and  decidedly  music- 
loving  nation,  according  a  special  welcome  to  American 
students. 

Technique  is  the  foundation  of  art,  and  the  study  of  har- 
mony, guided  by  professors  and  writers  like  Cornell,  Par- 


232  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

ker,  Richter,  and  various  other  standard  authorities,  has  ad- 
vanced to  a  position  wherein  it  is  considered  as  part  of  the 
general  culture  as  well  as  art  of  the  day.  Professional  pi- 
anists are  so  numerous  that  the  best  of  music  may  be  heard 
on  all  sides,  and  this  is  certainly  the  most  useful  sort  of 
stimulus  to  the  young  student.  Books  on  music,  technical, 
biographical,  and  discursive,  are  to  be  had  by  writers  whose 
professional  standing  warrants  their  most  dogmatic  utter- 
ances. 

In  America  conservatories  of  music  have  been  started  in 
all  the  principal  cities,  and  in  many  instances  are  well  man- 
aged and  conducted.  Abroad,  the  schools  of  Leipsic,  Berlin, 
Paris,  Stuttgart,  etc.,  rank  highly  on  the  Continent,  while  in 
London  two  academies  give  a  fine  course  of  musical  study 
and  possess  various  scholarships.  To  give  an  estimate  of 
the  expense  of  musical  study  abroad,  as  I  have  been  con- 
stantly asked  to  do,  is  a  difficult  matter,  since  so  much 
depends  upon  the  place  of  study  chosen  and  the  methods 
pursued,  but  I  think  that  any  prudently  inclined  student 
might  be  safe  to  venture  abroad  for  musical  education  on 
an  income  of  five  hundred  dollars  a  year,  while  I  have 
known  of  its  being  done  on  even  less. 

Fifty  years  ago  the  number  of  professional  pianists  was 
so  small  that  an  amateur  rarely  had  an  opportunity  for 
hearing  good  music  or  the  least  incentive  for  study  from 


Leading  Musicians  of  the  Present  Day.  233 

prominent  examples.  At  the  present  day,  while  Liszt,  Ru- 
benstein,  and  Von  Bulow  head  the  list,  a  host  of  shining 
lights  follow  in  their  train,  and  the  world  seems  full  of 
the  harmonious  echoes  they  have  wakened  into  life.  It  is 
scarcely  possible  to  mention  these  artists  all  by  name,  but 
among  prominent  women  of  the  day,  all  of  whom  I  take 
for  granted  are  willing  to  recognize  Madame  Clara  Schu- 
mann as  the  leader  of  their  sex  in  her  art,  we  may  pay  this 
brief  homage  to  Madame  Essipoff,  Madame  Helen  Hopekirk, 
Mademoiselle  Janotha,  and  Madame  Madeleine  Schiller.  So 
many  new  stars  are  constantly  appearing,  that  before  these 
words  are  printed  it  may  be  that  other  names  will  seem  to 
belong  to  the  record  of  famous  pianistes  of  the  day. 

I  trust  that  it  will  be  seen  by  all  my  readers  that  no  ad- 
vice is  offered  in  this  little  volume  as  from  a  professional 
musician,  and  that  no  suggestions  contained  within  its  pages 
are  intended  to  do  more  than  stimulate  the  ardor  of  the 
student  who  is  working  under  good  instruction. 

All  authorities  consulted  have  been  the  best;  all  those 
quoted  have  been  long  recognized  as  governing  musical  de- 
cisions. The  various  methods  for  study  suggested  are  the 
result  of  practical  experience,  and  incidents  relating  to  liv- 
ing persons  or  their  friends  have  come  from  the  most  direct 
source.  Personal  sentiments  which  are  only  matters  of 
taste  need  not  have  any  special  weight  with  the  reader 


234  The  Story  of  Music  and  Musicians. 

whose  experience  in  musical  life  inclines  him  to  an  oppo- 
site opinion,  since,  fortunately,  the  world  of  art  is  large  and 
fertile  enough  to  include  every  variety  of  individuality. 
The  technical  portions  of  the  book,  as  may  readily  be  seen, 
are  introduced  only  to  illustrate  or  explain  the  form  of 
composition  especially  under  consideration,  or  to  rouse  an 
interest  in  the  real  study  of  harmony ;  while  it  is  to  be 
hoped  that  the  lives  of  the  great  masters — the  classicists — 
will  give  to  piano  study  the  touch  of  inspiration  which 
comes  from  the  story  of  those  who  have  caused  the  divine 
art  to  unfold  and  reveal  its  treasures — to  open  wide  its  por- 
tals to  those  who  knock  with  the  password  of  interpreta- 
tion ready  on  their  lips. 

Music  must  be  loved  to  be  studied  profitably,  but  even 
then  it  reaches  the  depths  of  the  heart  and  soul  by  a  proc- 
ess of  absorption  which  culture  certainly  develops.  Each 
new  step  taken  in  the  right  direction  widens  the  horizon 
and  suggests  new  possibilities  for  the  loving  student,  and 
it  is  an  art  which  to  such  an  one  can  never  be  thankless 
while  the  heart  beats  or  the  ears  are  not  deaf  to  sound. 

I  can  hardly  do  better  than  to  bid  my  young  readers 
farewell  with  an  extract  from  Haweis's  "  Book  on  Musical 
Memories,"  in  which  he  speaks  of  the  power  of  music  over 
mind  and  body : 

"  Music  is  not  only  a  body  healer,  it  is  a  mind  regulator. 


The  Power  of  Music.  235 

The  great  educational  function  of  music  remains  almost  to 
be  discovered.  The  future  mission  of  music  for  the  million 
is  the  Discipline  of  Emotion.  *  *  *  Music  rouses  the  emo- 
tions. Inward  activities,  long  dormant  or  never  before 
awakened,  are  called  up,  and  become  new  powers  within 
the  breast ;  for,  remember,  emotion  nerves  for  action.  The 
stupidest  horse  that  goes  up  hill  to  the  sound  of  bells,  the 
timidest  soldier  that  marches  to  battle  with  fife  and  drum, 
the  most  delicate  girl  who  spins  round  tireless  in  the  dance, 
the  poorest  laborer  who  sings  at  his  work — any  of  them  is 
good  enough  to  prove  that  music  rouses  and  sustains  emo- 
tion. *  *  *  Music  disciplines  and  controls  emotion.  That 
is  the  explanation  of  the  art  of  music,  as  distinguished  from 
the  mere  power  of  the  musical  sound.  You  can  rouse  with 
a  stroke ;  but  to  guide,  to  moderate,  to  control,  to  raise  and 
depress,  to  combine,  to  work  out  a  definite  scheme  involv- 
ing appropriate  relations  and  proportions  of  force,  and  va- 
rious mobility — for  this  you  require  the  subtle  machinery 
of  an  art ;  and  the  direct  machinery  for  stirring  up  and 
regulating  emotion  is  the  wonderful  vibratory  mechanism 
created  by  the  art  of  music." 


INDEX. 


A. 

"A  Calm   Sea  and  a  Prosperous 

Voyage,"  186. 
"  A  staid  musicke  ordered  for  grave 

dancing,"  131. 
Accent,  71. 
Accidentals,  77, 78. 
Acute  sounds,  39. 
Adagio,  121. 
Adagio,  largo,  129. 
Adagio  time,  162. 
"  Adelaide,"  169. 
"Agamemnon,"  95. 
Agnus  Dei,  162. 
Agreeable  concords,  110. 
Allegorical  subjects,  186. 
Allegorical  performance,  62. 
Allegro,  121, 128, 129. 
"  Allegro  moderate,"  129. 
Allegro  themes,  129. 
Allemandes,  132. 
Amateur,  18,  232. 
Ambrose,  St.,  152. 
"  Amen,"  93. 
America,  63. 
American  students,  231. 
Ancient  Canto  Fermo,  161. 
Andante,  121, 128, 129. 


Answer,  61. 

Apostle  of  the  Apocalypse,  159. 
"  Appasionata,"  226. 
Arias,  91. 
Arpeggio,  50. 
Arrangements,  112. 
Arrangement  of  notes,  225. 
Astronomy,  224. 
Augmented  interval,  48. 
Augmented  second,  76. 
Avolio,  Mrs.,  88. 

B. 

Bach,  Ambrosius,  53. 

Bach,  John  Sebastian,  13, 43,  44,  53, 

55-57,  59,  60,  62,  66,  67,  109,  140, 

188, 190, 191,  202. 
Bach's  gavottes,  113. 
Ballads,  111. 

"  Ballet  Comique  de  la  Royne,"  190. 
Band,  189. 

Bardi,  Giovanni,  ContediVeruio,  94. 
Bar  line,  70. 
Bars,  58,  59,  69,  225. 
Bartholdy,  Felix  Mendelssohn,  188, 

197. 

Basis  of  theory,  56. 
Basque  race,  62. 


Index. 


Bass,  191. 

Bass  drum,  193. 

Bassoon,  168, 193. 

Bass  trumpet,  193. 

Bayreuth  festival,  96. 

Beat,  71. 

Beethoven,  Jean,  165. 

Beethoven,  Ludwig  von,  21,  22,  26, 

111,  128,  161,  162,  165-167,  175, 

202,  208,  220,  223. 
Beethoven's  andantes,  113. 
Berlin,  64,  65, 197,  232. 
Bible,  62,  65. 
Biblical  scenes,  62. 
Big  drum,  111. 
"  Big  iioises,"  111. 
Binchoys,  154. 
Bishop,  Sir  Henry,  194. 
Bodleian  library,  40. 
"  Book  on  Musical  Memories,"  234. 
Brahms,  175. 
Braules,  131. 
Breve,  41. 

British  Museum,  98. 
Britton,  Thomas,  87. 
Broader  harmony,  150. 
Bulow,Von,  30,33,233. 
Buononcini,83. 
Byron,  John,  83,  87. 

C. 

Cacciui,  95. 
Cadences,  123. 
Cadenzas,  175. 
Canon  imitation,  60. 
Cantabile,  92. 
Cantata,  124, 126. 
Canticle,  213. 
Canto  Ferino,  154. 


Cauzonettes,  96,  97. 

Cardinal  Pisani,  159. 

Catches,  103. 

Cathedral  at  Winchester,  40. 

Cavaliere,  Emilio  del,  91. 

Chaconne,  59, 132. 

Chamber  music,  106, 193. 

Chamber  organ,  87. 

Chant,  44. 

Chapel,  161. 

Chapel-master,  155. 

Chapel  of  St.  Maria  Maggiore,  156. 

Chapel  organ,  85. 

Chateau  de  Montiers,  190, 191. 

Chelsea,  104, 140. 

Cherubiui,  161. 

Chitarone,  98. 

Chopin,  Francois,  27, 212,  217,  227. 

Choral  writing,  92. 

Chorales,  63. 

Chord,  74. 

Chorda,  14, 18. 

Chords,  74,  214, 217. 

Choristers,  63. 

Chorus,  90. 

Christian  plays,  63. 

Christoph,  Johann,  53. 

Chromatic  alteration,  76. 

Church  music,  124,  149. 

Church  of  St.  John  in  Rome,  100. 

Cibber,  Colley,  87. 

Cibber,  Mrs.,  88. 

Citherns,  28. 

Citoles,  28. 

Civilization,  53. 

Clarionet,  193. 

Classical,  112. 

Classicists,  234. 

Clavi,  14. 


Index. 


239 


Clavichord,  14, 15, 56. 

Clavicytheriums,  28. 

Clerkenwell  Green,  87. 

Closer  time,  61. 

Club  of  minstrels,  119. 

Code,  61. 

Codetta,  61. 

Colonia,  Franco  de,  41. 

"  Comfort  ye  my  people,"  93. 

Common  time,  58. 

Composer,  53. 

Composers'  licences,  129. 

Compositions,  119. 

Conbrio,  129. 

Concert  in  Hicksford's  Rooms,  134. 

Concert-room,  172. 

Concertos,  Liszt's,  176. 

Concertos,  movements  of,  175. 

Concertos,  Mozart's,  174. 

Concerts,  173, 174. 

Concerts  in  Paris,  175. 

Concord,  214. 

Contra  bass  tuba,  193. 

Contrapuntal  skill,  59. 

Corelli,  125, 126, 127. 

Cornell,  231. 

Cornets,  189. 

Corno  di  bassetto,  193. 

Corsi,96,98. 

Council  of  Trent,  156. 

Counterpoint,  32, 56, 61,  98, 109. 

Counter-subject,  61. 

Conrantes,  132. 

Covent  Garden,  90. 

Credo,  161,  162. 

Cristofari,20. 

Curtz,  119, 120. 

Cymbals,  111,  193. 

Czerny,225. 


D. 

"  Dafne,"  97. 
"  Dash,"  113. 
"  Dance  therewith  tunefully  and 

harmoniously,"  189. 
Dauphine,  57. 
Dauphiness,  106. 
Dead  march,  87. 
Degrees,  48. 
Deppe,  227. 

"  Der  Freischiitz,"  182, 184, 186. 
Descent  of  scale,  75. 
Devrient,  Madame,  219. 
Devrient,  Edward,  65, 66, 68, 208, 219. 
"  Dido  and  ^Eneas,"  104. 
Diminished  interval,  48,51,  52. 
Diminished  seventh,  52. 
Discipline  of  emotions,  235. 
Dominant,  61, 72,  74, 128, 228. 
Dominant  chord,  214. 
Dominant  relative  major,  174. 
Dominant  seventh,  175. 
"  Don  Giovanni,"  26, 130. 
"  Don't  make  a  cadenza,  hut  go  on 

at  once  to  the  following,"  175. 
Dot,  72. 

Double  basses,  193. 
Double  bassoon,  193. 
Dramatic,  62. 
Dresden,  227. 
"  Dressed  quickly,"  145. 
Drums,  189. 
Drury  Lane,  80. 
Drydeu,  104. 
Dubourg,  Mr.,  88. 
Ducal  chapel  at  Stella,  55. 
Due  de  Joyeuse,  189, 190. 
Duchess  of  Queensbury,  87. 
"  Duets  for  four  hands,"  141. 


240 


Index. 


Du  Fay,  154. 
Duke  of  Saxe,  84. 
Dulcimers,  28. 
Duraute,  160, 161. 

E. 

Early  Christian  music,  33. 
Early  Church,  63. 
Early  melodic  form,  163. 
Easter-time,  157. 
Ecclesiastical  schools,  153. 
"  Echo  et  Narcisse,"  112. 
"  Effects,"  192. 
Egyptians,  112. 
Eighteenth  century,  53. 
Elector  of  Cologue,  165. 
Elements  of  true  musical  inspira- 
tion, 112. 

"  Elijah,"  204, 206, 208, 228, 229. 
Elizabeth,  Queen,  16, 131. 
England,  40. 
English  musician,  70. 
Episcopal  Church  of  England,  153. 
Episode,  61. 
"Erl-king,"218. 
Essipoff,  Madame,  226, 233. 
Esterhazy,  Prince,  120. 
Ethelred  II.,  40. 
Europe,  190. 
"  Euryanthe,  184. 
"Enrydice,"43. 
Entiu,  178. 
Execution,  56. 
Extempore  playing,  217. 

F. 

F  note,  39. 

"Family  of  tones,"  72. 


"Fance,"201. 

"  Faust,"  42, 201. 

Few  rules  for  composition,  58. 

"  Fidelio,"  186. 

"  Field-and-flower,"  141. 

Finish  of  melody,  73. 

First  symphony  of  Haydn's,  120. 

Flanders,  40. 

Florence,  94. 

Flutes,  189. 

"Following  the  marks,"  72. 

"For  benefit  of  Miss  Mozart  and 

Master  Mozart,"  134. 
Founder  of  opera  in  classical  form, 

106. 

Founder  of  symphony,  121. 
Four-line  stave,  41. 
Four  movements  of  sonata,  128. 
Four  movements  of  symphony,  121. 
Four  perfect  intervals,  49. 
Fourteenth  century,  91, 152. 
Fourth  century,  63. 
Fractions  of  a  bar,  72. 
France,  121, 132. 
Franck,  Herr,  114. 
Frege,  Frau,  207. 
Frescobaldi,  59. 
Fugue,  62,  163. 
Fugue  in  minor,  61. 
Fugue  of  Bach,  74. 
Funeral  cantata,  166. 
Fusignano,  126. 

G. 

Galileo  Vincent,  96. 
Gallards,  131. 
Gavottes,  56-59, 62. 
Genius,  55. 


Index. 


241 


Genoa,  100. 

George  I.,  79. 

George  II.,  109. 

Germany,  79. 

"  Glasses,"  110. 

Glees,  103. 

Gluck,  105, 106, 109-112. 

"  Go,"  113. 

Goethe,  201,  202,  204. 

Good-breeding  in  music,  72. 

Good-Friday,  90. 

Gospel  choruses,  63. 

Gounod,  161. 

Gradual  progressions,  44. 

Grand  fugues,  60. 

Grave  sounds,  139. 

Greater  intervals,  50. 

Greek  lyrical  dramas,  95. 

Greeks,  97. 

Gregory,  St.,  33,  44, 152, 153. 

Guicciardi,  Countess,  169. 

Gutman,  M.,  213. 

H. 

Half-bar,  59. 

Half-steps,  49,  50,  52, 57,  72, 75. 

Halle,  84. 

Hamburg,  55, 114. 

Handel,  59,  79,  80, 83-85,  87,  88, 109, 

127, 185, 192, 195. 
Hanoverian  court,  79. 
Harmonica,  110. 
Harmonic  changes,  60. 
Harmonic  forms,  51. 
Harmonic  progressions,  214. 
Harmony,  32,  43, 44,  46,  56,  59, 112. 
Harmony  class,  33. 
Harps,  20, 114, 193. 
Harpsichord,  18, 19,  86, 106, 119, 140. 


Haweis,  213, 234. 

Haydn,  13, 25, 117, 119, 120-123, 129, 

167, 225. 

"Hebrides,"  186. 
Henry  IV.  of  France,  98. 
Henry  VII.,  14. 
Hiller,  197, 206. 
Historical  oratorios,  91. 
Holland,  166. 
Holyshead,  88. 
Homophonic,  97. 
Hopekirk,  Helen,  Madame,  233. 
Hucbaldus,  40. 
Hummell,  203. 
Humphries,  103. 
Huusden,  Lord,  16. 
Hymns,  103. 

I. 

"  Ich  lasse  das  madchen  das  nicht 

will,"  147. 

"  II  caruo  Sassone,"  86. 
"  II  Parnasso,"  111. 
Imperfect  fifth,  49. 
Improvising,  60. 
Interval,  48,  76. 
Interval,  imperfect,  48. 
Interval  of  diminished  seventh,  61, 

72. 

Introduction,  187. 
Instruction,  231. 
"  Introit,"  162. 

"  Invitation  to  the  waltz,"  182. 
"  Israel  in  Egypt,"  87. 
"  It  comes  from  thence,"  122. 
Italian  C,  58. 
Italian  masters,  162. 
Italian  opera,  98. 


242 


Index. 


Italian  opera  music,  80. 
Italy,  86, 132. 

J. 

Janotha,  Mademoiselle,  521. 

"Jephthah,"89. 

Joachim,  207, 222. 

Jesuit  College  at  Kommotan,  106. 

"Joshua,"  89. 

"  Judas  Maccabaeus,"  89, 92. 

K. 

Kapellmeister,  203. 

Keller,  114. 

Keller,  Ann,  119. 

Key,  72. 

Key-notes,  72, 73, 128. 

"  Key  of  C,"  73. 

Key -tone,  73,  75. 

King  of  Wurtemburg,  181. 


Lacrimoso,  140. 

"  L'  Amfi  paruasso,"  95. 

Landmarks,  44. 

"La  Ressurezione,"  91. 

"  Lascia  ch'  io  Piauga,"  80. 

Latin  fngare,  57. 

Lawe,s,  Heury,  70. 

Leading  note,  73. 

Leading  principles,  73. 

Leger  lines,  40. 

Leipsic,  206,  220,  232. 

Lesser  third,  50. 

"  Let  there  be  light,"  122. 

Libretto,  98,  120. 

Lichnovvsky,  Princess,  25. 


Limitations,  56. 
Liszt,  33,  233. 
Literature,  64. 
Louis  XIII.,  99. 
Louis's  court,  57. 
Lulli,  99. 
Lutes,  28. 
Lyres,  28,  95. 
Lyric  drama,  111. 

M. 

Madrigals,  14,  59,  97,  104, 125. 
Magnificats,  159. 
Main  rules  for  the  fugue,  62. 
Major  interval,  48-50. 
Major  key,  59,  73,  87. 
Major  scale,  48. 
Major  second,  50,  51. 
Major  seventh,  75. 
Mantua,  95. 
Manuscript  page,  54. 
Maria  de  Medici,  98. 
Marie  Antoinette,  105,  111 
Marius,  20. 
Mass,  43, 118. 
Masses  of  notes,  71. 
Mass  iu  B  minor,  160. 
Mass,  Marcelli,  148. 
Mass,  requiem,  148,  158. 
Masterly  manner,  57. 
Material  of  a  key,  73,  74. 
Measure,  7. 
Mediaeval,  91. 
Melodic  form,  155. 
Melodious  forms,  100. 
Melody,  41,  44,  152,  156. 
Melody  chant,  154. 
Molvil,  Sir  James,  16. 


Index. 


243 


Mendelssohn,  Fanny,  204. 
Mendelssohn,  Felix,  27,  28,  64,  68, 

113,  144, 175, 195, 196,  200-208. 
Mendelssohn,  Madame,  67,  226. 
Messiah,  78, 79,  88, 89,  92. 
Method,  112. 
Metre,  70. 
Metre  of  music,  70. 
Middle  ages,  90. 
Middle  C,  48-50. 
Milan,  109. 
Milton,  104. 
Minor  cadences,  93. 
Minor  interval,  48,  50. 
Minor  key,  59,  73. 
Minor  scale,  75. 
Minor  scale  of  E,  30. 
Minor  seventh,  52. 
Minor  sixth,  76. 
Minor  third,  75. 
Minuet,  121, 128, 130. 
Moderately  quick,  72. 
Molto,  129. 
.Monodia,  97. 

Moutpensier,  Mademoiselle  de,  99. 
Moscheles,  27,  28,  202-208. 
Mozart,  18,  25,  26,  111,  121,  129, 130, 

134-149. 

Musical  academy,  65. 
Musical  diary,  45,  227-230. 
Musical  drama,  95. 
Musical  ideas,  71. 
Musical  notation,  51,  52. 
Musical  note-hook,  52. 
Musical  taste,  72. 
Musical  terms,  44. 
Musician,  53. 
Music-book,  57,  62. 
Music-loving  nations,  55. 
15 


Music  manuscript,  54. 
Music  masters,  114. 
Music-room,  85. 

N. 

National  hymn,  123. 

Naturals,  77. 

NeumsB,  39, 41. 

Notation,  48. 

Note,  44. 

Note-book,  44. 

"  Notre  cher  Gluck,"  111. 

O. 

Octave,  48. 
Ohrdruff  Lyceum,  53. 
Opera,  33, 43,  94,  96, 122. 
Opera-house,  80. 
Operetta,  104. 
Operatic  styles,  100. 
Oratorio,  33,  43,  87-89,  122. 
Orchestra,  33,  64,  95, 122. 
Orchestral  music,  106. 
Organ,  56,  60,  83, 106, 119. 
Organist,  53,  64. 
Original  key,  78. 
"  Orpheus  and  Eurydice,"  111. 
Overture,  96. 

P. 

"  Papa  Haydn,"  121. 
Parker,  48,231. 
Paris,  232. 
Passacailles,  56, 59. 
Passaglia,  59. 
Passion  music,  62,  63,  65. 
Passion  oratorios,  63. 


244 


Index. 


Pathetic  movement,  60. 

Pathos,  121. 

Pepusch,  Dr.,  87. 

Perfect  interval,  48, 49, 52. 

Peri,  43,  96,  98. 

Phrase,  44. 

Pianist,  70. 

Piano-forte,  13, 56. 

"  Pieces,"  59. 

Poetry,  60. 

Polyphonic  schools,  97. 

Pope,  87. 

Presto,  121, 128. 

Primary  accent,  72. 

Prime,  49. 

Progressions,  73, 74. 

Psalteries,  28. 

Purcell,  Henry,  103-105. 

Q- 

Quarter  note,  59. 
Quartettes,  106. 

R. 

Ratio  of  sonn*.  49. 
Recitative,  63. 
Red  line,  39. 
Reformation,  63. 
Reiukiu,  55. 
Related  key,  74. 
Relative  major,  128. 
Religious  performance,  62. 
Rest,  72. 

Reuter,  Herr,  117. 
Rhythm,  69,  70,  72. 
Rhythmical  meaning,  71. 
Richter,  219,  232. 
Ries,  22. 


Rinaccini,  98. 

Riualdo,  80,  86. 

Romans,  97. 

Rondo,  128. 

Rubenstein,  33, 233. 

Rules,  98. 

Rules  of  harmony,  56, 99. 

S. 

Sacred  and  secular  music,  109. 

Sacred  poems,  90. 

Salzburg,  138. 

"  Samson,"  89. 

Sarabaudes,  56, 59,  60, 132. 

"  Saul,"  87. 

Saxony,  84. 

Scarlatti,  56, 86,  99, 100, 127, 160. 

Scherzo,  121,  128, 130, 133. 

Schiller,  Madeleine,  Madame,  233. 

Schroter,  20. 

Schubert,  129. 

Schumann,  Clara,  Madame,  222, 233. 

Score,  41,  42, 98. 

Score  of  Messiah,  93. 

Secondary  accent,  72. 

Second  movement  in  sonatas,  128. 

Semibreve,  41. 

Semitone,  40. 

Seven  steps,  48. 

Seventh  century,  43, 60. 

Shakespeare,  16. 

Signature,  75. 

Sistine  chapel,  157. 

Sixteenth  century,  60. 

Solo  singers,  66. 

Sonata,  77,  113,  119,  125,  126,  130, 

132. 
Sonata,  perfection  of  the,  26. 


Index. 


245 


Song,  44, 103. 

Soprano,  118. 

Sounds,  73. 

South  Kensington  Museum,  98. 

Spain,  62. 

Spencer,  16. 

Spinet,  18,  28, 84, 105. 

Staff,  48. 

Standard  rules  of  art,  112. 

Stave,  40,  69. 

Steps,  52,  70. 

Stradella,  1JO. 

Stretto,  61. 

Stuart,  Mary,  16. 

Study,  232. 

Stuttgart,  232. 

Suabia,  132. 

Sub-dominant,  74. 

Subject  or  motif,  60, 74, 112. 

Suite,  125. 

Swinging  utterance,  71. 

Symphony,  113, 128, 130. 

Systematic  grouping  of  notes,  70. 

T. 
T,40. 

"  Tannhanser,"  186. 

"The  Battle  of  Prague,"  21,  31. 

The  family  of  notes,  46. 

"  The  Harmonious  Blacksmith,"  87. 

"The  Magic  Flute,"  148. 

Theme,  112. 

"  Theodora,"  89. 

The  Passion  music,  63. 

"  The  Tempest,"  104. 

Thomas-Kirche,  60,  64. 

Tbomas-SchuJe,  60,  66. 


Time,  161. 
Torvelli,  173. 
Trivirga,  38. 
Twelve  scales,  77. 

U. 

Uuisou,  49. 
Unity  of  sound,  73. 

V. 

Varatanda,  60. 
Vibrations,  49. 
Vienna,  117, 119. 
Violin,  53,  56, 119. 
Virginal,  14,  15, 18,  28. 
Vocal  parts,  43. 

W. 

Wagner,  96, 186. 

Walpole,  Horace,  111. 

Waltzes,  212. 

Warsaw,  211. 

Weber,  Carl   Maria  von,  161,  162, 

177-185, 208. 
Weber  family,  146-148. 
Weimar,  202* 
Werther,  20. 

"  We  sat  down  in  tears,"  68. 
Westminster  Abbey,  103. 
Whole  steps,  50. 
Wieck,  Clara,  221. 
Windsor,  80. 
Words,  129. 


Z. 


Zelter,  66,  67. 
Zither,  15. 


THE   END. 


INTERESTING  BOOKS  FOR  YOUNG  PEOPLE. 

PUBLISHED  BY  HARPER   &   BROTHERS. 


lEp""  HARPKR  &  BROTHERS  will  send  their  publications  by  mail,  postage  prepaid, 
to  any  part  of  the  United  States,  Canada,  or  Mexico,  on  receipt  of  the  price. 

THE  WONDER  CLOCK  ;  or,  Fonr-and-Twenty  Marvellous  Tales :  Being 
One  for  each  Hour  of  the  Day.  Written  and  Illustrated  witli  160  Draw- 
ings by  HOWARD  PYLE.  Embellished  with  Verses  by  KATHARINE  PYLE. 
Large  8vo,  Ornamental  Cloth,  $3  00. 

PEPPER  AND  SALT;  or,  Seasoning  for  Young  Folks.  Prepared  and 
Profusely  Illustrated  by  HOWARD  PYLE.  4to,  Illuminated  Cloth,  $2  00. 

THOMAS  W.  KNOX'S  WORKS.     8vo,  Cloth.     Profusely  Illustrated. 
THE  BOY  TRAVELLERS  IN  MEXICO.     $3  00. 
THE  BOY  TRAVELLERS  IN  AUSTRALASIA.     $3  00. 
THE  BOY  TRAVELLERS  ON  THE  CONGO.     Adventures  of  Two  Youths  in  a 

Journey  with  Henry  M.  Stanley  "Through  the  Dark  Continent."    $3  00. 
THE  BOY  TRAVELLERS  IN  THE  RUSSIAN  EMPIRE.     $3  00. 
THE  BOY  TRAVELLERS  IN  SOUTH  AMERICA.     A  Journey  through  Ecuador, 
Peru,  Bolivia,  Brazil,  Paraguay,  Argentine  Republic,  and  Chili.     With  Descrip- 
tions of  Voyages  upon  the  Amazon  and  La  Plata  Rivers.    |3  00. 
THE  VOYAGE  OF  THE  "VIVIAN,"  to  the  North  Pole  and- Beyond.    Adventures 

of  Two  Youths  in  the  Open  Polar  Sea.    $2  50. 

THE  BOY  TRAVELLERS  IN  THE  FAR  EAST.     Five  Parts.     $3  00  each.    The 
Five  Parts  in  a  Box,  $15  00. 
PART  I.  JAPAN  AND  CHINA. 

PART  II.  SIAM  AND  JAVA.    With  Descriptions  of  Cochin  China,  Cambodia, 
Sumatra,  and  the  Malay  Archipelago. 

PART  III.  CEYLON  AND  INDIA.     With  Descriptions  of  Borneo,  the  Phili- 
pine  Islands,  and  Burmah. 
PART  IV.  EGYPT  AND  THE  HOLY  LAND. 
PART  V.  JOURNEY  THROUGH  AFRICA. 

HUNTING  ADVENTURES  ON  LAND  AND  SEA.     Two  Parts.     $2  50  each. 
PART  I.  THE  YOUNG  NIMRODS  IN  NORTH  AMERICA. 
PART  II.  THE  YOUNG  NIMRODS  AROUND  THE  WORLD. 

CHARLES  CARLETON  COFFIN'S  WORKS.    Seven  Volumes.    Copiously 

Illustrated.     Square  8vo,  Cloth,  $3  00  each. 

THE  STORY  OF  LIBERTY.  THE  BOYS  OF  '76. 

OLD  TIMES  IN  THE  COLONIES.  BUILDING  THE  NATION. 

DRUM-BEAT  OF  THE  NATION.  MARCHING  TO  VICTORY. 

REDEEMING  THE  REPUBLIC. 


Interesting  Books  for   Young  People, 


INDIAN  HISTORY  FOR  YOUNG  FOLKS.  By  FRANCIS  S.  DRAKE.  Co- 
piously Illustrated.  8vo,  Cloth,  $3  00. 

HARPER'S  YOUNG  PEOPLE.  Volumes  IX.  (1888)  and  VIII.  (1887), 
4to,  Cloth,  $3  50  each.  (Volumes  I.,  II.,  III.,  IV.,  V.,  VI.,  and  VII., 
out  of  print.)  Each  Volume  contains  the  Numbers  for  a  year,  with 
over  800  pages  and  about  700  Illustrations. 

HARPER'S  YOUNG  PEOPLE  SERIES.  Ill'd.   16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00  per  vol. 


TOBY  TYLER  ;  OR,  TEN  WEEKS  WITH  A  CIR- 
CUS.— MR.  STUBBS'S  BROTHER  (Sequel  to 
"  Toby  Tyler  ").— TIM  AND  TIP.— RAISING 
THE  "PKARL." — LEFT  BEHIND;  OR,  TEN 
DAYS  A  NEWSBOY. — SILENT  PETE.  By 
James  Otis. 

THE  MORAL  PIRATES.  —THE  CRUISE  OF  THB 
"GHOST."  —  THE  CRUISE  OF  THE  CANOK 
CLUB — THB  ADVENTURES  OF  JIMMY 


THE  FOUR  MACNICOLS.    By  William  Black. 

THE  TALKING  LEAVES:  An  Indian  Story. 
— Two  ARROWS.  A  Story  of  Red  and 
White.  By  W.  O.  Stoddard. 

THE  ICE  QUEEN.     By  Ernest  Ingersoll. 

THE  LOST  CITY;  OR,  THE  BOY  EXPLORERS 
IN  CENTRAL  ASIA. — INTO  UNKNOWN  SEAR 
By  David  Ker. 

PRINCE  LAZYBONES,  AND  OTHER  STORIES. 
By  Mrs.  J.  W.  Hays. 

STRANGE  STORIES  FROM  HISTORY  FOR  YOUNG 
PEOPLE.  By  G.  Cary  Eggleston. 

WAKULLA:  A  Story  of  Adventure  in  Flor- 
ida.—  THE  FLAMINGO  FEATHER. — DER- 
RICK STERLING.— CRYSTAL.  JACK  &  Co. 
AND  DELTA  BIXBY.  By  C.  K.  Munroe. 

UNCLE  PETER'S  TRUST.     By  Geo.  B.  Perry. 


BROWN. — A  NEW  ROBINSON  CRUSOE.  By 
W.  L.  Alden. 

MILDRED'S  BARGAIN,  AND  OTHER  STORIES- 
—NAN.— ROLF  HOUSE.— Jo's  OPPORTU- 
NITY.— THE  STORY  OF  Music  AND  MUSI- 
CIANS. —  THR  COLONEL'S  MONEY.  —  THE 
HOUSEHOLD  OF  GLBN  HOLLY.  By  Lucy 
C.  Lillie. 

WHO  WAS  PAUL  GRAYSON  ?  By  John  Hab- 
berton. 

DIDDIE,  DUMPS,  AND  TOT;  OR,  PLANTATION  CHILD-LIFE.      By 

LODISE  CLARKE-PYRNELLE.     Illustrated.     16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 
NEW  GAMES  FOR  PARLOR  AND  LAWN.     By  G.  B.  BARTLETT.     16mo, 

Cloth,  $1  00. 
FROM  THE  FORECASTLE  TO  THE  CABIN.      By  Capt.  S.  SAMUELS. 

Illustrated.     12mo,  Extra  Cloth,  $1  50. 
POLITICS  FOR  YOUNG  AMERICANS.    By  CHARLES  NORDHOFF.     12mo, 

Half  Leather,  75  cents  ;  Paper,  40  cents. 
GOD  AND  THE  FUTURE  LIFE.     The  Reasonableness  of  Christianity. 

By  CHARLES  NORDHOFF.     16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 
ANIMAL  LIFE  IN  THE  SEA  AND  ON  THE  LAND.     A  Zoology  for 

Young  People.    By  SARAH  COOPER.    Prof  usely  Ill'd.    12mo,  Cloth,  $1  25. 


Interesting  Books  for  Young  People. 


THE  BALL  OF  THE  VEGETABLES,  and  Other  Stories  in  Prose  and 
Verse.  By  MARGARET  EYTINGE.  Illustrated.  8vo,  Cloth,  $2  00. 

THE  HISTORY  OF  A  MOUNTAIN.  By  ELISEE  RECLUS.  Illustrated 
by  L.  BENNETT.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  25. 

THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  YOUNG  NATURALIST.     By  LUCIEN  BIART. 

With  117  Illustrations.     12mo,  Cloth,  $1  75. 

AN  INVOLUNTARY  VOYAGE,  By  LUCIEN  BIART.  Illustrated.  12mo, 
Cloth,  $1  25. 

THE  BOYHOOD  OF  MARTIN  LUTHER.  By  HENRY  MAYHEW.  Illus- 
trated. 16mo,  Cloth,  $1  25. 

THE  STORY  OF  THE  PEASANT-BOY  PHILOSOPHER.  (Founded  on 
the  Early  Life  of  Ferguson,  the  Shepherd-Boy  Astronomer.)  By  HENRY 
MAYHEW.  16mo,  Cloth,  $1  25. 

YOUNG  BENJAMIN  FRANKLIN.  By  HENRY  MAYHEW.  Illustrated. 
16mo,  Cloth,  $1  25. 

THE  WONDERS  OF  SCIENCE ;  or,  Young  Humphry  Davy.  The  Life 
of  a  Wonderful  Boy.  By  HENRY  MAYHEW.  16mo,  Cloth,  $1  25. 

THE  BOYHOOD  OF  GREAT  MEN.  By  JOHN  G.  EDGAR.  Illustrated. 
16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 

THE  FOOTPRINTS  OF  FAMOUS  MEN.  By  JOHN  G.  EDGAR.  Illus- 
trated. 16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 

HISTORY  FOR  BOYS;  or,  Annals  of  the  Nations  of  Modern  Europe. 
By  JOHN  G.EDGAR.  Illustrated.  16rno, Cloth,  $1  00. 

SEA-KINGS  AND  NAVAL  HEROES.  A  Book  for  Boys.  By  JOHN  G. 
EDGAR.  Illustrated.  16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 

THE  WARS  OF  THE  ROSES.     By  JOHN  G.  EDGAR.     Illustrated.     16mo, 

Cloth,  $1  00. 


Interesting  Books  for  Youny  People. 


HOW  TO  GET  STRONG,  AND  HOW  TO  STAY  SO.  By  WILLIAM 
BLAIKIE.  With  Illustrations.  16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00  ;  Paper,  50  cents. 

SOUND  BODIES  FOR  OUR  BOYS  AND  GIRLS.  By  WILLIAM  BLAIKIE. 
Illustrated.  16mo,  Cloth,  40  cents. 

DOGS  AND  THEIR  DOINGS.  By  Rev.  F.  0.  MORRIS,  B.A.  Illustrated. 
Square  8vo,  Cloth,  Gilt  Sides,  $1  75. 

TALES  FROM  THE  ODYSSEY  FOR  BOYS  AND  GIRLS.  By  C.  M.  B. 
32mo,  Paper,  25  cents  ;  Cloth,  40  cents. 

CAST  UP  BY  THE  SEA;  or,  The  Adventures  of  Ned  Gray.  By  Sir 
SAMUEL  W.  BAKER.  Illustrated.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  25;  4to,  Paper,  15 
cents. 

THE  ADVENTURES  OF  REUBEN  DAVIDGER;  Seventeen  Years  and 
Four  Months  Captive  among  the  Dyaks  of  Borneo.  By  J.  GREENWOOD. 
8vo,  Cloth,  $1  25  ;  4to,  Paper,  15  cents. 

WILD  SPORTS  OF  THE  WORLD.  A  Book  of  Natural  History  and 
Adventure.  By  JAMES  GREENWOOD.  Illustrated.  Crown  8vo,  Cloth, 
$2  50. 

HOMES  WITHOUT  HANDS :  Being  a  Description  of  the  Habitations  of 
Animals.  By  the  Rev.  J.  G.  WOOD,  M.A.,  F.L.S.  With  about  140  Illus- 
trations. 8vo,  Cloth,  $4  50  ;  Sheep,  $5  00  ;  Half  Calf,  $6  16. 

THE  ILLUSTRATED  NATURAL  HISTORY.  By  the  Rev.  J.  G.  WOOD. 
M.A.,  F.L.S.  With  450  Engravings.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  05. 

CAMP  LIFE  IN  THE  WOODS;  and  the  Tricks  of  Trapping  and  Trap 
Making.  By  W.  HAMILTON  GIBSON,  Author  of  "Pastoral  Days."  Illus- 
trated. 12mo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 

NIMROD  OF  THE  SEA  ;  or,  The  American  Whaleman.  By  WILLIAM  M. 
DAVIS.  With  many  Illustrations.  12mo,  Cloth,  $2  00. 

ODD  PEOPLE :  Being  a  Popular  Description  of  Singular  Races  of  Man. 
By  Captain  MAYNE  REID.  With  Illustrations.  16mo,  Cloth,  75  cents. 


Interesting  Books  for  Young  People. 


COUNTRY  COUSINS.  Short  Studies  in  the  Natural  History  of  the 
United  States.  By  ERNEST  INGERSOLL.  Illustrated.  8vo,  Cloth,  $2  60. 

FRIENDS  WORTH  KNOWING.  Glimpses  of  American  Natural  His- 
tory. By  ERNEST  INGERSOLL.  Illustrated.  16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 

PAUL  B.  DU  CHAILLU'S  WORKS  ON  AFRICA.  Five  Volumes.  II- 
lustrated.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  50  each. 

THE  COUNTRY  OF  THE  DWARFS.  MY  APINGI  KINGDOM. 

WILD  LIFE  UNDER  THE  EQUATOR.  LOST  IN  THE  JUNGLE. 

STORIES  OF  THE  GORILLA  COUNTRY. 

ROUND  THE  WORLD ;  including  a  Residence  in  Victoria,  and  a  Jour- 
ney by  Rail  across  North  America.  By  a  Boy.  Edited  by  SAMUEL 
SMILES.  Illustrated.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  50. 

THE  SELF-HELP  SERIES.     By  S.  SMILES.     12mo,  Cloth,  $1  00  each. 
SELF-HELP.  CHARACTER.  THRIFT.  DUTY. 

STORIES  OF  INVENTORS  AND  DISCOVERERS  in  Science  and  the 
Useful  Arts.  By  JOHN  TIMES.  Illustrated.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  50. 

OUR  CHILDREN'S  SONGS.     Illustrated.     8vo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 

FAMOUS  LONDON  MERCHANTS.  A  Book  for  Boys.  By  H.  R.  F6x 
BOURNE.  Illustrated.  16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 

PRAIRIE  AND  FOREST.  A  Description  of  the  Game  of  North  Amer- 
ica, with  Personal  Adventures  in  their  Pursuit.  By  PARKER  GILLMORE. 
Illustrated.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  50. 

PUSS-CAT  MEW,  and  Other  New  Fairy  Stories  for  my  Children.  By 
E.  H.  K\ATCiiBULL-HuGESSEN.  Illustrated.  12mo,  Cloth,  f  1  25. 

FAIRY  TALES  OF  ALL  NATIONS.  By  EDOUARD  LABOULAYE.  Trans- 
lated by  MARY  L.  BOOTH.  Illustrated.  12mo,  Cloth,  Bevelled  Edges, 
$2  00 ;  Gilt  Edges,  $2  50. 

LAST  FAIRY  TALES.  By  EDOUARD  LABOULAYE.  Translated  by  MARY 
L.  BOOTH.  Illustrated.  12mo,  Cloth,  Bevelled  Edges,  $2  00;  Gilt 
Edges,  $2  50. 


6  Interesting  Books  for  Young  People. 

THE  THOUSAND  AND  ONE  NIGHTS ;  or,  The  Arabian  Nights'  Enter- 
tainments. Translated  and  Arranged  for  Family  Reading  by  E.  W. 
LANE.  600  Illustrations.  2  vols.,  12mo,  Cloth,  $3  50. 

JACOB  ABBOTT'S  WORKS. 

SCIENCE  FOR  THE  YOUNG.  Illustrated.    4  vola,  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  50  each. 
HEAT.  WATER  AND  LAND. 

LIGHT.  FORCE. 

FRANCONIA  STORIES.    Illustrated.    16mo,  Cloth,  75  cents  each.    . 

MALLEVILLE.  WALLACE.  MARY  ERSKINE. 

MARY  BELL.  BEECHNUT.  RODOLPHUS. 

ELLEN  LINN.  STUYVESANT.  CAROLINE. 

AGNES. 

LITTLE  LEARNER  SERIES.    Illustrated.     16mo,  Cloth,  75  cents  each. 
LEARNING  TO  TALK.  LEARNING  ABOUT  COMMON  THING& 

LEARNING  TO  THINK.         LEARNING  ABOUT  RIGHT  AND  WRONG. 
LEARNING  TO  READ. 

MARCO  PAUL  SERIES.  Marco  Paul's  Voyages  and  Travels  in  the  Pursuit  of 
Knowledge.  Illustrated.  Kimo,  Cloth,  75  cents  each. 

IN  NEW  YORK.  IN  VERMONT. 

ON  THE  ERIE  CANAL.  IN  BOSTON. 

IN  THE  FORESTS  OF  MAINE.  AT  THE  SPRINGFIELD  ARMORY. 

RAINBOW  AND  LUCKY  SERIES.     Illustrated.     ICmo,  Cloth,  75  cents  each. 
HANDIE.  THE  THREE  PINES. 

RAINBOW'S  JOURNEY.  SELLING  LUCKY. 

UP  THE  RIVER 

YOUNG  CHRISTIAN  SERIES.    Illustrated.     12mo,  Cloth,  $1  75  each. 
THE  YOUNG  CHRISTIAN.  THE  WAY  TO  DO  GOOD. 

THE  CORNER  STONE.  HOARYHEAD  AND  M'DONNER. 

THE  YOUNG  CHRISTIAN.  A  Memorial  Volume.  With  a  Sketch  of  the  Author 
by  one  of  his  Sons.  Steel-Plate  Portrait  of  the  Author,  and  Wood  cuta.  Hn,.<. 
Cloth,  $2  00. 


Interesting  Books  for  Young  People. 


ABBOTTS'  (JACOB  AND  J.  S.  C.)  BIOGRAPHICAL  HISTORIES.     Il- 
lustrated.    16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00  per  volume. 

CYRUS  THE  GREAT.  MARY  QUEEN  OF  SCOT& 

DARIUS  THE  GREAT.  QUEEN  ELIZABETH. 

XERXES.  CHARLES  I. 

ALEXANDER  THE  GREAT.  3HARLES  II. 

ROMULUS.  HERNANDO  CORTEZ. 

HANNIBAL.  HENRY  IV. 

PYRRHUS.  LOUIS  XIV. 

JULIUS  CAESAR.  MARIA  ANTOINETTE. 

CLEOPATRA.  MADAME  ROLAND. 

NERO.  JOSEPHINE. 

ALFRED  THE  GREAT.  JOSEPH  BONAPARTE. 

WILLIAM  THE  CONQUEROR  HORTEJJSE. 

RICHARD  I.  LOUIS  PHILIPPE. 

RICHARD  II.  GENGHIS  KHAN. 

RICHARD  III.  KING  PHILIP. 

MARGARET  OF  ANJOU.  PETER  THE  GREAT. 

THE  HISTORY  OF  SANDFORD  AND  MERTON.     By  THOMAS  DAT. 
18mo,  Half  Bound,  75  cents. 

JOHN  BONNER'S  CHILD'S  HISTORIES. 

CHILD'S  HISTORY  OF  GREECE.     Illustrated.    2  vols.,  16mo,  Cloth,  $2  50. 
CHILD'S  HISTORY  OF  ROME.     Illustrated.     2  vols.,  16mo,  Cloth,  $2  50. 

CHILD'S  HISTORY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES.  New  Edition,  Revised,  and 
brought  down  to  the  Close  of  the  Rebellion.  Illustrated.  3  vols.,  16mo,  Cloth, 
$375. 

THE  STORY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  NAVY,  for  Boys.     By  BENSON 
J.  LOSSING.     Illustrated.     12mo,  Half  Leather,  $  1  75. 

FRENCH  HISTORY  FOR  ENGLISH  CHILDREN.     By  SARAH  BROOK. 
With  Illustrations  and  Colored  Maps.    16mo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 

CHILD'S  HISTORY  OF  ENGLAND.     By  CHAELKS  DICKENS.    Illustrated. 
2  vols.  in  one,  16mo,  Half  Leather,  60  cents. 


8  Interesting  Books  for  Young  People. 

THE  HISTORY  OF  A  MOUTHFUL  OF  BREAD,  and  its  Effect  on  the 
Organization  of  Men  and  Animals.  By  JEAN  MACE.  Translated  by 
Mrs.  ALFRED  GATTT.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  75. 

THE  SERVANTS  OF  THE  STOMACH.  By  JEAN  MACE.  Reprinted  from 
the  London  Edition,  Revised  and  Corrected.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  76. 

HOME  FAIRY  TALES.  By  JEAN  MACE.  Illustrated.  12mo,  Cloth, 
f  1  75. 

YOUTH'S  HEALTH-BOOK.     32mo,  Paper,  25  cents;  Cloth, 40  cents. 

STORIES  OF  THE  OLD  DOMINION.  From  the  Settlement  to  the  End 
of  the  Revolution.  By  JOHN  ESTEN  COOKE.  Illustrated.  12mo,  Cloth, 
$1  50. 

FRED  MARKHAM  IN*RUSSIA;  or,  The  Boy  Travellers  in  the  Land  of 
the  Czar.  By  W.  H.  G.  KINGSTON.  Illustrated.  Small  4to,  Cloth,  75 
cents. 

SELF-MADE  MEN.  By  CHARLES  C.  B.  SEYMOUR.  Many  Portraits.  12mo, 
Cloth,  $1  75. 

ROBINSON  CRUSOE,  of  York,  Mariner ;  with  a  Biography  of  DEFOB. 
Illustrated.  Complete  Edition.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  00. 

THE  SWISS  FAMILY  ROBINSON.     Ill'd.     2  vols.,  18mo,  Cloth,  $1  50. 

THE  SWISS  FAMILY  ROBINSON— Continued :  being  a  Sequel  to  the 
Foregoing.  2  vols.,  18mo,  Cloth,  $1  50. 

THE  PILGRIM'S  PROGRESS.  By  JOHN  BUNTAN.  With  a  Life  of  the 
Author  by  ROBERT  SOUTHET.  Illustrated.  12mo,  Cloth,  $1  00;  Gilt 
Edges,  $1  50. 

THE  CATSKILL  FAIRIES.  By  VIRGINIA  W.  JOHNSON.  Illustrated  by 
ALFRED  FREDERICKS.  Square  8vo,  Illuminated  Cloth,  $3  00. 

WHAT  MR.  DARWIN  SAW  in  his  Voyage  round  the  World  in  the  Ship 
"  Beagle."  Illustrated.  8vo,  Cloth,  $3  00. 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


MUSIC  LIBRARY: 


Ann 

FEB2619 
MAY? 


MAR  1  5  1990 


MUSIC  LIBRARY 


A     000047115 


i 


Univi 

Sc 

L